ISPE Volume 04

This Document is licensed to Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389 Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM


For individual use only. © Copyright ISPE 2001. All rights reserved.

October 27, 2000

Dear Colleagues: The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has been pleased to cooperate with the International Society for Pharmaceutical Engineering in the development of the Baseline® Pharmaceutical Engineering Guide for Water and Steam Systems. We appreciate the coopertive efforts and the dedicated intensive work of the engineers who voluntarily initiated the development of this Guide. This is an excellent example of how through public and private cooperative efforts, both industry and consumers can benefit. This document covers engineering aspects of design, construction and operation of new water and steam systems. It expands on existing FDA guidance on water systems. This Guide is solely created and owned by ISPE. It is not an FDA regulation, standard or guidance document and water and steam systems built in conformance with this Guide may or may not meet FDA requirements. FDA has provided comments for ISPE's consideration in preparing this Guide. It should be helpful to the engineering profession and the industry for the design, construction and operation of new water and steam systems FDA is pleased with the development of this document and we look forward to a continued working relationship as future Baseline® Pharmaceutical Engineering Guides are developed. Sincerely,

This Document is licensed to

Janet Woodcock, M.D. Director, Center for Drug Evaluation and Research

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Dennis Baker Associate Commissioner for Regulatory Affairs ID number: 216389 Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM




WATER AND STEAM SYSTEMS ISPE PHARMACEUTICAL ENGINEERING GUIDE

FOREWORD For many years, the pharmaceutical industry has experienced increases in the cost of new facilities. These increases in cost have been driven in part by uncertainty about the requirements for regulatory compliance. Some significant areas of concern are validation, particularly related to automation systems, and the trend to validate back to source utilities. The absence of a consistent and widely accepted interpretation of some regulatory requirements has led to one-upmanship. This practice of building increasingly technically advanced facilities has led to increased cost, longer lead times and, in some cases, delays in bringing new products to market. In May 1994, engineering representatives from the pharmaceutical industry engaged in a discussion with the International Society for Pharmaceutical Engineering (ISPE) and the Food and Drug Administration (FDA). As a result of that discussion in November 1994, ISPE began work on nine facility engineering Guides, now known as the Baseline® Pharmaceutical Engineering Guides. The first, “Bulk Pharmaceutical Chemicals,” was published in June 1996. The second, “Oral Solid Dosage Forms,’” was published in February 1998. The third, “Sterile Manufacturing Facilities,” was published in February 1999. This is the fourth such Guide, covering Pharmaceutical Water and Steam Systems. Each Engineering Guide was created by, and is owned solely by ISPE. FDA provided comments on this and previous Guides, and many of their suggestions have been incorporated. As with the BPC Guide, OSD, and Sterile Guide, the Water and Steam Systems Guide has been sponsored by ISPE’s Pharmaceutical Advisory Council, made up of senior pharmaceutical engineering executives from owner companies, and ISPE senior management. Overall planning, direction, and technical guidance in the preparation of the Water and Steam Systems Guide was provided by a Steering Committee most of whom were involved in the BPC Guide. The Water and Steam Systems Guide itself was produced by a Task Team of individuals who expended a great deal of their own time in its preparation and development. The Water and Steam Systems Appendix contains material considered “informational” which, although necessary, would have been detrimental to the clarity of the dedicated chapter. The Appendix has not been reviewed by and therefore is not endorsed by the FDA.

Editors’ Disclaimer: This Guide is meant to assist pharmaceutical manufacturers in the design and construction of new and renovated facilities that are required to comply with the requirements of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA). The International Society for Pharmaceutical Engineering (ISPE) cannot ensure, and does not warrant, that a facility built in accordance with this Guide will be acceptable to FDA.


Limitation of Liability In no event shall ISPE or any of its affiliates, or the officers, directors, employees, members, or agents of each of them, be liable for any damages of any kind, including without limitation any special, incidental, indirect, or consequential damages, whether or not advised of the possibility of such damages, and on any theory of liability whatsoever, arising out of or in connection with the use of this information.

© Copyright ISPE 2001. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means – graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems – without written permission of ISPE.

All trademarks used are acknowledged.

ISBN 1-931879-79-6 For individual use only. © Copyright ISPE 2001. All rights reserved.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389

Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM

3

WATER AND STEAM SYSTEMS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS CHAPTER WRITERS AND REVIEWERS The following individuals took lead roles in the preparation of this document: Gerald L. Geisler, Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. was the Task Team Chairperson for the Water and Steam Systems Guide. Moe Elmorsi, Boehringer Ingelheim, acted as the Guide mentor.

Technical Documents Steering Committee Chairperson Paul Lorenzo, (Retired)/ Paul D’Eramo, Johnson & Johnson

The Core Team on the Water and Steam Systems Guide comprised: Gerald L. Geisler, Bristol-Myers Squibb Co.

Jeff Biskup, Clark, Richardson & Biskup

Robert Myers, Kvaerner

Bob Bader, Kinetics

The Chapter Credits are as follows: Gerald Geisler, Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Brian Owens, H2O Pure, Inc.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Gerald Geisler, Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Brian Owens, Water Pure, Inc.

Chapter 2: Key Design Philosophies

Jeffrey Biskup, Clark, Richardson & Biskup Maria Capote, Source Tech James C. Cox, Merck & Co. Gerald L. Geisler, Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Ryan Schroeder, Clark, Richardson & Biskup

Chapter 3: Water Options and Programming

Sidney Brookes, DuPont Merck Pharmaceuticals

Chapter 4: Source Feed Water Quality and Pretreatment

Michael Partow, Pfizer Inc. Andrew Zaske, Osmonics Gary Zoccolante, U.S. Filter

Chapter 5: Final Treatment Non-Compendial and Compendial Purified Water


Sharif Disi, Meco Brian Owens, H2O Pure, Inc. Brian Owens, H2O Pure, Inc. Bob Bader, Kinetics

6: Final Treatment Compendial WFI Mr. ShlomoChapter Sackstein Herzlia, Chapter 7: Pharmaceutical Steam ID number: 216389

Robert Myers, Kvaerner Gary Gray, East Group Bob Bader, Kinetics Randolph Brozek, Pfizer, Inc. James Cox, Merck & Co Paul Skinner, Clark, Richardson & Biskup Gerald Geisler, Bristol-Myers Squibb Co.

Chapter 8: Storage and Distribution Systems


4


WATER AND STEAM SYSTEMS John Linder, CE & IC Debra Nahas, Eli Lilly & Co.

Chapter 9: Instrumentation and Control

John Fadool, Glaxo Wellcome Robert Myers, Kvaerner Manfred Septinus, Roche Carolina, Inc. Phil DeSantis, Fluor Daniel

Chapter 10: Commissioning & Validation

Dominick Smith, Regeneron Phil Desantis, Fluor Daniel Sidney Brooks, DuPont Merk Pharmaceuticals James C. Cox, Merck & Co. Sharif Disi, Meco Brian Owens, Water Pure, Inc. Michael Partow, Pfizer Paul Skinner, Clark, Richardson & Biskup Gary P Zoccolante, U. S. Filter Pat H. Banes, Oakley Services Co.

Chapters 11 and 12: Appendices

The above Guide Task Team worked on one or more chapters and volunteered countless hours to attend meetings, and review the many drafts, which were prepared over an 18-month period. The following members of the Water and Steam Systems Task Team also worked on one or more of the chapters and reviewed drafts: Georgia Keresty, Ph.D., Bristol-Myers Squibb

Paula Soteropoulis, Genzyme Corp.

Alex Konopka, Eli Lilly & Co.

John Trentacosti, Johnson & Johnson

Carl Roe, Abbott Labs

FDA Reviewers We would like to thank the following FDA review team for their input to this Guide: Sharon Smith Holston

(Deputy Commissioner for External Affairs)

Joseph Phillips

(Deputy Regional Food and Drug Director, Mid-Atlantic Region)

Tracy Roberts

(CDER, Office of Compliance)


Robert Coleman

(Atlanta National Expert)

Richard Friedman

(CDER, Office of Compliance) Mr. Shlomo Sackstein (Investigator,Herzlia, Drug Specialist, New Brunswick, NJ Inspection Post) ID number: 216389

Nancy Rolli



5

WATER AND STEAM SYSTEMS

Also, ISPE acknowledges with gratitude the following companies who supplied the start-up funding for this project: Alcon Laboratories

Bayer Corp.

Boehringer Ingelheim

Bristol-Myers Squibb Co.

Eli Lilly & Co.

Glaxo Wellcome Inc.

Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.

Merck & Co., Inc.

Pfizer Inc.

Pharmacia & Upjohn Inc.

Wyeth-Ayerst Laboratories

Zeneca Pharmaceuticals

Zenith Goldline Pharmaceuticals


6


TABLE OF CONTENTS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 4 1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

BACKGROUND ..................................................................................................................... SCOPE OF THIS GUIDE ...................................................................................................... SOME APPLICABLE FDA CURRENT REGULATIONS AND GUIDES FOR PHARMACEUTICAL WATER SYSTEMS .............................................................................. KEY CONCEPTS .................................................................................................................. GUIDE STRUCTURE ............................................................................................................

11 11 11 12 13

2. KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... UNITED STATES PHARMACOPOEIA (USP) ........................................................................ SPECIFICATION OF PHARMACEUTICAL WATER QUALITY .............................................. CRITICAL PROCESS PARAMETERS .................................................................................. CGMP COMPLIANCE ISSUES ............................................................................................. DESIGN RANGE VERSUS OPERATING RANGE ................................................................

15 15 20 21 21 22

3. WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... WATER QUALITY OPTIONS ................................................................................................. SYSTEM PLANNING ............................................................................................................ SYSTEM DESIGN .................................................................................................................

25 25 29 33

4. PRETREATMENT OPTIONS 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... PROCESS DESIGN OF PRETREATMENT .......................................................................... FEEDWATER TO PRETREATMENT QUALITY: TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............ OUTPUT WATER FROM PRETREATMENT: QUALITY OF FEEDWATER TO FINAL TREATMENT .............................................................................................................. CONTROL OF FOULING: REMOVAL OF TURBIDITY AND PARTICULATES ...................... CONTROL OF SCALING: REMOVAL OF HARDNESS AND METALS ................................. REMOVAL OF ORGANICS ................................................................................................... SYSTEM DESIGN FOR CONTROL OF MICROBIAL GROWTH .......................................... REMOVAL OF MICROBIAL CONTROL AGENTS ................................................................. CHANGES IN ANION COMPOSITION / CONCENTRATION ................................................ THE IMPORTANCE OF PH IN PRETREATMENT ................................................................. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ............................ PRETREATMENT SUMMARY ..............................................................................................


35 35 37 38 39 39 40 41 42 42 43 43 44

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 47 ION EXCHANGE ................................................................................................................... 48 ID number: 216389

5. FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5

CONTINUOUS ELECTRODEIONIZATION (CEDI) ............................................................... 51 REVERSE OSMOSIS ........................................................................................................... 53 POLISHING COMPONENTS - NON-IONIC CONTAMINANTS REDUCTION ....................... 56



7

TABLE OF CONTENTS 6. FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... US PHARMACOPOEIA ISSUES ........................................................................................... DISTILLATION ...................................................................................................................... DISTILLATION APPLICATIONS AND CAPACITIES .............................................................. PROCESS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................... REVERSE OSMOSIS (RO) ................................................................................................... USP - WATER FOR INJECTION SYSTEMS COMPARISON ................................................

63 63 64 64 65 70 73

7. PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... CGMP ISSUES ..................................................................................................................... TYPES OF STEAM ............................................................................................................... BACKGROUND AND INDUSTRY PRACTICES .................................................................... SYSTEM PLANNING ............................................................................................................ PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM PURITY DECISION TREE ...................................................... PROCESS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................... SIZING THE CLEAN STEAM SYSTEM ................................................................................. COST IMPLICATIONS .......................................................................................................... STEAM “QUALITY” ............................................................................................................... DISTRIBUTION ..................................................................................................................... FOUR EXAMPLES OF CORRECT PIPING PRACTICE .......................................................

75 75 76 77 80 82 83 86 90 90 90 93

8. STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 8.10

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 95 SYSTEM DESIGN ................................................................................................................. 95 SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION DESIGN ....................................................................................... 96 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 113 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................................................... 115 COMPARISON OF WFI SYSTEMS WITH STORAGE TANK AND WITHOUT STORAGE TANK ................................................................................................................. 117 MICROBIAL CONTROL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ....................................................... 119 CONTINUOUS MICROBIAL CONTROL ............................................................................. 122 PERIODIC STERILIZATION/SANITIZATION ....................................................................... 124 SYSTEM DESIGN FOR STERILIZATION/SANITIZATION .................................................. 126

9. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6


INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. PRINCIPLES ....................................................................................................................... GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... DESIGN CONDITIONS VERSUS OPERATING RANGE .................................................... INSTRUMENTATION SPIKES ............................................................................................. CONTROL SYSTEMS .........................................................................................................



8


129 129 130 134 135 135

TABLE OF CONTENTS 10. COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. SYSTEM QUALIFICATION DOCUMENTATION .................................................................. SYSTEM QUALIFICATION SAMPLING PROGRAM ........................................................... ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ................................................................................................... QUALIFICATION REPORTS ............................................................................................... CHANGE CONTROL AND REQUALIFICATION .................................................................

137 137 138 140 141 141

11. APPENDIX 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 11.12

USP REGULATED WATER QUALITY ................................................................................. EUROPEAN PERSPECTIVE .............................................................................................. PASSIVATION ..................................................................................................................... PRETREATMENT PROCESSES ........................................................................................ FINAL TREATMENT FOR NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................. DISTILLATION FOR HIGH PURITY WATER SYSTEMS ..................................................... CLEAN STEAM - CLEAN STEAM GENERATORS ............................................................. MICROBIAL CONTROL BASICS, TESTING, AND STERILIZATION/SANITIZATION EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND INSTALLATION ISSUES ........................................................ FABRICATION/PROCEDURES FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ...................................... DESIGN OF WFI/PURIFIED WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ......................................... FABRICATION OF A WFI/PURIFIED WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ............................ ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ................................................................................

143 151 153 162 175 182 187 190 198 205 206 213



9



INTRODUCTION





INTRODUCTION 1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1

BACKGROUND

The design, construction, and validation (commissioning and qualification) of water and steam systems for the pharmaceutical industry represent key opportunities for manufacturers, engineering professionals, and equipment suppliers. These systems are required to meet current Good Manufacturing Practice cGMP regulations while remaining in compliance with all other governing codes, laws, and regulations. The cost of bringing these systems on line is highly variable, owing to interpretation of regulatory requirements and overly conservative design approaches. This Guide is intended to offer a practical, consistent interpretation, while still allowing flexibility and innovation. This Guide was prepared by ISPE, with feedback from industry representatives from all areas and disciplines, and comments provided by FDA. It reflects ISPE’s current thinking related to engineering of new water and steam systems. It is recognized that industry standards evolve, and this document reflects the understanding of them as of the publication date.

1.2

SCOPE OF THIS GUIDE

This Guide is intended for the design, construction, and operation of new water and steam systems. It is neither a standard nor a detailed design guide. The validation of water and steam systems, which comprises commissioning and qualification activities, will not be discussed in-depth in this Guide, but is covered in the Commissioning and Qualification Baseline® Guide. The purpose of this Guide is to focus on engineering issues, and provide cost effective water and steam systems. Where non-engineering issues (e.g., microbiological topics) are covered, the information is included to stress the importance of such topics and the impact they have on water and steam system design. Such non-engineering topics, therefore, are not covered comprehensively, and specific advice from QA departments and technical experts must be sought where technical input is required. This Guide is intended primarily for regulatory compliance for the domestic United States (US) market, and follows US standards and references. European and other non-US standards and references may be incorporated in future revisions.

1.3

•


SOME APPLICABLE FDA CURRENT REGULATIONS AND GUIDES FOR PHARMACEUTICAL WATER SYSTEMS Food and Drug and Cosmetic Act

•

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein The United States Pharmacopoeia XXIV Herzlia, Title 21 CFR, Part 211 ID number: 216389

•

FDA Guide To Inspections of High Purity Water Systems

•



11

INTRODUCTION 1.4

KEY CONCEPTS

The following key concepts covered in this Guide are: a) Methodology for defining the required water quality and configuring a water delivery system. b) Critical process parameters. c) Good Engineering Practices. d) Design Options

a) Methodology for defining the required quality and configuring a water delivery system: Perhaps the most critical step in a new pharmaceutical water or steam system, from a regulatory as well as technical and financial standpoint, is the specification of water or steam quality required. The specification established is likely to have a larger impact on lifecycle costs of the system than any of the subsequent design decisions. In addition, regulated industries must consider the costs of noncompliance and water system failures. Therefore, it is essential for the designer to seek advice from the Quality unit and technical experts early in the process. Once process water and/or steam requirements are determined, system design options need to be addressed. This Guide presents alternative baseline water and steam system building blocks and associated advantages and disadvantages of each. These baseline building blocks are qualified relative to such things as capital costs; feed water chemistry; product water quality; chemical handling; water consumption; energy consumption; outside service costs maintenance requirements; and chemical/microbial/endotoxin removal performance. Guide emphasis is on how the system design should be determined based on the quality of feed water; the design of the pretreatment and final treatment system; the storage and distribution system design; and operation/maintenance procedures. The Guide aims to improve consistency of pharmaceutical water and steam quality throughout the industry, as a result of system performance and reliability improvements. It also provides the user with alternative basic system building blocks to permit reliable and consistent generation of the required water or steam quality. b) Critical process parameters


Critical parameters are defined as those parameters that directly affect the product quality. For example, since microbial quality cannot be directly monitored in real time, the parameters relied upon to control microbial growth are normally considered critical. These may include temperature; UV intensity; ozone concentration; circulating systems under positive pressure; etc. In regard to chemical purity, the quality attributes themselves (properties of water produced), may be monitored at or after each process step, and the proper performance of that operation confirmed directly. For a system producing compendial water, properties mandated in the official monograph obviously constitute critical parameters.


Critical instruments are those instruments that measure critical quality attributes. This concept is discussed in Chapter 2 and used as a basis for subsequent chapter discussions where appropriate.


12


INTRODUCTION c) Good Engineering Practice (GEP) GEP recognizes that all systems in a facility, whether they are water systems, steam systems, elevators, process reactors, safety valves, or rest rooms, require some form of commissioning and/or qualification. Nearly all systems require documentation, inspection, and field testing. Good Engineering Practice capitalizes upon this practice suggesting that manufacturers engage all stakeholders (engineers, operators, Quality Assurance, and others) very early in the planning, design, construction, commissioning/qualification phases to ensure that systems are documented only once. d) Design Options The Guide emphasizes that a water system can be designed in many different ways, yet meet the overall requirements of the system. It encourages a well-thought-out, planned approach to the design with input from many areas of the organization including Quality Assurance.

1.5

GUIDE STRUCTURE

The structure of the Guide is shown in Figure 1-1 below. The chapters have been organized to assist in a logical decision process to determine the type of water required and the system design needed to provide it. Figure 1-1 Pharmaceutical Water and Steam Baseline® Guide Structure



13



KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES





KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES 2.

KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES

2.1

INTRODUCTION

Pharmaceutical water is the most widely used ingredient in drug manufacturing and the main component in equipment/system cleaning. Therefore, systems for the production of pharmaceutical water constitute a key component in every manufacturing facility. The nature of producing pharmaceutical waters is to minimize or eliminate potential sources of contamination. This Guide considers this and the means by which engineers can design out, or ensure control of the risk. The quality of Pharmaceutical Water and Steam is not only critical from a regulatory point of view, but also from a financial point of view. The Pharmaceutical Water and Steam specification has the largest impact on lifecycle costs of the system. It must be demonstrated that all pharmaceutical waters (non-compendial and United States Pharmacopoeia (USP) monograph compendial waters) can be produced consistently to specification. Establishing the level of microbial control needed in a pharmaceutical water and steam system used in the manufacture of a nonsterile product requires an understanding of both the use of the product and the manufacturing process. Manufacturers need to define the appropriate water purity based upon sound process understanding and system equipment capability. They must determine the specific purification capability for each processing step, the limitations of the unit operation, and the critical parameters, which affect the specified water/steam quality - chemically, physically, or biologically. Expert QA advice should be sought to provide further details about this important area. USP covers two compendial water qualities (USP Purified Water and USP Water for Injection). This Guide supports both these water qualities plus additional non-compendial waters including “Drinking Water”. It is common practice to name non-compendial waters (exclusive of “Drinking Water”) used in pharmaceutical manufacturing by the final treatment step (i.e., Reverse Osmosis/RO water, deionized water/DI water, etc.). Guidance on establishing specifications for monographed USP water is provided in the United States Pharmacopoeia (USP). Additionally, the FDA Guide to Inspections of High Purity Water Systems (which was developed for FDA personnel) also provides useful information to the user.

2.2

UNITED STATES PHARMACOPOEIA (USP)

USP is a Guide to producing medicinal products for consumption within the US. USP specify standards of quality, purity, packaging, and labeling for a number of waters including two bulk waters, “Water for Injection” and “Purified Water” used in the preparation of compendial (USP) dosage forms. This Guide is concerned with the production of these two compendial (USP) waters and does not address the other “packaged waters” monographed by the USP. USP 24 (and supplements) is the current version, at the time this Guide was prepared.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 2.2.1 USP Purified Water Herzlia, Official monograph requirements forID “Purified Water” require that “Purified Water”: number: 216389 •

Is obtained from water complying with the “U.S. Environmental Protection Agency National Primary Drinking Water Regulations, or comparable regulations of the European Union or Japan, and will be referred to subsequently as “Drinking Water”.

•

Contains no added substance



15

KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES •

Is obtained by a suitable process

•

Meets the requirements for Water Conductivity

•

Meets the requirements for Total Organic Carbon (TOC)

2.2.2

USP Water for Injection (WFI)

Official monograph requirements for “Water for Injection” require that “Water for Injection”: •

Meets all of the requirements for “Purified Water”

•

Is obtained by a suitable process and purified by distillation or Reverse Osmosis

•

Meets the requirements of the Bacterial Endotoxin test and contains not more than 0.25 USP Endotoxin Unit per ml

•

Is prepared using suitable means to minimize microbial growth

2.2.3

Non-Monographed but accepted requirements

The USP “General Information” provides background information, which clarifies regulatory intent. The following information is included in Chapter 11: •

Purified water systems require frequent sanitization and microbiological monitoring to ensure water of appropriate microbiological quality at the points of use.

•

Water for Injection is “finally subjected to distillation or Reverse Osmosis”, implying that the Still or RO unit is the last unit operation. “The system used to produce, store and distribute water for injection must be designed to prevent microbial contamination and the formation of microbial endotoxins, and it must be validated.”

•

An action limit of 100 colony forming units per ml (10,000 CFU/100 ml) for “Purified Water” is suggested.

•

An action limit of 10 colony forming units per 100 ml (10 CFU/100 ml) for “Water for Injection” is suggested.

•

Minimum sample sizes are 1 ml for USP Purified Water and 100 ml for WFI. (FDA recommends 100 ml for Purified Water and 250 ml for WFI).


Note: “It should be emphasized that the above action guidelines are not intended to be totally inclusive for every situation where ingredient waters are to be employed. It is therefore, incumbent upon the manufacturer to supplement the general action guidelines to fit each particular manufacturing situation” [USP24, page 2163]. When designing a pharmaceutical or medical device water system, it is critical for the designer to consult with the manufacturers technical experts to ascertain what purity levels must be achieved.



16


KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES 2.2.4

USP testing and instrument requirements

THREE STAGE CONDUCTIVITY TESTING Method of Measurement

Acceptance Criteria

One

Use In-Line or grab sample and measure the conductivity and operating water temperature

Use the stage 1 table from the latest revision to USP to determine the conductivity limit.

Two

Retest at least 100 ml of the stage 1 grab sample for conductivity after vigorous mixing and temperature normalization to 25°C ±1°C

When change does not exceed a net of 0.1 µS/cm over 5 minutes, measure the conductivity. If less than 2.1 µS/cm the water meets the requirements.

Three

If the stage 2 test does not meet the requirements, retest the sample within 5 minutes while maintaining temperature. Add 0.3 ml per 100 ml of saturated potassium chloride solution and determine the pH to the nearest 0.1 pH unit.

Use the stage 3 table from the latest revision to USP to determine the conductivity limit. If either the measured conductivity is greater than the limit value or the pH value is outside the range of 5 to 7, the water does not meet the requirements.

Stage

CONDUCTIVITY INSTRUMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCEPTABLE REGULATORY MEASUREMENT Temperature Measurement

± 0.25°C Accuracy

Resolution

< ± 0.1 µS/cm

Conductivity cell constant

± 2% Accurate

Reading accuracy

< ± 0.1 µS/cm

Location of In-Line meters

Must reflect the quality of the water used. Typically, the optimum location in a distributed water loop is following the last “point of use” valve, and prior to the storage tank return connection.

Instrument type

The above procedure is based on the use of a “dip” or “flow through” conductivity cell. Conductivity readings used to control USP compendial waters must be non-temperature-compensated measurements.

2.2.5

Total Organic Carbon (TOC) and Requirements for TOC Control

TOC is an indirect measure, as carbon, of organic molecules present in high purity water. USP replaced the USP 22 “Oxidizable Substance” wet chemistry test with an In-Line capable, TOC test. A limit was determined by USP to be 0.5ppm or 500ppb, based on the results of studies and an industry wide survey of pharmaceutical water systems.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Instruments are available for measuring TOC In-Line from slipstreams and from grab samples manually removed from the water system. Automatic Off-Line sample 216389 introduction systems are available for processing ID number: SYSTEMS AVAILABLE FOR MEASURING TOC

large numbers of grab samples. USP have not prevented acceptable technologies from being used, but limit the methods to the following instruments that are capable of completely oxidizing the organic molecules to Carbon dioxide (CO2), measuring the CO2 levels as carbon, discriminating between Inorganic carbon (IC) and the CO2 levels generated from the oxidization of the organic molecules, maintaining an equipment limit of detection of 0.05 mg per liter, or lower, and periodically demonstrating an equipment “suitability”.



17

KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES A number of acceptable methods exist for measuring TOC in high purity water. All share the same basic methodology, the complete oxidation of the organics to CO2 and the measurement of this CO2. Three general approaches, based on the above concept are used in a variety of commercially available instruments, which measure Organic Carbon in a water sample by completely oxidizing the organic molecules to Carbon dioxide (CO2) and measuring the CO2 levels as carbon. Four common oxidation methods and four common CO2 measurement methods are used in different combinations in these TOC analyzers. The total carbon (TC) result may be expected to include Inorganic carbon resulting from dissolved CO2 and bicarbonate which must be subtracted from the TC to produce the Total Organic Carbon level in the sample. Some TOC analyzers remove the Inorganic Carbon (IC) by acidifying the samples and either gas stripping or vacuum degassing the CO2. In pharmaceutical waters the IC levels are generally very low and IC removal processes are not usually required. TYPES OF TOC ANALYZERS •

Laboratory Instruments

•

In-Line Instruments

•

Laboratory Instruments capable of operating in-line

When USP accepted the well-proven technology for measuring TOC, they applied laboratory quality control procedures to its application. While these techniques are common in a laboratory for setting a wide range equipment for measurement over a specific range, they place unusual limitations on In-Line TOC applications. TOC instruments must be: •

Maintained calibrated to ensure reliable and consistent readings

•

Periodically checked for “suitability”

•

Standardized

•

May be used In-Line or Off-Line

•

If installed In-Line, the instrument must reflect the quality of the water used

OUT OF RANGE EXCURSIONS Out of range readings may be experienced as the direct result of the above types of organic contaminations. Spikes may also occur as the result of extraneous electrical interference etc. All spikes must be identified and formally explained.


Procedures to handle out of range spikes should be available. These procedures should address short duration spikes, which occur following continuous acceptable readings and are followed by similar acceptable readings, specifically in In-Line applications. Procedures should list the potential sources and allow the acceptance of such a spike without further investigation if the spike is preceded and succeeded by a number of acceptable readings.


Unexplainable spikes may be minimized when using In-Line batch sampling systems by extending the sample analysis period to 30 or 60 minutes rather than using shorter analysis periods. This technique measures more sample in a longer time period, allowing the recorded result to be based on statistical analysis over the extended time period.


18


KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES Table 2-1

In-Line compared with Off-Line TOC Monitoring In-Line

Off-Line

Features

Monitor should include built in alarms and be programmable in respect to the “out of spec.” excursions. Should have convenient method of conducting Limit Response and Suitability Tests.

Laboratory instrument should be capable of achieving robust oxidation levels and should include automatic Off-Line sample introduction systems, for processing large numbers of grab samples. A generous supply of scrupulously clean polymer based sample containers is required. Laboratory instruments will require reagents and carrier gases.

Installed cost

Medium, based on above features and a single installed unit. High, if multiple units are installed.

High, based on above features

Operating cost

Low to high, depending on instrument capability for suitability and limit response testing and the number of instruments installed.

High

Recommended test frequency

4 to 48/day

1/shift

The recommended frequency is based on the specific system requirement for trending or concern for “out of spec.” excursions and their subsequent investigations. See paragraph on “Special Requirements”. Frequency of Suitability and Limit Response testing

2.2.6

Based on documented history

1/shift

USP 23 Microbial and Endotoxin Testing


Microbial contaminants and Endotoxins are traditionally sampled at the points of use in a water system. USP 24 has made no changes in this area.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 2.2.7 USP 23 pH testing Herzlia, Testing water for compliance with theID USPnumber: 24 pH limits is required as part of the stage 3 Off-Line conductivity 216389

testing. (pH must be confirmed as being in the range of 5 to 7.) Testing may use calibrated Off-Line meters. Calibration should be performed using solutions of a known pH, covering the range of 5 to 7. The frequency of calibration should ensure that the levels of accuracy are maintained. Refer to manufacturer for specific recommendations on both method and frequency.



19

KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES 2.2.8

Validated Backup Instrumentation

Failure of a monitoring instrument should not be precluded when making decisions concerning type, location and the extent of validation. Since each excursion from the acceptable limits must be investigated, In-Line installations should be supplemented with a calibrated laboratory instrument as backup. Validation should include the operation in Off-Line mode as a supplement or alternate to In-Line instrumentation. Off-Line laboratory testing should also include a backup instrument to be maintained calibrated in case of failure of the primary unit.

2.3

SPECIFICATION OF PHARMACEUTICAL WATER QUALITY

2.3.1

Specifying Water Quality

The quality of water supplied in any pharmaceutical process must be consistent with the quality required for the final product. It may not be sufficient to specify a water quality that meets the specification of the two compendial grades of water outlined in the USP. These grades, USP Purified water and WFI, are minimum standards. A more stringent specification could be required depending on the intended use of the product and on the process used to manufacture that product. It is the responsibility of each drug manufacturer to establish the logic for their water quality specification based on the required quality of the end product. Pharmaceutical water uses can be categorized as: •

An ingredient in a dosage form manufacturing process

•

An ingredient in an Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient (API) process (the term API is used interchangeably with BPC, meaning Bulk Pharmaceutical Chemical)

•

Equipment cleaning or rinsing

Water intended for use as a dosage form ingredient must be USP monograph water and must be produced consistently to specification. Evidence of control is required for all critical process parameters that may affect the final drug characterization. USP WFI water would be expected to be used for parenteral manufacture, some ophthalmic and some inhalation products. The monographs for USP Purified and WFI compendial pharmaceutical waters stipulate the baseline requirements for water used in production, processing, or formulation of pharmaceutical activities. For some applications where there are no requirements for compendial waters, the manufacturer may establish quality specifications equivalent to USP-WFI or Purified Waters, depending on the specific application.


Specifications for water used as an ingredient (exclusive of sterile bulks) in the manufacture of API’s or as the wash solvent in the wash or rinse cycles must be determined by the manufacturer. In some cases “Drinking Water” may be acceptable, or certain chemical or microbial or endotoxin quality specifications may be established, or one of the compendial waters may be used. The specification should be based on the potential for contamination of the final drug product. Any decision about water usage must be made with the approval of Quality Assurance.


With the appropriate justification, non-compendial pharmaceutical waters (including “drinking waters”) may be utilized throughout pharmaceutical operations including production equipment washing / cleaning as well as rinsing, laboratory usage and as an ingredient in the manufacture or formulation of bulk active pharmaceutical ingredients. Compendial water must, however, be used with preparation of (as an ingredient) compendial dosage forms. In both compendial and non-compendial waters, the manufacturer must establish an appropriate microbial quality specification per the FDA “Guide To Inspections of High Purity Water Systems”. The


20


KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES significance of microorganisms in non-sterile pharmaceutical products should be evaluated in terms of the use of the product and the nature of the product and the potential harm to the user. Manufacturers are expected to establish appropriate microbial alert and action levels for microbial counts associated with the types of pharmaceutical waters utilized. These levels must be based on process requirements and the historical record of the system in question. The US Pharmacopoeia states action levels that are generally considered acceptable are 500 CFU/ml for drinking water, 100 CFU/ml for Purified Water, and 10 CFU/100 ml for WFI, and may be more stringent depending on its use. Microbial system design considerations are discussed later (see Chapter 8). The user should consider whether microorganisms in pharmaceutical water could threaten product preservation or product stability, or whether water may contaminate product with pathogenic bacteria or endotoxins. Specific microbiological objectives and standards suitable to the needs of the products manufactured must be defined. A water system must meet these objectives and a monitoring program must be established / implemented to document that the standards are consistently being met. Engineers involved in water system design must understand the chemical and microbial quality attributes in the water delivered to use points. The final quality of pharmaceutical water and steam is determined by the manufacturing process and end product, quality of feed water, pretreatment and final treatment sub-systems, storage and distribution system design and operator/maintenance procedures. Expert QA advice should be sought out to give further details about this important area.

2.4

CRITICAL PROCESS PARAMETERS

Critical parameters are defined as those parameters, which directly affect the water quality at, or after, a treatment step. For example, water temperature during a heat sanitization cycle has a direct effect on water quality. Regarding chemical purity, the quality attributes may be monitored at or after each critical process step, and the proper performance of that operation confirmed directly. Since microbial quality cannot be directly monitored in real time, the parameters relied upon to control microbial growth are usually (depending on the system) considered critical, such as temperature, UV intensity, ozone concentration, circulation rate, sanitization procedures, positive pressure, etc. For a system producing compendial water, properties mandated in the official monograph (including bioburden and endotoxins) constitute critical attributes. Critical instruments are those instruments, which measure critical attributes or parameters.

2.5


cGMP COMPLIANCE ISSUES

Satisfying regulatory concerns is primarily a matter of establishing proper specifications, and using effective and appropriate methods to verify and record that those specifications are satisfied. Issues such as quality of installation, sampling and testing procedures, operating and maintenance procedures, record keeping, etc. often have greater significance than the particular technologies selected to purify and distribute the water.


Fundamental conditions expected to aggravate a microbial problem typically include system design conditions such as stagnant conditions, areas of low flow rate, poor quality feed water etc.



21

KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES Measures to alleviate such problems include: •

Continuous, turbulent flow

•

Elevated or reduced temperatures

•

Smooth, clean surfaces that minimize nutrient accumulation

•

Frequent draining, flushing or sanitizing

•

Flooded distribution loop (maintenance of positive distribution loop pressures)

•

Properly designed, installed and maintained system

While the control of chemical quality is important, the primary challenge in a pharmaceutical water system is maintaining the microbial quality. The industry and the regulatory community have recognized the effectiveness of maintaining a continuously recirculated system at high temperatures (65°C-8O°C) in preventing microbial growth. Distillation has a long and well-documented history of success, but need not be the only technology considered for producing water with endotoxin limits. Reverse osmosis is the only other technology accepted by the USP for WFI. Ultrafiltration has been successfully used to produce waters with strict endotoxin limits that meet WFI attributes, but it cannot, by regulation, be used to produce compendial grade WFI. Each pharmaceutical steam and water treatment system must be viewed in its entirety, as design and operational factors affecting any unit operation within the system can affect the whole system. It is useful to identify both the quality parameters of water entering the system and the quality parameters of the water or steam to be produced. Water quality should be enhanced with each successive step. It does not necessarily follow that measures enhancing one quality attribute (such as conductivity, particulate level or color) will always enhance another (such as microbial population).

2.6

DESIGN RANGE VERSUS OPERATING RANGE

This Guide recognizes the distinction between “Design Range” and “Operating Range” and the impact this distinction has upon validation and facility system operation. These criteria are defined as:

See Figure 2-1. Design Range: the specified range or accuracy of a controlled variable used by the designer as a basis to determine the performance requirements for an engineered water system.


Allowable Operating Range: the range of validated critical parameters within which acceptable product water can be manufactured.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Normal Operating Range: a range which may be selected by the manufacturer as the desired acceptable Herzlia, values for a parameter (i.e., conductivity) during normal operations. This range must be within the Allowable Operating Range. ID number: 216389 Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM

a) While a water or steam system should meet all stated Design Conditions, the acceptability of the system for operation from a cGMP standpoint depends on operating within the Allowable Operating Range.

22


KEY DESIGN PHILOSOPHIES b) Performance criteria for a Pharmaceutical Water Generation System may require a final product water quality conductivity of 0.5 µS/cm. (2 Mohm-cm) or better as a Design Condition. The Allowable Operating Range for this pharmaceutical water may, however, allow for generation of water quality with a conductivity of 1.3 µS/cm. (0.77 Mohm-cm) or better. The Normal Operating Range for generating water may, in the end, be set by the manufacturer at conductivity value approaching 1.0 µS/cm. (1.0 Mohm-cm) or better to provide a comfortable environment for the operation. c) Normal Operating Range cannot exceed the Allowable Operating Range for the product water. The Design Condition selection should reflect Good Engineering Practice. d) It is also good practice for manufacturers to apply the concept of Alert and Action limits along with Normal Operating Range. Alert and Action limits should be based on the actual capability of the system. Alert Limits are based on normal operating experience and are used to initiate corrective measures before reaching an Action Limit, which is defined as the process condition established by product acceptance criteria. The Action Limit deviations must be kept as a part of the batch record as they represent deviations from validated parameters. Figure 2-1 Values of Critical Parameters for Product Water

Note: These are general guidelines.



23



WATER OPTIONS and SYSTEM PLANNING





WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING 3.

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING

3.1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter outlines basic water system design criteria and, along with subsequent chapters, aims to provide a better understanding of pharmaceutical water, how it is used, and how it can be provided. The primary goal of this chapter is to provide the user with a methodology for: a) Evaluating water quality options for product manufacturing b) Evaluating basic system configurations available to provide the water Detailed information on unit operation design, maintenance and cost factors is addressed in later chapters. The chapter also outlines the system planning effort for pharmaceutical water systems. This planning starts with the selection of water quality based upon product requirements, processing operations, and end use. A decision tree concept is included to assist in selection of compendial and non-compendial waters for production, cleaning, and support. The program then provides steps to guide the user through a use-point and system analysis, to set-up the water system distribution strategy. Finally, evaluation points are provided for the selection of the primary system configurations.

3.2

WATER QUALITY OPTIONS

Quality requirements for water used in pharmaceutical manufacturing and product development are driven by the product characteristics, manufacturing processes, and the intended use of the product. To aid in the water selection process, the USP Monographs define minimum requirements for general types of pharmaceutical water used in almost every pharmaceutical application. However, there is also the opportunity for a manufacturer to determine water quality requirements, different from those in the USP, based on specific product characteristics and processing operations. If this option is taken, the product manufacturer is responsible for assuring that water used to manufacture the product is appropriate, to reliably produce safe product. Though water quality requirements are product specific, it is impractical to reliably produce special water that is specific to each situation. Manufacturing operations typically generate and distribute only a few, or perhaps just one, quality of water. Therefore, products and operations requiring similar water qualities are commonly grouped. The most common segmentation is that defined in the USP. Manufacturers agree that in many if not most cases, the requirements defined in the USP are adequate for production of safe product. More stringent water quality specifications may be appropriate for some products and processes. Others may be appropriately less stringent. Typically, more stringent requirements may apply to some processing operations involving significant concentration steps or products comprised of high water content, which may be applied in large volume doses. Likewise, processes involving reliable sterilization and purification steps which remove impurities may, in some cases, not require water qualities as strict as those defined in the USP. Other process characteristics can affect water quality requirements as well.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, In manufacturing operations with only one quality of water, the water system must be designed to meet the most stringent requirements of the most product216389 or process. With more than one quality of water, IDdemanding number: products and processes are often categorized and fed by the most appropriate system. The number of types of water generated is most often a function of volume of water consumed and variation of quality. Large consumers may find it economical to generate and distribute multiple grades of water, while small users often will generate only one quality of water.



25

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING The three main categories of water used in pharmaceutical manufacturing are: •

Drinking water: meeting EPA national primary drinking water regulations. In Figure 3-1 drinking water is included in the category Suitable Non-Compendial.

•

Compendial water: meeting the compendial requirements for specific types of water in USP Monographs (i.e., Purified Water USP, Water for Injection USP).

•

“Suitable” non-compendial process waters: meeting the requirements of drinking water, but with additional treatment to meet process requirements. It may, or may not, contain added substances for microbial control and does not have to meet full compendial requirements for USP Water. In this Guide, we name the non-compendial process waters used in manufacturing by the final/major process step (i.e., Reverse Osmosis - RO water, Deionization - DI water, etc.).

Non-compendial water is not necessarily less critical, or less costly to produce or to qualify, than compendial water. It can enable the manufacturer to set product specific quality and/or test criteria that are appropriate for the specific product and processes. Generally, more highly purified water is more expensive than less purified water. However, the specifics of each operation are different. For example, a plant with existing excess capacity of WFI might elect to use WFI over other grades even when unnecessary. In the example case, documentation defining water quality should identify the quality required for the product and why the WFI was used instead. Figure 3-1 provides the framework of a diagram that can be developed by a manufacturer to show the requirements for water used in the pharmaceutical manufacturing processes. This diagram should be accompanied by documentation supporting the options chosen, with review and approval of Quality Assurance. The options chosen should be based on product and process specific requirements. Ultimately, water supplied to any process must meet or exceed the requirements, as defined by the manufacturer, for the safe and reliable manufacture of that product. Figure 3-1 provides an overall summary of water requirements for a manufacturer supported by the necessary justification for specific products, processes, and areas. It is almost impossible to provide one generic decision tree due to the diversity it would have to cover.


26


WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING Figure 3-1 Pharmaceutical Water Quality Decision Tree

Note: Commitments made in drug applications override suggestions of this decision tree. Notes: 1) By test procedure definition, some analytical methods require USP Compendial waters. Quality should meet the needs of the analytical methods.


2) Labs performing both cGMP and Non-cGMP operations should follow the cGMP path. 3) Non-compendial water may be more highly purified than compendial water. Endotoxin and microbial quality is based on the process and quality standards of the product. Non-compendial water must at a minimum meet EPA (or comparable EU or Japanese standard) drinking water requirements for microbiological quality. 4)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Quality of final rinse water is determined by the type of product and subsequent processing steps. Where ID number: 216389 product contact surface is subsequently sanitized, final rinse with Suitable Non-Compendial water may be acceptable. Such practice may necessitate more stringent qualification criteria for the subsequent sanitization steps.


5) Where product is purified downstream


27

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING 6) More stringent endotoxin requirements (e.g., WFI quality) should be employed for water used in the final purification step for NON-Sterile parenteral grade APIs. Figure 1-1 provides “Baseline” requirements for most product contact water applications. Water quality criteria for pharmaceutical manufacturing and product development are driven by the product characteristics, manufacturing process, and the intended use of the product. Specific product and process characteristics may dictate that more or less stringent criteria than shown are appropriate. Figure above gives engineers some general guidance on selection of pharmaceutical water quality. Expert QA advice should be sought to give further advise on this critical of pharmaceutical water selection. Once water needs are determined based on usage, Table identifies common design options for various types of pharmaceutical water in the industry. The order of components and actual installed equipment varies widely throughout the industry. Primary criteria in evaluating the options are: •

To have suitable specification for water criteria (i.e., it must be adequate for the process and product)

•

To produce water consistent in composition and quality

•

To monitor key performance indicators for assurance that specifications are met.

Table 3-1

Typical Pharmaceutical Process Water Types

PHARMACEUTICAL WATER TYPE TYPICAL PROCESS WATER TYPES

DESCRIPTION

PROCESS UNIT OPERATION Primary Filtration

Softening

X

Activated Ion RO RO Ion Exchange Carbon Exchange (1st (2nd (Mixed Bed Filtration (Cation/ Pass) Pass) 2nd Stage) Anion 1st Stage)

Double Pass RO Water

Product Staged RO System

X

DI Water

Either Conventional Regenerable or Off Site Regenerated Ion Exchange/Mixed Bed System

X

RO/DI Water

Variations of Single and Double Pass RO Followed by Mixed Bed DI System

X

X

X

X

RO/EDI Water

Single Pass RO & Electrodeionization System

X

X

X

X

DI/UF Water

Regenerable Mixed Bed/Ultrafiltration System

X

RO/DI/UF Water

Single Pass RO/ Non-Regenerable (or off site regenerated) Mixed Bed/ Ultrafiltration System

UF Water

Ultrafiltration often with some pretreatment

Distilled Water

Various configurations of stills often with some pretreatment

X

X

X

Still

EDI

Ultra filtration

X

X

X

X

X


28

X

X

X

X


X

X


X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Various configurations of pretreatment, primarily to prolong the still life.


X

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING 3.2.1

Cost Implications

Determining the economics of pharmaceutical/medical device water production is complex. Costs are quite predictable, but vary greatly depending on scale of operation, system design, actual usage, etc. The total operating cost to produce pharmaceutical waters is obtained by adding the cost of feed water to the costs of pretreatment (e.g., media filtration, carbon filtration, softening, and chemical addition) and final treatment (e.g., primary ion removal and polishing). Other significant costs should be anticipated for validation, ongoing QA/QC, as well as waste treatment and sewerage. In addition, regulated industries must consider the risks (cost) of noncompliance and water system failures. Municipal feed water ranges from $1-3 per thousand gallons with even wider variations outside of the U.S. Feed (surface or ground) water quality, generation technology and its associated capital cost, and product water specifications are then utilized to determine the total pharmaceutical water system net present value (NPV). The type of pharmaceutical water system design option selected is typically based on feed water total dissolved solids and hardness levels, organic and colloidal content, as well as anticipated water system utility costs (acid, caustic, salt, power, and source water). Consideration should also be given to maintenance requirements and available resources. Although water treatment systems for generating either compendial (USP purified) or non-compendial pharmaceutical process waters significantly vary in system operational costs, NPV for each of these various types of process waters are quite similar. The only exception is DI process water generated through the use of a non-regenerable mixed bed bottle system, typically regenerated off site. However, membrane based systems do marginally produce the lowest net present values for pharmaceutical water generation. The NPV analysis is usually based on the water system capital cost and a five-year system operating cost. The period chosen has to be long enough to allow operating cost to be a significant factor, but short enough for reasonable analysis of operating cost returns versus increased capital expenditures. Cost savings opportunities can be found in other places than just the quality of water and method of generation. Wastewater from the pretreatment or treatment systems can often be used for miscellaneous loads such as lawn irrigation, humidification, boiler feed, etc. Each chapter of this Guide also addresses cost savings issues based upon design criteria and approach for independent unit operations and systems.

3.3

SYSTEM PLANNING

High purity water and steam are the most widely used, and often the most expensive raw material or utility in a pharmaceutical facility. Improper sizing or selection of a steam or water system could limit or even shut down production if under sized; or compromise the reproducible quality and increase the capital cost if oversized. However, system sizing is not the starting point in design. Proper definition of water quality requirements and usage can save construction as well as operational costs.


Figure 3-2 shows a graphic representation of the system boundaries, limitations, and restrictions the designer faces when planning a pharmaceutical water system. Initial system planning reveals primary boundaries that establish the cornerstone for design criteria. These primary system boundaries are Water Quality, Use-Point Criteria, and System Criteria.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, During initial planning, the limits of each boundary need to be established. The arrows encircling each boundary represent limitations that establish specific operating strategies and ranges. When documenting IDmore number: 216389 these limitations, the designer should always indicate ranges of acceptability, rather than a specific value or position. This allows more flexibility in final planning and detailed design decisions.


The reality of certain restrictions will sometimes force a specific strategy. As long as the decision leads to an answer that is within the limits of the system boundaries, this is perfectly acceptable. An example is a facility where the use-point criteria require non-compendial water with microbial control. However, there happens to


29

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING be an oversized WFI system in an adjacent area, so the designer decides to provide WFI to the use-point. In the example case, documentation defining water quality should identify the quality required for the product and why the WFI was used instead. The primary emphasis of this section is to outline a systematic approach to planning a pharmaceutical water system. Figure 3-2 outlines a planning methodology that begins with the selection of water quality, given its own system constraints and limitations. Then the use point criteria are established, followed by an initial system planning exercise. Often, these sequential steps are repeated as information in the design process iterates, and further criteria about the overall system boundaries are identified. Figure 3-2 Pharmaceutical Water System Planning


30


WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING 3.3.1

Establish Water Quality

The first step in the evaluation of water systems is the selection of water quality required for the specific product and process operation. Selection is based primarily on the dosage and form, and the microbiological and chemical purity criteria set for the product for which the water is used. The selection must consider underlying factors that have impacts on quality control; installed and operating cost; maintenance and practicality. See Section 3.2 in establishing possible water quality via development of the decision tree. Making notes as the water quality is designated for each use-point, indicating the basis for each decision. Simple annotations from the supporting documentation will be useful in later stages of the planning process. System design constraints may provide the motivation to challenge water quality or other criteria, particularly when it can be demonstrated that the change does not affect product quality or manufacturing controls. 3.3.2

Characterize Use Point

Once the initial selection of water quality has been established, the operational criteria should be characterized for each use point. A matrix should be developed to outline the primary criteria required for system design. Each use point should be annotated with the proper values for pressure, flow, and the temperature range of water entering unit operation, or process point from the water supply system. Establishing a range, rather than a fixed value, increases opportunities for system optimization by allowing a more flexible approach to final design. This data can be organized in many ways, but a well-planned spreadsheet can simplify the planning process and provide clear decision pathways for future detailed design activities. Table 3-1 shows an example of a spreadsheet used to characterize use-point flow and system demand. Flowrate is primarily used to size lines, whereas Daily Use leads to storage and generation decisions. The Diversity Factor is one way to level-out anticipated usage, assuming that not all loads happen every day or at the same time. This table indicates a Clean in Place (CIP) system and stopper-washer that are both likely to be used on the same day, but never at the same time. Therefore, only the higher flowrate is relevant to loop sizing as shown in the Design Flowrate column. Demand flowrates are eventually used for branch line sizing. Table 3-2

Use Point Criteria FLOWRATE

DAILY USE COMMENTS

EQUIPMENT

DEMAND

DIVERSITY

DESIGN

DEMAND

DIVERSITY

DESIGN

NAME

(LPM)

FACTOR

(LPM)

(LPD)

FACTOR

(LPD)

40.0

1

40.0

1200

1

1200

Assume a recirculating cycle in 4 steps for a total of 23 minutes.

20.0

0

460

Assume one cleaning cycle per day, 100 liters/rinse, 3 rinse/ cycle, 1 overflow rinse/ cycle @ 2 LPM for 80 mins.

CIP Wash cycle

Stopper Washer

This Document is licensed to Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389 0.0

460

1



31

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING Once the location and qualities are finalized, the various properties can be charted on a requirements analysis histogram. This can be done with the aid of a computer and either simulation or spreadsheet software for larger systems, or done manually for small systems. At this point, basic Process Flow Diagrams also provide a good pictorial view of the water qualities, locations and the point-of-use properties. Figure 3-3 Water Usage Chart

3.3.3

Establish System Criteria

Histogram analysis is beneficial for determining overall system peak demand(s), average demand, and the relationships between peak demand time periods and their flow rates. Figure 3-4 below shows a hypothetical storage tank profile using the 24-hour demand profile from Figure 3-3. There is no “Rule-of-Thumb” for minimum water level, or the optimum water level to turn on a still. However, these charts provide the tools for creating various scenarios to simulate recovery times from a failure, future expansion or reduction capabilities and analyze other factors that allow design of a properly sized water generation, storage and distribution system.


System planning and analysis also reveals other restrictions that influence design, and often lead the designer to re-evaluate the primary boundaries as discussed earlier. These restrictions might include items such as: •

32

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Must the system be available atID all times? number: 216389

•

What are the constraints on a shutdown?

•

Is the plant/personnel able to handle chemicals properly? Are permits in place?

•

Is production batched or continuous?



WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING •

Are the products dedicated or multiple product groups?

•

How is campaigning between products handled?

•

How much time is available for sanitization? Should redundancy be provided to allow adequate time for sterilization?

Figure 3-4 Storage Tank Level Chart

3.3.4

Revisit Water Quality

With all use points characterized for temperature range, and demand, the quality of water is revisited. A thorough review of use point criteria typically reveals a wide range of acceptable delivery conditions for the water. Since it is typically not practical to operate multiple water systems to provide the exact water conditions desired of the end product, compromises must be made. These compromises might include providing water of a higher quality than required to simplify the water treatment or delivery systems, or provisions for controlling water consumption at a use point to limit peak demands. Whatever compromises are made, water must be delivered at conditions within the boundary limits.


3.4

SYSTEM DESIGN


Once the support areas, back up requirements, future growth, or expansion capabilities are established, detailed design of the system can begin. The process requirements determine all the points-of-use (POU) on the distribution system. User locations determine how to distribute the system (e.g., central storage, multiple loops/branches, etc.). One or several of the use points may need either different qualities or other properties that single it out from the rest. In this case alternatives to the water system criteria are considered, such as



33

WATER OPTIONS AND SYSTEM PLANNING using an ambient or cold distribution versus a hot system. Plant shift operating hours must also be considered since there may be an inability to perform regular heat sanitizations of cold systems, for example. The boundaries, limitations, and restrictions that were identified in the initial planning stages should now be integrated into the design approach. Further considerations might include the physical area a system needs for support, one production area, one building, or multiple buildings on a site. This could determine the size of the system and whether it is made up of multiple tanks, or multiple loop storage and distributed systems. For example, central systems are higher in initial capital, but lower in operation and maintenance and possibly lower overall cost on per unit basis. The capital is higher primarily due to the larger generation, storage, and distribution equipment or system. Alternatively, multiple generation systems may require less initially for each smaller system but more cost in terms of capital and operating and maintenance for the same total capacity. All systems have a fixed capacity and will eventually have a failure. Therefore, if a piece of equipment fails a plan should be in place to deal with the down time. Having backup generation equipment for the critical components such as a still or deionization equipment, should be considered. The backup equipment can be used in a lead-lag type operation and/or to meet a specific duration of a peak demand. More detailed descriptions of the alternatives for the various unit operations required for production of pharmaceutical grade water are discussed in the following chapters. Rationale is provided for decisions that will surface regarding quality, cost, performance, maintenance, and reliability as the system is developed in detail.


34


PRETREATMENT OPTIONS





PRETREATMENT OPTIONS 4.

PRETREATMENT OPTIONS

4.1

INTRODUCTION

Pretreatment is all process steps or unit operations prior to the last (final) water treatment step. Pretreatment is a series of unit operations to modify the feed water quality so that it will be of adequate quality to be fed to a final treatment step. This final step may be Reverse Osmosis, Ultrafiltration, Multi or Mixed Bed Deionization or Distillation. These final steps are discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. Reverse Osmosis is unique since it can be a pretreatment step, in addition to being a final treatment step. Reverse Osmosis applications in pretreatment are discussed in this chapter and Chapter 11, but Reverse Osmosis as a technology is discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. The initial sections of this chapter discuss the process design (programming issues) for pretreatment design including feed water quality and output water quality from pretreatment. The chapter then discusses the selection of treatment options (i.e. unit operations) for four groups of impurities: •

Control of fouling--removal of turbidity and particulates

•

Control of scaling--removal of hardness and metals

•

Removal of organics and microbiological impurities

•

Removal of microbial control agents

Pre-treatment options are summarized in Figure 4-1 at the end of the chapter. The final sections of the chapter discuss the importance of anion composition/concentration, pH, materials of construction, and pretreatment system control. This discussion is based on the description of these technologies presented in Chapter 11.

4.2

PROCESS DESIGN OF PRETREATMENT

Process design of the pretreatment system is the specification of the unit operations or process steps to treat the feed water. Typical information includes flow rates, temperatures, pressure, and composition of all streams. Detailed mechanical design of the equipment for a given unit operation or process step is beyond the scope of this Guide.


The process design (programming issues) for a pretreatment system may include: a) Required quantity and quality of the water from the final treatment process. b)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Temperature constraints on the water used in a pharmaceutical process and the approach to microbial Herzlia, control. ID number: 216389

c) The final treatment option that has been chosen, as this defines the required water quality leaving pretreatment.


d) Quality of the feed water that is the input to the pretreatment system (water quality to be validated over a one year period).


35

PRETREATMENT OPTIONS e) Difference between input water quality and desired output water quality. The difference determines impurities that must be removed by the pretreatment system. The difference is determined by performing a material balance. Attention should be paid to impurities and minor components. f)

Pretreatment options to provide the desired removal of impurities considering other factors such as capabilities of the labor force, economics, waste disposal, environmental considerations, validation, and the available space and utilities.

In addition to defining the options for removal of impurities, the approach taken to microbial control is an integral part of the process design of the pretreatment system. Considerations include: a) If the drinking quality water to the pretreatment system comes from a municipality in the United States, it will typically contain chlorine, or chloramines, as a microbial control agent. In Europe, ozone is the more common microbial control agent. The concentration of the agent should be sufficient to protect the initial steps of the pretreatment. b) If the quantity of microbial control agent is insufficient, additional microbial control agent may be added or provision made to periodically sanitize the initial equipment in the pretreatment system. This is likely if water comes from a source other than a municipality. Increased monitoring of feed water and the initial steps may be warranted. c) At some point in the pretreatment process, the microbial control agent must be removed before going to the final treatment. At this point, a means of either continuous or periodic sanitization needs to be selected for the treatment steps following this removal. The USP requirement that compendial waters should contain “no added substances” eliminates addition of chemicals to “Purified Water” or Water For Injection. However, addition of chemical agents is not prohibited in pretreatment. Substances are frequently added in pretreatment and subsequently removed in the pretreatment or final treatment. Some examples are: •

Chlorine (to control microbial growth, removed in later stages of pretreatment)

•

Sodium ions (in softener with exchange for multivalent ions, removed in ion removal process)

•

Acid (for degasification to remove carbon dioxide, counter ions, removed in a subsequent ion removal process)

•

Sulfite (to reduce chlorine to chloride, or chloramines, to ammonium and chloride while forming sulfate, removal by softening or ion removal process)

•

Sequestrants (to prevent scaling in final treatment, removed by RO in final treatment)

•

pH control agents (removed in ion removal process)


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, A final consideration is the relationship between investment and operating dollars in pretreatment, and the performance and cost of the final treatment process. The following are generally true: ID number: 216389 Added substances are an issue if they result in an increase in microbial growth or endotoxins.

•

36

A final treatment system will not operate reliably over the long term, without reliable operation of the pretreatment system.



PRETREATMENT OPTIONS •

Inadequate operation in pretreatment (breakthrough of particulates, hardness, or chlorine) may not immediately affect water quality from final treatment, but it will be reflected in long term maintenance and operating reliability, and possibly in water quality.

•

Investment in pretreatment capability and reliability can return many times the investment in final treatment maintenance costs.

•

Pharmaceutical water systems are expected to generate water meeting final pharmaceutical product water standards. The system should be designed to control impurity spikes in the incoming water quality, or seasonal impurity profile changes. A robust pretreatment system design handles impurity spikes detrimental to final treatment.

There is no single “right” answer to the process design of the pretreatment system. Pretreatment system process design is a series of choices and options, each with advantages and disadvantages.

4.3

FEEDWATER TO PRETREATMENT QUALITY: TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION

Compendial pharmaceutical water systems are required to use feed water complying with “Drinking Water” standards. Most pharmaceutical manufacturers utilize municipal water supplies. This water generally meets “Drinking Water” quality standards and is treated with a microbial control agent. Historically in the US, the microbial control agent is chlorine, but chloramine is now used with increasing frequency. Either feed water composition or microbial control agent concentration may be subject to occasional and seasonal variations. These variations may negatively impact water quality, and can be detected only by extensive sampling. In addition, water quality at the plant site may not be equivalent to that from a municipal treatment facility, due to potential for contamination or loss of microbial control agent in the distribution system. Documentation of feed water quality is recommended either by use of municipality testing (if applicable) supplemented by some testing at the plant side or by extensive testing of feed water quality. Typical contaminants in feed water include: •

Particulates Silt, dust, pollen, pipe scale, iron and silica, undissolved minerals and organics

•

Inorganics

Calcium and magnesium salts, heavy metals (iron, aluminum, and silica) with their corresponding anions

•

Organics

NATURALLY OCCURRING BYPRODUCTS OF VEGETATIVE DECAY, I.E., HUMIC AND FULVIC ACIDS AND “MAN-MADE ORGANICS” SUCH AS PESTICIDES AND AUTOMOTIVE POLLUTION (OILS)

This Document is licensed to •

Bacteria

BACTERIAL CONTAMINATION AND ITS BYPRODUCTS, ENDOTOXINS, AND PYROGENS

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Testing recommendations include: Herzlia, • Documentation that feed water meets drinking water quality. This may be based on results of testing ID number: 216389

by the municipality, possibly supplemented by local or in-process testing. Frequency of in-process testing will be affected by reliability of the municipality, importance of monitored variables, and company philosophy.



37


Monitoring for microbial control agent levels at the start of the pretreatment system. Chlorine level is affected by pH. A chlorine level of 0.2 - 1.0 ppm is generally considered adequate to control microbial growth and generally has negligible effects on pretreatment equipment or performance.

•

Specific testing for contaminants known or suspected of being present in the feed water. This is to determine if data from the municipality is adequate; e.g., feed water from a surface source for pesticides in an agricultural area where run off from farms may be seasonal.

4.4

OUTPUT WATER FROM PRETREATMENT: QUALITY OF FEEDWATER TO FINAL TREATMENT

The goals for pretreatment are to provide water quality that minimizes the operating and maintenance problems in the final treatment equipment and to permit the final treatment step to produce water meeting the desired specifications for final treatment. The impurities that must be removed in the pretreatment process to permit reliable operation of the final treatment step depend on the final treatment step selected and the tolerance of a final treatment step for the impurities. If pretreatment is inadequate, resulting problems can become very large in magnitude, as seen in Table 4-1 below: Table 4-1 IMPURITY MAGNITUDE OF PROBLEMS IN FINAL TREATMENT CAUSED BY TYPE OF IMPURITY

FOULING: caused by particulates

SCALING: caused by hardness and minerals

CORROSION: caused by chlorides

DEGRADATION: caused by chlorine

Reverse Osmosis

Large

Large

None

Large*

Other Membrane Processes

Large-moderate

Large - moderate

None

Large*

Single Effect Distillation

Moderate

Moderate

Moderate - large

Large

Multi-effect Distillation

Large-moderate

Large - moderate

Moderate - large

Large

Vapor Compression Distillation

Moderate

Moderate

Small

Large


*Membrane dependent


Pretreatment requirements for feed water to the final treatment process usually include: FOR MEMBRANES

The concerns are fouling by suspended solids (particulates) and scaling (precipitating solids) as water is removed. A typical goal for control in pretreatment might be a silt density index (SDI) of 3-5 and hardness of <1 grain/gallon for on-site analysis. Membranes tolerate chlorides but only some membranes tolerate chlorine.


38


PRETREATMENT OPTIONS FOR DISTILLATION The concerns are scale formation due to hardness and corrosion due to chlorides. Typical water quality might be as high as 1.0 Mohm/cm, which often requires additional treatment beyond pretreatment, i.e. RO or ultrafiltration. Distillation has no tolerance for chlorine due to corrosion and carryover to the product. Distillation has some tolerance for particulates. Pretreatment generally has little effect on the other parameters indicative of water quality such as anions, microbial levels, conductivity, total organic carbons (TOC), and volatiles. Selecting pretreatment to reliably provide the required feed water quality to final treatment, in spite of spikes in feed drinking water quality, will reduce operating and maintenance costs in final treatment.

4.5

CONTROL OF FOULING: REMOVAL OF TURBIDITY AND PARTICULATES

The principal methods for removing particulates and reducing turbidity are: •

Clarification and the accompanying operations of flocculation, coagulation, and sedimentation

•

Depth or Media filtration including single and multimedia filtration (particles retained by the media)

The definitions, filtration mechanisms and typical removal processes for these are outlined in Chapter 11. Clarification is not applicable, as feed water sources are potable quality or better. Depth or media filtration is used in pharmaceutical water systems and is often the first step in a pretreatment system. Multi-sized sand is the most common media, but other media may provide better performance with some feed waters. Removal of particulates down to 10 microns is possible and depends on selection of media. Microbial growth is a key concern in a media filter, unless the feed water contains a microbial control agent. Otherwise, microbial control in the depth filter is required (e.g., periodic sanitization using either heat or a chemical sanitizing agent).

4.6

CONTROL OF SCALING: REMOVAL OF HARDNESS AND METALS

When water is separated from its impurities in the final treatment process, those compounds with low solubility are concentrated to the point where they precipitate. This precipitation, or scaling, is the result of exceeding the solubility of the divalent and trivalent cations, usually as a sparingly soluble salt such as carbonate or sulfate. The methods of control are: •

•

•


Removal by ion exchange. These are principally calcium and magnesium and may include divalent and trivalent ions such as iron, aluminum and silica. Pretreatment is usually water softening, (exchanging the ions causing hardness and scaling for sodium ions).

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Removal of carbonate by acidification. Acidification converts the carbonate to carbon dioxide, which is Herzlia, removed by subsequent degasification. ID number: 216389

Removal of the offending compound by a barrier filtration process such as nanofiltration. Water passes through the membrane and compounds are retained by the membrane and removed as a purge stream.


These removal processes are detailed in Chapter 11.


39

PRETREATMENT OPTIONS Water softening ion exchange, which removes divalent and trivalent ions and replaces them with sodium, is a very common process used in pretreatment of pharmaceutical water. It is applicable for all flow rates and all hardness levels, and is well understood and easy to operate. It involves the handling of salt only, and produces a non-hazardous waste stream. However, the high total dissolved solids (TDS) in the waste stream may limit disposal options. Water softening is also easily controlled manually or with a PLC. For large flow rates (>50 gpm or 0.18 m3/min) and high hardness (>50 ppm) degasification (after acidification) may be the process of choice. This degasification process is often employed between the two stages of an RO and involves the handling of acid and base for two pH adjustments: •

Lowering of pH before first stage of RO

•

Increasing of pH before second stage of RO

The principal advantage is that the carbon dioxide is released to the atmosphere rather than being a liquid waste stream requiring disposal. Nanofiltration is a membrane process that may be applicable with certain feed waters and specialized situations. The filtration is usually cross-flow and involves a significant purge stream. It is much like RO, the differences being pore size in the membrane and the corresponding effect on ion removal. Removal of divalent ions can be greater than 98%. Chemical injection is an alternate method to control the ions or compounds that contribute to scaling. This process injects a compound (usually a proprietary organic compound) to the final treatment feed water. These compounds are called sequestrants and act “to tie up and complex” the offending ions or compounds to form a complex, or compound, that is more soluble and will not precipitate in the final treatment process. The “complexed ion and sequestrant” have a large molecular weight and are removed as a purge stream in the final treatment process. Sequestrants are almost always proprietary compounds, which require testing to verify applicability and dosage level for the particular feed water, and analysis to verify removal in the final treatment process. A key choice in the process design of the pretreatment system is location of the softener. The two options are either before or after removal of the microbial control agent (often chlorine) that is in the feed water, or which may have been added for control of microbial growth. Softener located prior to removal of microbial control agent: The principal advantage is protection of the softener from microbial growth by the microbial control agent present in the feed water. If the microbial control agent is chlorine, it will have only a minor effect on resin life and efficiency at the chlorine levels typically encountered in chlorinated municipal feed waters (<1 ppm).


Softener located after removal of microbial control agent: The advantage is better resin life and capacity (due to absence of chlorine, if it is the microbial control agent). However, this must be balanced by the need to protect the softener from microbial growth and endotoxin load (i.e., by periodic sanitization with the associated cost of heat or chemicals, labor, down time, and waste stream disposal).

4.7

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, REMOVAL OF ORGANICS ID number: 216389

The types of organics and microbiological impurities typically present in water systems and the methods for removal of them are discussed in Chapter 11. The methods for removal of organics are:


•

40

Ozone



Strong Base Ion Exchange

•

Barrier filtration (microfiltration, ultrafiltration or Reverse Osmosis)

•

Polymer Flocculant

•

Carbon

Ozone is a powerful oxidant that controls microbial growth and reduces the concentration of organics due to oxidation, but requires compatible materials of construction. Strong base ion exchange removes organics but results in a purge stream containing high concentrations of brine and organics, due to regeneration of the resin. Barrier filtration, when appropriately sized, captures organics and microbial growth on the barrier and can be aided by addition of a polymer flocculant. A potential problem with barrier filtration is microbial growth “growing through the barrier” which results in microbial contamination on the downstream side of the barrier. Carbon is probably the most common method of reducing organics. It is used because it provides multiple functions, including removal of organics as well as removal or reduction in the amount of chlorine and chloramines (if these are present and the carbon filter is appropriately designed). The advantages of using carbon are that it is a frequently practiced technology, it performs multiple functions, and effectively “cleans up the feed water”, and microbial growth can be controlled by periodic sanitization. The disadvantage is that it is a source of microbial growth, as well as a source of nutrients.

4.8

SYSTEM DESIGN FOR CONTROL OF MICROBIAL GROWTH

The methods for control of microbial growth are summarized in Chapter 11. The methods used in pretreatment to control microbial growth are: •

Microbial control agent such as chlorine or chloramine

•

Periodic sanitization (heat or chemical)

•

Ultraviolet light

•

Avoiding dead legs and avoiding water stagnation

A common strategy in the design of the pretreatment system is to leave the microbial control agent provided by the municipality in the water through as many pretreatment steps as possible, in order to protect these steps from microbial growth.


However, at some point the microbial control agent (chlorine or chloramine) must be removed since it is not compatible with the final treatment processes. At this point, the only option is periodic sanitization, either with heat or a chemical disinfectant. This must be included in the design of the pretreatment system, along with the provisions for validation and monitoring its effectiveness via sampling and testing. If a chemical disinfectant is used, provisions to remove it and monitor its removal are also required.


Ultraviolet light (UV) is effective in inhibiting microbial growth but is only effective when the light is present. UV light is often used before a unit operation to minimize the microbial growth in the unit operation by controlling the microbial counts in the feed water. The most common places for use of UV light are before Reverse Osmosis units and some filters.



41

PRETREATMENT OPTIONS 4.9

REMOVAL OF MICROBIAL CONTROL AGENTS

At some point in pretreatment, microbial control agents must be removed because of their detrimental effect on final treatment equipment and performance. Chlorine causes deterioration of most Reverse Osmosis membranes and is corrosive in distillation. Chloramines can pass through pretreatment and decompose in the distillation process with an adverse effect on water quality. The methods for removal of chlorine and chloramines are similar and are detailed in Chapter 11. For chlorine removal, activated carbon is a straightforward process for the absorption of chlorine. The carbon will reduce some of the chlorine to chloride ion, which is then removed in the final treatment ion removal process. Sulfite reduction is also straightforward, with sulfite being oxidized to sulfate and chlorine being reduced to chloride ion. Chloramine removal is more complex. Chloramine adsorption on carbon occurs at a much slower rate than chlorine, necessitating longer contact times and lower hydraulic flow rates. The potential for dissociation of the absorbed chloramines into ammonium ion and ammonia is a problem. Ammonium is removed by Reverse Osmosis but decomposes to ammonia in a distillation process. Ammonia passes through both Reverse Osmosis and distillation processes in final treatment. Sulfite reduction for chloramines results in ammonium and chloride ions. These can be removed by Reverse Osmosis. The ammonium ion partially decomposes to ammonia in the higher temperature distillation process, resulting in carryover and affect on the water quality. Removal of ammonia (from chloramine) and carbon dioxide requires proper pH control to maintain these species as ions for removal in an RO. The equilibrium of carbonate, bicarbonate, and carbon dioxide is pH dependent, with alkaline conditions required to maintain the ionic species. The equilibrium between ammonium and ammonia is pH and temperature dependent, with acidic conditions required to maintain the ionic species. At no single pH point are these species all carbonate and ammonium ions. Thus two pH adjustment steps followed by the appropriate removal technologies are required to remove both chloramines and carbon dioxide.

4.10

CHANGES IN ANION COMPOSITION / CONCENTRATION

Pretreatment systems typically remove non-ionic impurities and cations. Thus, any change in anionic composition or concentration is usually secondary. However, some distillation processes in final treatment are affected by chlorides, which can be removed by an RO prior to the final treatment step. The pretreatment processes that affect anionic composition are:


•

Deionization

•

Degasification

•

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Carbon bed filtration for removal of chlorine and chloramine Herzlia, Reduction to remove chlorine and IDchloramine number: 216389

•

Barrier filtration (nanofiltration, ultrafiltration and Reverse Osmosis)

•


Ion exchange resins are designed to remove either cations or anions. An ion exchange resin that is designed to remove anions (anionic resin) will typically exchange the anions (chloride, sulfate, nitrate, and carbonate;

42


PRETREATMENT OPTIONS and bicarbonate if the pH is appropriate) for the hydroxyl ion. The ion exchange may be in a single bed, mixed beds, or twin beds and will affect anionic composition if an anionic resin is present. Ion exchange as a deionization process to specifically remove anions is discussed in Chapter 5. Degasification and the accompanying process of acidification, for removal of hardness, changes anionic composition. The water is acidified with a non-volatile acid (usually sulfuric, based on cost and ease of removal of the resulting anion i.e., sulfate) to convert carbonate and bicarbonate to dissolved CO2, which is removed by degasification. The net effect is replacement of bicarbonate and carbonate with sulfate, (see Chapter 11). As discussed above, carbon bed filtration adsorbs chlorine and chloramines from feed water. However, some of the chlorine is reduced to chloride and is removed in a subsequent ion removal process, usually in final treatment. The removal of chlorine and chloramines by reduction, often with bisulfite, changes ionic composition, and concentration, as the bisulfite is oxidized to sulfate and the chlorine, or chloramines, are reduced to chloride and ammonium. Some barrier filtrations (particularly nanofiltration) remove some of the larger anions. Reverse Osmosis may be used to remove chloride ion prior to some distillation processes.

4.11

THE IMPORTANCE OF PH IN PRETREATMENT

The effect of pH on the equilibrium between carbonate, bicarbonate, and carbon dioxide is discussed in Chapter 11. EPA drinking water standards require a pH range of 6.5-8.5. In reality, the pH range of most drinking feed water is narrower, due to the corrosive nature of acidic water and the scaling potential of alkaline waters. The pH of the feed water and its seasonal variations need to be known because of its impact on pretreatment and final treatment process design. The pH determines the form of the carbon dioxide, its scaling potential and where carbon dioxide (carbonate) is removed (see Chapter 11). A complicating factor in pretreatment design is the potential presence of ammonia as a result of chloramine presence in the feed water. Ammonia is a dissolved gas at the pH values where carbon dioxide is an ion (carbonate), and exists an ion (ammonium) at pH values where carbon dioxide exists as a dissolved gas. Thus it is not possible remove both carbon dioxide and ammonia at one pH. If both are present, two pH adjustment steps are required:


•

pH adjustment followed by removal of either carbon dioxide or ammonia

•

A change in pH to remove the other compound

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ID number: 216389

These operations may be part of pretreatment or final treatment.

4.12

Piping to the pretreatment system may be copper, galvanized steel, or a suitable thermoplastic. Piping in the pretreatment system, where high temperatures are not encountered, is usually plastic (PVC, CPVC, polypropylene, or other material) based upon cost and corrosion resistance. Leaching from some plastics such as PVC and CPVC may make these materials undesirable to the user. Vessels may be fiberglass, lined carbon steel, or stainless steel.



43

PRETREATMENT OPTIONS The piping and equipment in a portion of the pretreatment system may encounter high temperature (periodic heat sanitization) or high pressure (RO plus degasification). In these portions, piping is typically stainless steel or a plastic that can be heat sanitized, such as PVDF. Equipment designed for high pressure may be carbon steel, lined carbon steel, or stainless steel. Mill finish is satisfactory for these materials; electropolishing is unnecessary. The cost of sanitary construction practices such as orbital welding and sanitary fittings may not be warranted in the pretreatment system. Use of plastic pipe that is solvent cemented or heat fused, stainless steel pipe that is welded or flanged with mill finish, or tubing with compression fittings is common. Ball or diaphragm valves predominate for flow diversion, with globe and needle valves for flow control. Selecting the minimum cost piping components that will not degrade water quality is an area for major cost savings. Sample points should be provided upstream and downstream of each piece of equipment for monitoring and for troubleshooting. Points for field measurement of pressure and temperature are also useful for troubleshooting.

4.13

PRETREATMENT SUMMARY

The philosophy of control selected for pretreatment can have a major impact on both investment and continuing operating cost. Reliable operation and control of pretreatment can significantly reduce operating and maintenance costs in final treatment. The important process steps in pretreatment are: •

Removal of turbidity and particulates to minimize membrane and equipment fouling

•

Removal of hardness and metals to prevent scale formation in final treatment

•

Removal of organics and microbiological impurities

•

Control of microbial growth and removal of microbial control agents to prevent degradation of final treatment

These process steps are important because of their immediate effect on water quality from final treatment or their long-term effect on final treatment equipment performance and hence, their indirect effect on water quality from final treatment. Pretreatment, like other parts of the water treatment system, should be subject to Good Engineering Practices. Validation of pretreatment, as a component of the water treatment system, is required as part of the entire water treatment system validation and should include microbiological monitoring.


44


PRETREATMENT OPTIONS Figure 4-1

Note:

The order of unit operations may be different than shown.



45



FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL and COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER





FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER 5.

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER

5.1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter discusses the final treatment technologies and basic system configurations related to the manufacturing process of USP Purified Water and non-compendial water. Various system configurations are presented, and reflect a significant shift from ion exchange based systems to membrane based systems. Equipment and system materials, surface finish and other design factors are discussed to promote the use of Good Engineering Practice for proper selection of components, piping, instrumentation, and controls. USP Purified Water and non-compendial water can be produced by an almost unlimited combination of unit processes in various configurations. The most common pretreatment and final treatment technologies used in purified water production are shown in Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2, and Table 5-4 at the end of the chapter. This chapter discusses the final treatment unit processes currently utilized, including ion exchange, reverse osmosis, electrodeionization, ultrafiltration, microfiltration, and ultraviolet light. These technologies as well as distillation (see Chapter 6) are utilized in thousands of systems for the successful production of purified and non-compendial water. Ion exchange based systems were the dominant systems for decades in purified water production and are still successfully utilized in facilities today. The last decade has seen the growth of reverse osmosis membrane based systems increase to the point where over 90% of new systems employ primary reverse osmosis, with final polishing by continuous electrodeionization, ion exchange, or a second reverse osmosis stage. Membrane based systems usage has increased due to chemical consumption reduction, contaminant rejection (ionized solids, organics, colloids, microbes, endotoxins, and suspended solids), reduced maintenance, consistent operation, and effective lifecycle cost. The various membrane based system configurations are compared with ion exchange and distillation in Table at the end of this chapter. Equipment construction is discussed for each unit process section to promote proper selection of materials, surface finishes, and other design factors. The total system capital cost is influenced more by equipment design details than by process selection. Many aspects of equipment can be “overdesigned” and hence, become unnecessarily costly. Proper thought must be given to the individual component’s function, location, required microbial performance, sanitization, and other factors, to optimize design. It is not necessary to construct every makeup system component with the same level of surface finish and detail as the distribution system for successful operation in most cases.


Many material selections are made erroneously to conform to cGMP requirements that do not actually dictate the details of construction for most final treatment components. Good Engineering Practice should be employed to optimize the system for consistent operation to specifications and lifecycle cost optimization. Part of the consideration is the need to replace system components (e.g., filters, RO membranes) at a frequency that meets GMP.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, This chapter does not differentiate between compendial and non-compendial water system equipment. Noncompendial water is often manufactured validated in a 216389 manner consistent with compendial water. ID and number: Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM


47

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER 5.2

ION EXCHANGE

5.2.1

Description

Cation and anion exchange resins are regenerated with acid and caustic solutions, respectively. As water passes through the ion exchange bed, the exchange of ions in the water stream for the hydrogen and hydroxide ions, held by the resin, occurs readily and is driven by concentration. Thus, the regeneration process is driven by excess chemical concentrations. The important parameters of this system include resin quality, regeneration systems, vessel linings, and waste neutralization systems. The operation of the system can be monitored by conductivity (resistivity) of the product water. A two-bed ion exchange system includes both cation and anion resin tanks. Two-bed ion exchange systems often times function as the workhorse of a strictly deionization (DI) water system in terms of salt removal. Mixed-bed ion exchange systems are typically used as a secondary or “polishing” system. Mixed-bed DI units consist of a single tank with a mixture of anion and cation removal resin. A cation bed can also be used as a “polishing” DI step, rather than a mixed-bed DI. Ion exchange resins are available in on-site and off-site regenerable systems. On-site regeneration requires chemical handling and disposal, but allows for internal process control and microbial control. Off-site regeneration can be accomplished through new resin to be used one time, or through repeated regeneration of the existing resin. New resin provides greater capacity and some possible quality control advantages, but at a higher cost. Regenerated resin produces a lower operating cost, but may raise quality control issues, such as resin segregation, regeneration quality, and consistency. Additional details on ion exchange can be found in Chapter 11. 5.2.2

Application

The major purpose of ion exchange equipment in USP purified water systems is to satisfy the conductivity requirements of the USP. Deionization (DI) systems are often times used alone or in conjunction with reverse osmosis to produce USP Purified Water. Typical ion exchange systems do not effectively remove other contaminants noted in the USP purified water specification. In the ion exchange process, salt ions, which are common to potable water, are removed from the water stream and replaced with hydrogen and hydroxide ions. Ion exchange systems are available in various configurations that include two-bed DI and mixed-bed DI. Both configurations are available in on-site and off-site regeneration systems. 5.2.3

Pretreatment Requirements

Ion exchange systems require pretreatment to remove undissolved solids from the water stream and to avoid resin fouling or degradation. Although dechlorination is also recommended to avoid resin degradation by oxidation, the low levels of chlorine commonly found in most potable water supplies normally demonstrate only long-term effects on most ion exchange resins.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Most of the cost savings opportunities for these systems revolve around the correct choices in materials of construction, pretreatment options, instrumentation, and sizing of the DI system. Acceptable piping materials ID number: 216389 5.2.4

Cost Savings Factors

of construction can vary from PVC to 316L SS. A correctly designed system will minimize the equipment size and maximize the amount of time between regenerations, considering microbial control and maintenance. Choosing to monitor only the critical parameters such as conductivity (resistivity), flow, pressure, etc., can minimize instrumentation.


48


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER There are also cost savings choices that will need to be made with respect to capital purchase and on-going operating costs. These choices will steer you towards DI off-site regenerable bottles, on-site regenerable DI vessels (with automatic or manual controls) or another water treatment unit operation. 5.2.5

Advantages and Disadvantages

Advantages: •

Simple design and maintenance

•

Flexible in water flow production

•

Good upset recovery

•

Low capital cost for single train DI systems

•

Removes ionizable substances (ammonia, carbon dioxide, and some organics)

Disadvantages: •

High cost of operations on high total dissolved solids (TDS) in-feed-water

•

Requires chemical handling for on-site regenerable DI (safety and environmental issues)

•

Full on-site DI system can take significantly more floor space due to primary vessels, chemical storage, and neutralization system

•

Off-site DI systems will require outside service and significant costs for regeneration services

•

Off-site regeneration involves consequent loss of control over the use, handling, and care of DI vessels

•

DI vessels are excellent places for microbial growth to occur between regenerations

5.2.6

Sanitization

All ion exchange resins can be sanitized chemically with various agents. The degree of resin attrition is a function of resin type and the chemical agent. Chemical cleaners include peracetic acid, sodium hypochlorite, and others. Some resins are capable of hot water sanitizations at temperatures between 65°C to 85°C. Ion exchange resins suitable for limited thermal sanitizations include: strong acid cation resin, and standard polystyrene cross-linked with divinylbenzene Type 1 strong base resin.



49

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER Table 5-1

Comparison for ion exchange unit operations Off-Site Regenerated

On-Site Regenerated

Chemical Use:

N/A

Extensive

Sanitization Method:

Change Out or Hot Water

Regenerate

Capital Cost:

Minimal

Extensive

Water Consumption:

None

Medium

Energy Consumption:

Minimal

Minimal

Maintenance Requirements:

Minimal

Medium

Outside Service Used:

Extensive

Low

Reliability:

Good*

Good

Upset Recovery Operations:

Good, Replace

Good

*Note: Having the DI bottles regenerated by an outside service does not relieve the manufacturer of the responsibility to have quality control of their ion exchange system. Table 5-2

Limits of Operation and Expected Performance

Feed Quality: • Total Suspended Solids (turbidity):

• Filtration of 10 micron is recommended

• Chlorine Tolerance:

• Varies with type of resin, generally at 0.5 ppm, some resins are rated up to 1 ppm

• Total Dissolved Solids (TDS):

• < 200 ppm, operation at higher TDS levels is possible but operating costs can be high

• Temperature:

• Most cation resin up to 121°C; most anion resin 40-70°C; some anion resin up to 100°C

• Conductivity:

• Can achieve conductivity below 1.0 microsiemen/cm depending on the system pretreatment and regeneration schedule


•

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Regeneration and Chemical Efficiency: • Linear variation is inverse to the feed water total ID number: 216389 dissolved solids - best below 200 ppm

• Feed TOC: • Product TOC:

50

• Ability to avoid varies with type of resin Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16fouling AM • May increase or decrease incoming TOC levels depending on resin type and feed water - difficult to predict.



CONTINUOUS ELECTRODEIONIZATION (CEDI)

5.3.1

Description

Electrodeionization removes ionized or ionizable species from water using electrically active media and an electrical potential to effect ion transport. Electrodeionization is distinguished from electrodialysis or oxidation/reduction processes by the use of electrically active media, and is distinguished from other ion exchange processes by the use of an electrical potential. The electrically active media in electrodeionization devices functions to alternately collect and discharge ionizable species and to facilitate the transport of ions continuously by ionic or electronic substitution mechanisms. Electrodeionization devices may comprise media of permanent or temporary charge and may be operated batchwise, intermittently, or continuously. The devices can be operated so as to cause electrochemical reactions specifically designed to achieve or enhance performance and may comprise electrically active membranes such as, semi-permeable ion exchange or bipolar membranes. The continuous electrodeionization (CEDI) processes are distinguished from the collection/discharge processes (such as electrochemical ion exchange or capacitive deionization) in that the process is continuous rather than batch or intermittent, and that the ionic transport properties of the active media are a primary sizing parameter, as opposed to ionic capacity. Continuous electrodeionization devices typically comprise semi-permeable ion exchange membranes, permanently charged media, and a power supply that can create a DC electrical field. A continuous electrodeionization cell is formed by two adjacent ion exchange membranes or by a membrane and an adjacent electrode. CEDI units typically have alternating ion depleting (purifying) and ion concentrating cells that can be fed from the same water source, or different water sources. Water is purified in CEDI devices through ion transfer. Ionized or ionizable species are drawn from the water passing through the ion depleting (purifying) cells into the concentrate water stream passing through the ion concentration cells. The water that is purified in CEDI units passes only through the electrically charged ion exchange media, and not through the ion exchange membranes. The ion exchange membranes are permeable to ionized or ionizable species, but not permeable to water. The purifying cells typically have permanently charged ion exchange media between a pair of ion exchange membranes. Some units incorporate mixed (cationic and anionic) ion exchange media between a cationic membrane and an anionic membrane to form the purifying cell. Some units incorporate layers of cation and anion ion exchange media between ion exchange membranes to form the purifying cell. Other devices create single purifying cells (cationic or anionic) by incorporating a single ion exchange medium between ion exchange membranes. CEDI units can be configured with the cells in a plate and frame, or spiral wound configuration.


The power supply creates a DC electric field between the cathode and anode of the CEDI device. Cations in the feed water stream passing through the purifying cell are drawn to the cathode. Cations are transported through the cation exchange media and either pass through the cation permeable membrane or are rejected by the anion permeable membrane. Anions are drawn to the anode and are transferred through anion exchange media and either pass through the anion permeable membrane or are rejected by the cation permeable membrane. The ion exchange membranes are oriented in a manner which contains the cations and anions removed from the purifying cells in the concentrating cells so that the ionic contaminants are removed from the CEDI unit. Some CEDI units utilize ion exchange media in the concentrating cells, while others do not.



As the ionic strength of the purified water stream decreases the high voltage gradient at the water-ion exchange media interfaces can cause water decomposition to its ionic constituents (H+ and OH-). The H+ and OH- ions are created continuously and regenerate the cation and anion exchange media, respectively, at the


51

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER outlet end of the purifying cells. The constant high level of ion exchange media regeneration level allows the production of high purity water (1 to 18 Mohm-cm) in the CEDI process. 5.3.2

Application

In some cases, where drug microbiological quality is of lesser concern, CEDI units may be utilized down stream of reverse osmosis (RO) units in production of USP Purified Water or non-compendial water to increase the life of the CEDI units. For USP WFI water, the CEDI units are utilized up stream of reverse osmosis (RO) units. 5.3.3

Limitations

CEDI units cannot remove all contaminants from water. The principal removal mechanism is for ionized or ionizable species. CEDI units cannot purify 100% of the feed water stream, as a concentrate stream is always required to remove the contaminants from the system. CEDI has temperature limitations for practical operation. Most CEDI units are operated between 10 - 40°C (50 - 104°F). 5.3.4

Pre-treatment Requirements

CEDI units must be protected from scale formation, fouling and thermal or oxidative degradation. The RO/ pretreatment equipment typically reduces hardness, organics, suspended solids, and oxidants to acceptable levels. 5.3.5

Performance

CEDI unit performance is a function of feed water quality and unit design. Ionized solids reduction is generally greater than 99% allowing production of 1 - 18 Mohm-cm quality water from reverse osmosis feed water. Organic rejection typically varies from 50% to 95% depending upon the type of organic material present in the feed stream. Ultraviolet light (185 nm) upstream of CEDI units can substantially increase organic rejection. Dissolved carbon dioxide is converted to bicarbonate ion and removed as dissolved ion. Dissolved silica removal is in the range of 80 - 95%, dependent upon operating conditions. 5.3.6

Cost Savings Factors

Most of the cost savings opportunities revolve around the correct choices in materials of construction, instrumentation, and post-treatment equipment selection. Acceptable materials of construction for piping can vary from PVC to 316L SS. Choosing to monitor only the critical parameters, such as resistivity, flow, and pressure can minimize instrumentation. Many applications for Purified Water require no post-treatment after electrodeionization. Some systems incorporate ultraviolet light and/or sub-micron filtration to either reduce sanitization requirements or to provide microbial levels well below those allowed for Purified Water production as outlined in the USP.


5.3.7


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Attainment of stage 1 conductivity ID number: 216389

Advantages: • •

52

Elimination of chemical handling


•

Elimination of outside service (off-site regenerated resin)

•

Electric field in membrane/resin module provides some bacterial control


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER •

Removal of ionizable substances (e.g., carbon dioxide, ammonia, and some organics)

Disadvantages: •

Does not remove non-ionic contaminants

•

Unique designs for each manufacturer (modules are not interchangeable)

•

May require UV, sub-micron filtration, or reverse osmosis (RO) for further bacterial reduction

•

May require reverse osmosis pretreatment

•

Rinse up after chemical sanitization may take hours to reach peak resistivity and TOC

5.3.8

Sanitization

CEDI units are typically chemically sanitized with a number of agents including: peracetic acid, sodium percarbonate, sodium hydroxide, hydrogen peroxide, and others.

5.4

REVERSE OSMOSIS

5.4.1

Description

Reverse osmosis (RO) is a pressure driven process utilizing a semi-permeable membrane capable of removing dissolved organic and inorganic contaminants from water. A semi-permeable membrane is permeable to some substance such as water, while being impermeable to other substances such as many salts, acids, bases, colloids, bacteria, and endotoxins. RO membranes are produced commercially in a spiral wound configuration for pharmaceutical water production. Membranes are available in two basic materials; cellulose acetate and thin film composite (polyamide). All of the membrane types have advantages and disadvantages. Membrane operating parameters are shown in Table 5-3, below. RO membranes without leading edge brine seals, allow controlled flow between the membranes and pressure vessels to minimize bacterial growth. Table 5-3

RO Membrane Operating Parameters Cellulose Acetate 4-7 1.0 Poor 15-28 90-98 30 30-1000 5

Polyamide/TFC 2-11 0.05* Good 5-50 97-99 50-80 30-1000 5


pH Chlorine Limit, mg/l Resistance to Bacteria Operating Temperature Range °C Rejection - % Sanitization Temp. Limit, °C Typical TDS Feed Range, mg/l Silt Density Index, Max *BEST OPERATION AT 0.0




53

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER 5.4.2

Application

Reverse osmosis can be successfully implemented in pharmaceutical systems in several ways. RO units can be utilized upstream of regenerable deionizers, or off-site regenerated deionizers, to reduce regenerant acid and caustic consumption, or to minimize resin replacement costs. Two-pass RO units (product staged) with proper pH control are generally capable of producing water that meets the requirements of the USP for TOC and conductivity. 5.4.3

Limitations

Reverse osmosis cannot remove 100% of contaminants from water and has very low to no removal capacity for some extremely low molecular weight dissolved organics. RO, however, quantitatively reduces bacteria, endotoxins, colloids and high molecular weight organics from water. RO cannot purify 100% of a feed water stream. A concentrate flow is always necessary to remove the contaminants that are rejected by the membrane. Many users of RO utilize the waste stream from the RO unit for cooling tower make-up water or compressor cooling water, etc. Carbon dioxide passes directly through the RO membrane and CO2 will be in RO product stream at the same level that present in the feed water stream. Excess carbon dioxide in the RO product stream may increase the product conductivity beyond the USP Stage 1 limit. Carbon dioxide contributes to the loading of anion resin, which may be downstream of the RO units. Reverse osmosis has temperature limitations for practical operation. Most RO systems operate on feed water between 5°C and 28°C. 5.4.4


Reverse osmosis membranes must be protected from scale formation, membrane fouling, and membrane degradation. Scaling is possible since the contaminants present in the feed water stream are being concentrated into the waste stream, which is an average of 25% of the feed stream. Scale control is normally prevented by the use of water softening upstream of the membranes, the injection of acids to lower the pH of the feed water stream, or an anti-scalant compound to prevent precipitation. Reverse osmosis membrane fouling is reduced through the use of back-washable multi-media filters or cartridge filters for suspended solids, greens and filtration or softening for colloidal iron removal, and various microbial control pretreatment methods to reduce biological fouling. The principal causes of membrane degradation are oxidation of certain membrane materials and heat degradation. Membranes, which cannot tolerate chlorine normally, incorporate activated carbon or injection of various sodium sulfite compounds for dechlorination. Protection against high temperature is normally incorporated where the feed water is preheated and the membrane material cannot tolerate high temperature.


The reverse osmosis pretreatment unit operations are reviewed in Chapter 4.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 5.4.5 Performance Herzlia, A single stage of reverse osmosis elements typically reduces the level of raw water salts, colloids, organics, ID number: 216389

bacteria, and endotoxin by 90 to 99%. Single stage reverse osmosis product water does not normally meet the requirements of the USP without further purification steps. Some two-pass units (two sets of RO membranes in series) produce water that can pass the USP 24 Stage 1 conductivity requirements, allowing OnLine testing. Those units that do not meet the Stage 1 requirement normally meet Stage 2 or 3. Membrane selection should be based upon pretreatment requirements, operating performance characteristics, sanitization options, warranties, capital and operating costs, and the feed water source.


54




Advantages: •

Reverse osmosis units eliminate or significantly reduce chemical handling and disposal, relative to regenerable ion exchange systems

•

Generally, RO has more effective microbial control than ion exchange systems

•

Integrity testing can be accomplished by salt challenge and measurement of differential conductivity

•

RO removes a wide variety of contaminants including ionized solids and non-ionic materials (e.g., colloids, bacteria, endotoxin, and some dissolved organics)

Disadvantages: •

Water consumption can be significantly higher than ion exchange systems unless the wastewater is reused

•

Energy consumption is generally higher than ion exchange and less than distillation

•

No removal of dissolved gases (e.g., carbon dioxide and ammonia)

5.4.7

Cost Saving Factors

Capital costs can be minimized by reducing membrane area to the minimum suitable for the feed water quality and membrane selected. Piping material and finish significantly impact capital cost. Some systems incorporate PVC low-pressure piping and welded mill finish stainless steel high-pressure piping. Instrument costs can be minimized by appropriate selection of critical and non-critical parameters of operation. These parameters include: •

Flow

•

Pressure

•

Temperature

•

Conductivity

5.4.8

Waste Water Reuse


RO wastewater is frequently used as cooling tower make-up, or for non-contact cooling for compressors, or other heat loads. Wastewater is sometimes re-purified in a wastewater reverse osmosis unit for reintroduction as system feed water. RO wastewater is sometimes used for filter backwash. The wastewater from the second pass of a two pass RO is normally returned to the feed water stream of the first pass RO. 5.4.9

Sanitization


All RO membranes can be sanitized with some chemical agents that vary as a function of membrane selection. Specially constructed membranes are available for hot water sanitization at 60° to 80°C.



55


POLISHING COMPONENTS - NON-IONIC CONTAMINANTS REDUCTION

5.5.1

Ultrafiltration

5.5.1.1 Description Ultrafiltration (UF) is a cross-flow process similar to reverse osmosis (RO). A pressurized feed stream flows parallel to a porous membrane filtration surface. A pressure differential forces water through the membrane. The membrane rejects particulates, organics, microbes, pyrogens, and other contaminants that are too large to pass through the membrane. UF does not reject low molecular weight ionic contaminants, as does reverse osmosis. Membranes are available in both polymeric and ceramic materials. Polymeric membrane elements are available in spiral wound and hollow fiber configurations. Ceramic modules are available in single channel and multiple channel configurations.

5.5.1.2 Application Ultrafiltration is utilized in several ways in Purified Water systems. UF is frequently used down stream of ion exchange processes for organic, colloidal, microbial, and endotoxin reduction. Purified Water with low endotoxin levels (<0.25 Eu/ml) is utilized by some manufacturers in ophthalmic solutions, topicals, and bulk pharmaceutical chemicals that will be utilized in parenteral manufacturing and other applications. Ultrafiltration is frequently used in still feed water systems, in combination with ion exchange, to limit the endotoxin and colloidal silica feed levels to the still.

5.5.1.3 Limitations Ultrafiltration cannot remove 100% of contaminants from water. No ionic rejection occurs and organic rejection varies with the various membrane materials, configuration, and porosity. Many different nominal organic molecular weight rejection ratings are available. Dissolved gasses are not rejected by UF. Most ultrafilters require a waste stream to remove the contaminants on a continuous basis. The waste stream varies, but is usually two to ten percent. Some UF systems run dead-ended.

5.5.1.4 Pretreatment Requirements Pretreatment can include multimedia filters, activated carbon filters, ion exchange, membranes, or others. The UF flux rate and cleaning frequency vary widely as a function of feed water and pretreatment. Most UF membranes are chlorine tolerant and do not require dechlorination of the feed water.


5.5.1.5 Performance

UF is utilized to remove a variety of contaminants. The proper UF membrane must be selected to meet the performance requirements. Organic molecules can be rejected well, but the rating of UF membranes varies in molecular weight cutoffs from 1,000 to 100,000. Reduction of typical raw water organics is not as effective as reverse osmosis. Pressure drops vary with membrane selection and operating temperature. Some UF membranes are capable of continuous operation at temperatures up to 90OC, to provide excellent microbial control.



UF reduction of endotoxin (pyrogens) varies from 2 log10 to 4 log10 as a function of membrane selection. UF has been shown to be capable of consistent production of water meeting the USP WFI endotoxin limit of 0.25 Eu/ml in typical system applications. UF produces excellent microbial reduction with typical ratings of 3 log10 to 4 log10 reduction.

56


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER UF produces excellent particle reduction and is frequently used in other applications, such as semiconductor production when particle control is far more critical than pharmaceutical water.

5.5.1.6 Advantages and Disadvantages Advantages: •

UF can remove some contaminants, such as endotoxin and organics, better than microfiltration

•

UF can have more effective operating costs than microfiltration, in high particle loading applications.

•

Some UF elements can tolerate more rigorous sanitization procedures using steam or ozone, than some other membrane filters (MF or RO).

•

The waste stream is generally much less than waste from reverse osmosis units

•

Ultrafiltration is generally less energy intensive than reverse osmosis

Disadvantages: •

UF cannot remove ionic contaminants, where reverse osmosis can

•

UF generally requires a waste stream, which can be a significant cost factor

•

UF membranes are sometimes more difficult to integrity test than microfiltration cartridges

5.5.1.7 Cost Savings Factors Capital costs can be influenced by the optimum sizing of membrane area and membrane selection. Piping material and finish significantly impact capital cost. Some systems incorporate various plastic piping materials while others utilize sanitary 316L SS. The sanitization method selected is a major factor in material selection. Instrument costs can be minimized by appropriate selection of critical and non-critical parameters of operation.

5.5.1.8 Sanitization UF membranes are sanitized in many different ways. Most polymeric membranes are tolerant of a wide variety of chemical sanitizing agents such as sodium hypochlorite, hydrogen peroxide, peracetic acid, sodium hydroxide, and many others. Some polymeric membranes can be hot water sanitized and some can even be steam sanitized.


Ceramic UF elements can tolerate all common chemical sanitizing agents, hot water, steam, and ozone in sanitization or sterilization procedures.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Most pharmaceutical UF units are fed deionized water for USP Purified Water production or special noncompendial water applications. TheID wastewater is therefore216389 still low conductivity water that can be recycled number: 5.5.1.9 Waste Water Recovery

upstream to reverse osmosis units or fed directly to boilers, cooling towers, or other uses.



57


Microfiltration

5.5.2.1 Description Microfiltration is a membrane process utilized for the removal of fine particles and microorganisms. No waste stream is generally employed in microfiltration processes. Virtually all microfiltration cartridges are disposable and are available in a wide range of materials and pore sizes. In final filtration the filters general range from 0.45 microns down to 0.04 microns. Microfilters are used in a wide range of applications, including aseptic filling of pharmaceutical products, which are not tolerant of terminal sterilization. Microfilters are generally employed in purified water systems for microbial retention downstream of components where some microbial growth may exist. Microfilters can be extremely effective in this area, but operating procedures must be in place to assure filter integrity during installation and membrane replacement to insure proper performance. Microfilters are most appropriately employed in central purified water production systems and their use is discouraged in distribution systems. The filters should not be the only microbial control unit operation in the system. They need to be a part of a comprehensive microbial control plan. Minimizing the number of locations of microfiltration makes proper maintenance easier. (See Chapter 8.)



•

Flexible in water flow production

•

No waste stream

•

Cartridges are integrity testable

•

Heat and chemical sanitization of microfilters

Disadvantages: •

Can only be used as a safety net for microbial production

•

No ion or endotoxin removal

•

Shorter life due to dead head design, so replacement is required

•

Not recommended for use in distribution piping


5.5.2.3 Performance


Microfiltration can be as effective as ultrafiltration in microbial reduction and can minimize water consumption, as no waste stream is necessary. Microfiltration, however, cannot reduce dissolved organic levels as ultrafiltration can, and microfiltration cannot remove particles as small as ultrafilters can, due to the difference in pore size. Heat and chemical sanitization of microfilters is possible with the proper selection of material.


58



Ultraviolet Light Treatment

5.5.3.1 Description Ultraviolet light rays strike microorganisms (bacteria, virus, yeast, mold, or algae) and break through their outer membrane to modify the DNA. The modified DNA code brings about the destruction of the organism. The ultraviolet radiation is a point of use application with no residual radiation characteristics. Proper prefiltration should be implemented to keep particulate from shielding organisms from UV light. (See Chapter 8.)



•

254 nm design for microbial reduction

•

185 nm design for TOC reduction

•

No waste stream

•

Heat, ozone, and chemical sanitization are possible

Disadvantages: •

Can be used only as a safety net for microbial production

•

No ion or endotoxin removal

•

No disinfection residual

•

Particulate can shield organisms from UV light

5.5.3.3 Performance The UV light is used as a final treatment step to address microbial control and TOC reduction (where necessary), after deionization processes.



59

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER Figure 5-1 Purified Water

Figure 5-2


60


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER Table 5-4

Purified Water Systems Comparison Chart Reverse Osmosis/ Reverse Osmosis/ On-Site Reverse Osmosis/ Off-Site Continuous Regenerated Off-Site Regenerated Regenerated On-Site Regenerated Electrodeionization Ion Exchange Ion Exchange Ion Exchange Ion Exchange

Two-Pass Reverse Osmosis

Distillation

CAPITAL COST

L

M

M

M

M

M

H

CHEMICAL HANDLING

N

L

H

M

L

L

L (2)

ENERGY CONSUMPTION

L

M

L

M

M

M

H

WATER CONSUMPTION

L

H (1)

M

H (1)

H (1)

H (1)

M (3)

OUTSIDE SERVICE COSTS

H

M

L

L

L

L

L

OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE

L

M

M

M

M

M

L

PRODUCT CONDUCTIVITY MICROSIEMEN / CM @ 25°C

1.0 - 0.06

1.0 - 0.06

1.0 - 0.06

1.0 - 0.06

1.0 - 0.07

2.5 - 0.5

1.0 - 0.1

PRODUCT TOC.PPB

(4)

<500

(4)

<500

<500

<500

<500

MICROBIAL PERFORMANCE

L

M

L

M

M

H

H

Ratings:

N = None

L = Low

M = Medium

H = High

Notes for Table 5-4: 1) High-water consumption unless wastewater is reused - cooling tower makeup, etc. 2) Total chemical requirement dependent upon pretreatment selection 3) Total water consumption dependent upon pretreatment selection. 4) USP TOC requirement is met in most cases but may not be if feed water is high TOC (>2 ppm) 5) High microbial performance refers to low microbial count in relative terms



61



FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI)





FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI)

6.1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter addresses the USP approved final treatment methods for the production of compendial WFI. WFI is the purest grade of bulk water monographed by the USP and would be expected to be used for the manufacture of parenteral, some ophthalmic and inhalation products, and for finishing steps of parenteral grade active pharmaceutical ingredients (API’s). Recommended systems include either distillation or RO as the final processing step, but may also include ultrafiltration (UF), deionization (DI) and/or ion exchange (IX), to compliment the RO or distillation unit operation. The technology, operation, maintenance, and relative cost issues for the approved process methods are discussed. This chapter includes USP monograph information, regulatory issues, and subsections that cover the unit operations: •

Single effect (SE) distillation

•

Multi-effect (ME) distillation

•

Vapor compression (VC) distillation

•

Reverse osmosis (RO)

Feed water pretreatment is covered along with economic factors such as construction materials, surface finishes, and instrumentation and controls. A comparison table on USP-WFI final treatment options and relative attributes is provided.

6.2

US PHARMACOPOEIA ISSUES

The United States Pharmacopoeia (USP) allows WFI to be “purified by distillation or by RO”. This statement does not imply that the regulated process step is the only process step, but the USP advisory section does imply that it is the final step in the process. •

Only distillation may be used to produce WFI under current European regulations

•

Distillation, RO and UF are allowable methods to produce WFI under the Japanese regulations


There are few regulations, which govern the design and construction of pharmaceutical water purification systems. There are no existing regulations governing materials of construction, type, or level of instrumentation, surface finish, or operating temperatures. Most practices commonly followed with respect to these and other issues, have been adopted based on many factors.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Among U.S. government publications, including the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) and the FDA Guide to Inspection of High Purity Water Systems, there are few stipulations ID number: 216389related to design and construction of WFI processing equipment. Two notable stipulations are: •


“Heat exchangers, other than the double concentric tube type or double tube sheet type, must employ a pressure differential and a means for monitoring the differential.”


63

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) •

“All stills and tanks holding liquid requiring microbial control shall have air vents with non-fiber releasing sterilizable filters capable of preventing microbial contamination of the contents.”

6.3

DISTILLATION

The pharmaceutical still chemically and microbiologically purifies water by phase changes and entrainment separation. In this process water is evaporated, producing steam. The steam disengages from the water leaving behind dissolved solids, non-volatiles, and high molecular weight impurities. However, low molecular weight impurities are carried with the water mist/droplets, which are entrained in the steam. A separator removes fine mist and entrained impurities, including endotoxins. The purified steam is condensed into WFI. Distillation systems are available to provide a minimum of 3 log10 (99.99%) reduction in endotoxin concentration. Specific endotoxin loading limits should be reviewed with the manufacturer. A variety of different designs are available including single effect (SE), multi-effect (ME), and vapor compression (VC). The distilled water quality expected from an SE still is equivalent to an ME design, by virtue of the fact that water is distilled only once in both systems. The benefit to the user of ME versus SE distillation are the significantly lower operating costs associated with utilities. In an ME system, purified steam produced by each effect is utilized to heat water and generate more steam in the subsequent effect. Due to this staged evaporation and condensation process, only the first effect requires heat from an external source, and only the purified steam produced by the final effect is condensed, using an external cooling medium. VC stills can produce similar quality water using a different technique. Energy imparted to the generated steam, by a mechanical compressor, results in compressed steam with increased pressure and temperature. The higher energy steam is then discharged back into the evaporator/condenser vessel to generate more steam in a continuous cycle. Areas of concern are carry over of impurities, evaporator flooding, stagnant water, and pump and compressor seal design. These concerns may be addressed using mist eliminators, high water level indicators, use of sanitary pumps and compressors, proper drainage, adequate blow down control, and conductivity sensing to divert unacceptable water to drain.

6.4

DISTILLATION APPLICATIONS AND CAPACITIES

The majority of USP WFI currently produced in the United States is produced by distillation. WFI production is shared by both ME and VC stills. SE stills are found in areas where only small quantities of WFI are required. However, where large amounts of WFI are required, economics of operation dictate the use of either ME or VC.


Table 6-1 shows typical capacities and temperatures of WFI produced by each process. Table 6-1

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Single-Effect Multi-Effect ID number: 216389

Capacities and WFI Temperature Options

CAPACITY RANGE IN GPH WFI Temperature range/Options, °C

64

1 - 100

25 - 3,000

Vapor compression 100 - 6,000

Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM 80 - 100 37 - 100 • Ambient • 80 - 100 • Combination Ambient/Hot


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.5

PROCESS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

6.5.1

Single Effect Distillation (SE)

SE systems incorporate a single evaporator heat exchanger, separator mechanism, and a condenser. SE systems are available in electrically or steam powered versions, although electrical units are limited to very small production rates (<30 gallons per hour). Steam powered units typically require 30-60 psig plant steam. Cooling fluid is required for both steam and electric powered versions. When water is the coolant, the rate is approximately 8-10 gallons per gallon of WFI produced, based on a supply temperature of 4 - 16°C, and temperature rise of 67°C. SE systems typically operate at atmospheric pressure and 100°C, and incorporate non-ASME code vessels. WFI is delivered at atmospheric pressure and 80 - 100°C; thus a distillate transfer pump is required, unless the WFI tank is at a lower elevation than the still. 6.5.2

Multi-Effect Distillation (ME)

ME systems incorporate two or more evaporator heat exchangers, separator mechanisms, and a condenser into a staged evaporation and condensation process. Typical systems have 3-8 effects. Each effect includes an evaporator and a separator (see Chapter 11). ME systems typically require plant steam at 80 - 120 psig, and cooling fluid at a supply temperature of 4°C 16°C, based on a temperature rise of 65°C - 70°C. The quantity of steam and cooling fluid required varies significantly based upon the WFI production rate and the number of effects. Capital costs increase while steam and cooling fluid consumption decrease, as the number of effects to produce a given quantity of WFI increases. ME systems operate under pressure, and typically deliver WFI at 80°C - 100°C. Normally, water used for cooling is not the same as the feed water, and does not require special pretreatment for the purpose of scale prevention. However, corrosion prevention measures, such as chlorine and chloramine removal, are necessary. Some designs deliver the water at atmospheric pressure and require a transfer pump unless the WFI storage tank is at lower elevation than the still. Other designs which may operate at 5-10 psig condenser pressure, do feature a distillate transfer pump for higher pressure deliveries. 6.5.3

Vapor Compression Distillation (VC)


VC is a distillation method where water is evaporated inside, or outside, a bank of tubes arranged in a horizontal or vertical configuration. The horizontal design is normally of the forced circulation type with recirculation pump and spray nozzles, while the vertical design is of the natural circulation type.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, The VC process operates on the same as the mechanical refrigeration cycle. IDprinciple number: 216389

Major system components are the evaporator, compressor, heat exchangers, deaerator, pumps, motors, valves, instruments, and controls.

In a VC still, feed water is evaporated on one side of the tubes. The generated steam passes through the disengagement space, through the separator, and into the compressor.



65

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) The energy imparted by the compressor results in compressed steam with increased pressure and temperature. The higher energy steam is then discharged back into the evaporator/condenser vessel. There, the steam condenses and gives up its latent heat, which is transferred through the tube wall to the water. More water is boiled off, generating more vapor, and the process is repeated. The outgoing distillate and blow down streams preheat the incoming feed water, thus saving energy. Since the latent heat is recycled, there is no need for a stand-alone condenser as in the SE or ME systems. 6.5.4

Distillation pretreatment requirements - General

All distillation units are susceptible to scaling and corrosion, if the appropriate feed water pretreatment is not provided. VC and some SE stills operate slightly above atmospheric pressure, and the removal of calcium and magnesium, by way of water softening, is normally required as a minimum. ME stills operate at a much higher pressure and temperature, and require higher quality feed water in order to prevent scaling and corrosion. Normally, ion exchange beds are employed as feed water pretreatment to a multiple effect still. RO is also used as feed water pretreatment for either the VC or multiple effect stills. All distillation units will invariably experience some form of scale build-up and must therefore include routine visual inspections plus cleaning of the still during shutdown periods when appropriate. Both types of stills are susceptible to attack by chlorine. Chlorine removal is essential if damage is to be avoided. Activated carbon filters and sodium bisulfate injection are effective and common methods for chlorine removal. From a microbiological perspective, the bacterial and endotoxin load should be consistently controlled to a level that does not overload the still. 6.5.5

Pretreatment requirements – Specific

6.5.5.1 Pretreatment for Single Effect Still (SE) See the “Pretreatment for ME still” paragraph and above for general information on distillation pretreatment.

6.5.5.2 Pretreatment for Multi-Effect Still (ME) The baseline pretreatment for ME must provide very low TDS feed water, preferably less than 10 mg/l, and less than 1 mg/l silica. Some manufacturers offer ME stills to operate on softened water. Others allow higher levels of silica, up to 5 mg/l. The pretreatment must also remove chlorine and objectionable volatiles, such as ammonia, if present. Figure 6-1 A baseline system to achieve very low TDS may be DI or RO.


66


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) See Chapters 4 and 5 for more information on pretreatment.

6.5.5.3 Pretreatment for Vapor Compression Still (VC) See Section 6.5.4 for general information on distillation pretreatment requirements. The baseline pretreatment for VC stills is softening, the removal of chlorine, and other objectionable volatiles such as ammonia, if present. Figure 6-2 Baseline Treatment for VC Stills

6.5.5.4 Economics a) Economics of the Single Effect Still: Commercially available SE systems are inherently simple in design, configured similarly, and offered with significantly fewer options, compared to ME and VC systems. As a result, fewer factors affecting costs are applicable by comparison. Operating costs of SE systems are associated mainly with plant steam and cooling fluid. Utilities consumption rates are fairly consistent among SE manufacturers. b) Economics of the Multi-Effect Still: Although all commercially available ME systems are configured similarly and supplied with the same basic components, opportunities for cost savings exist in the areas of construction materials, surface finishes, and instrumentation. Operating costs of ME systems are associated mainly with plant steam and cooling fluid. Utilities consumption rates vary among ME manufacturers. c) Economics of the Vapor Compression Still: Significant opportunities exist to reduce capital cost associated with selection of construction materials, surface finishes, and instrumentation used in the construction of VC stills. Operating costs of VC systems are associated mainly with electrical power. 6.5.6


Recommended Construction Materials

Materials shown Table 6-2 are based on available designs by leading manufacturers. However, other materials may be utilized based on the technical application.




67

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) Table 6-2

Materials of Construction Single-Effect

Multi-Effect

Vapor Compression

Evaporator Shell

SS / Tin coated copper

316L SS

304/L SS

Tubesheets


316L SS

304/L SS

SS

316/L SS; Titanium

304 SS


316 SS

316 SS

SS or Tin coated copper when used

316/L SS

316/L SS

Not used

Not Used

304L SS

Piping


316/L SS, Sanitary clamps*

316/L SS, Sanitary clamps*

Pumps

SS when used

316 / 316L SS with Sanitary clamps*

316 / 316L SS with Sanitary clamps*

Not used

Not Used

316 SS / Inconel

SS

316 SS

316 SS

Carbon Steel

Carbon Steel

Carbon Steel

Other tube material options are available

All 316 / 316L SS

Tubes Separator Heat Exchangers Deaerator

Compressor Valves Skid/Frame Optional

*Some manufacturers may use sanitary clamps on distillate piping only.

6.5.6.1 Surface Finish Mechanical polishing (MP), electropolishing (EP), and passivation processes are implemented in stainless steel distillation systems in order to improve corrosion resistance. These processes are neither necessary, nor applicable, to other alloys such as tin-coated copper, titanium, and Inconel, based on differences in metal chemistry.

This Document is licensed to Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389

MP and EP/passivation processes affect the microscopic amplitude and chemical composition, respectively, of the stainless surface. These processes are not considered necessary to control microbial growth due to the relatively high operating temperatures. MP is advocated for final finishing of mechanical welds and EP/ passivation for all stainless steel surfaces to optimize the formation of the corrosion resistant chromium oxide barrier.


The impact of progressive mechanical polishing on the capital cost of stills and other equipment is considerable, and often can account for 25% to 30% of a ME or VC still cost. MP processes, except when used to smooth out a mechanical weld or misalignment etc., may be removed from the applicable specification without fear of compromising the water quality.

68


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.5.6.2 Instrumentation and Controls For WFI applications, the level of instrumentation should be sufficient to monitor parameters considered critical because they relate to ensuring proper hydraulic/thermodynamic functionality and the production of the appropriate quality of WFI. Instrumentation for critical operating parameters should be calibratable using National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable equipment

6.5.6.3 Advantages and Disadvantages Table 6-3

Process and Steam Comparison

Configuration

Single-Effect

Multi-Effect

Vapor Compression

• Evaporator

YES

YES

YES

• Condenser

YES

YES

NO

NO/optional

YES

YES

• Compressor

NO

NO

YES

• ASME Coded

Normally NO

YES

NO

• Distillate pump

Normally NO

Optional

YES

• Blowdown pump

NO

NO

YES

• Feed booster pump

NO

YES

NO

Steam or electric

Steam

Ambient WFI: -Steam or electric

• Feed/Blowdown heat exchangers

Makeup heat

HOT WFI: -Steam LOW

HIGH

LOW

YES

YES

NO

Plant Steam Pressure, psig

30 - 60

100 - 120

30 - 40

Feed Water Pressure, psig

30 - 50

75 - 90

30 - 50

• Steam pressure Cooling water


Condensor Cooling Water Pressure, psig MAY BE USED TO GENERATE CLEAN STEAM

30 - 50 30 - 50 Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, YES YES (not common ID practice) number: 216389

Not required

NO



69

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.6

REVERSE OSMOSIS (RO)

RO employs a semi-permeable membrane and a relatively high pressure differential to force water through the membrane to achieve chemical, microbial, and endotoxin reduction, critical in USP WFI applications. The feed water is converted into two streams, permeate and reject. The permeate water flows through the membrane and is produced cold and as such does not have the temperature protection for microbial growth afforded by the alternate distillation processes. The reject stream discharges comparatively smaller volume than the permeate, and contains virtually all of the feed water contaminants. 6.6.1

Application

RO systems are used as USP WFI pretreatment for distillation processes, or as final treatment for USP Purified water systems. RO is also an accepted means of producing WFI, and may provide a low capital and operational cost alternative to distillation. Membranes that are hot water sanitizable at 80°C are now available for pretreatment and final treatment, thus eliminating the need for chemical sanitization and simplifying the validation process. These membranes still require periodic chemical cleaning. Membranes, which may allow for continuous operation at 80°C, are under development. This may have a significant impact on the use of RO as a means of producing USP WFI, since operation of the system at 80°C may nearly eliminate biological concerns. Failure of a membrane or seal will result in permeate contamination. These problems may be controlled by: •

Pretreatment of the feed water

•

Appropriate membrane material selection

•

Latest technology membrane design

•

Integrity challenges

•

Periodic sanitization

•

Monitoring of microbial levels, conductivity, total organic carbon and differential pressures

6.6.2

Description

Semi-permeable RO membranes are produced commercially for water purification in spiral wound and hollow fiber configurations. RO membranes are permeable to some substances such as water and dissolved gases, while impermeable to other substances such as salts, high molecular weight organics, acids, bases, colloids, bacteria, and endotoxins. Membranes are available in four basic materials; cellulose acetate, polyamide, thin film composite, and polysulfone. (Polyamide membranes are virtually identical in performance to thin film composite membranes.) All three membrane types have advantages and disadvantages. (See Chapter 5 for more details.)


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Bacteria and endotoxin removal, required for WFI applications, can be performed at ambient temperatures. This significantly reduces utility costs compared to alternative elevated temperature processes (distillation). ID number: 216389 By operating at ambient temperatures, distribution piping may not require insulation and may not need to be constructed of stainless steel.


For WFI applications, opportunities exist for enhanced control of the single pass unit, by utilizing multi-passproduct-staged or other combination designs. These configurations improve reliability and efficiency, while improving water quality and quality assurance over the single pass design.

70


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.6.3


RO, as the final processing step, may require pretreatment using ion exchange, deionization, RO, and/or ultrafiltration to improve operability and quality attributes. Pretreatment requirements normally include gross particle filtration, scale prevention, and chlorine removal. Carbon dioxide and ammonia gas, are not removed by the RO process, and may be removed by degasification, caustic addition, ion exchange, or electrodeionization, prior to the final RO process step. (See Chapter 5 for more details.) Due to the stringent microbial and endotoxin control required for parenteral and other critical applications, the pretreatment prior to the RO should incorporate additional provisions for control and monitoring of microorganisms. Disinfectants, such as chlorine or chloramine, should be maintained, when tolerable, at appropriate levels throughout the pretreatment chain. Stagnant water resulting from surge tanks or dead legs should be avoided by design, or by the inclusion of recirculation systems, which should include In-Line microbial control devices, such as UV sterilizers. Regular and appropriate sanitization and cleaning of all unit operations subsequent to and associated with, the disinfectant (chlorine or chloramine etc.) removal should be scheduled, to maintain and complete the micro-organism control of the pretreatment system. (See Chapter 4 for further details.) 6.6.4

Economics

Opportunities are available to reduce capital costs associated with the selection of construction materials, surface finishes, and instrumentation used in the construction of RO units without compromising the water quality. Operating costs of RO systems are associated mainly with replacement membranes, water concentrate discharge, electrical power, cleaning and sanitizing chemicals, replacement filters, and pretreatment cost. 6.6.5

Construction Materials

Construction material selection for RO systems are driven by: •

Structural integrity, based on high operating pressure

•

Structural integrity, based on low pressure sections ahead and after the membranes

•

Chemical compatibility with the contact fluid and its constituents

•

Need to control micro-organism growth


The low operating temperature of the RO system allows the use of non-metallic construction materials. Sanitary piping and valves are generally optional features for RO systems, based on the specific manufacturer and location of the RO in the treatment chain.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, For the final purification step, it mayID be very cost effective to216389 utilize mill finish 304 stainless steel for the feed number: and concentrate waste piping for the system, maintaining 316L stainless steel or PVDF and sanitary design for the product piping only.


6.6.6

Surface Finish

MP and EP processes are not applicable to non-metallic systems.


71

FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 6.6.7

Instrumentation and Controls

RO control systems usually use local control and indication, and do not typically require programmable logic controllers (PLC) as a standard feature. The type and level of instrumentation is similar among manufacturers. The level of instrumentation should be sufficient to monitor parameters considered critical because they relate to ensuring proper hydraulic functionality and the consistent production of quality WFI. Instrumentation for critical operating parameters should be calibratable using NIST traceable equipment. (See Chapter 9 for more details.) The typically monitored operating parameters for an RO system are feed pH, feed conductivity, and product quality (TOC and conductivity). These three parameters should be measured using calibratable, NIST traceable instruments. Recording data may be accomplished manually or electronically using analog instruments and paper/paperless recording systems. 6.6.8


Multi-pass can, in most cases, produce water quality consistent with the minimum requirements of USP WFI. In cases where the feed water quality is such that this is not possible, the use of some type of deionization (e.g., additional RO, UF, ion exchange, or electrodeionization) as a pretreatment may be required. This is to allow the final point of purification to remain RO and the system to generate consistent and reliable water within the USP WFI specifications. Advantages associated with the design and operation of RO units used as the final treatment step for the production of WFI are: 1) Depending on cost and complexity of pretreatment, RO systems designed for production of USP WFI may provide for significantly reduced capital costs when compared with distillation processes, while maintaining the appropriate USP WFI quality. 2) The utility requirements are significantly lower for RO systems (electricity for pump horsepower) than for distillation, resulting in lower operating costs, which may be a very significant factor over the lifetime of the system. Disadvantages associated with the design and operation of RO units used as the final treatment step for the production of WFI are: 1) Membrane fouling and integrity •

Bacteria grow-through

•

Seal leakage or by-passing

•

Seal failure or damage caused by chemical attack etc.

•

Membrane damage during installation etc.

•


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Membrane damage due to chemical or high temperature attack ID number: 216389

2) Membrane material sensitivity to bacteria and sanitizing agents.


72


FINAL TREATMENT OPTIONS: WATER FOR INJECTION (WFI) 3) Inherent sanitization limitations •

Periodic chemical or hot water sanitization may be required

•

Periodic chemical cleaning may be required

4) Pretreatment cost may be high RO systems provide a method for consistently producing ambient water in accordance with the USP WFI requirements. This not only reduces utility requirements, but also may reduce installation costs, since thermal insulation may not be required for storage and distribution.

6.7

USP - WATER FOR INJECTION SYSTEMS COMPARISON

Table 6-4

WFI Systems Comparison RO

UNIT OPERATION (1,2)

DISTILLATION

2 pass RO

SE

ME

VC

Capital Cost

M

M

H

H

Chemical Consumption

L

N/A

N/A

N/A

Energy Consumption

M

H

H

H

M (3)

H

M

M

Outside Service Costs

L

L

L

L

Operational Maintenance

L

L

L

L

Water Consumption

Ratings:

L = Low

M = Medium

H = High

Notes: 1) All Indicators are relative to each other within the specific category 2) Optimum design and operating conditions are assumed 3) Total water consumption is dependent on pretreatment selected 4) RO may not meet USP TOC levels if feed water TOC is high (>3 ppm)



73



PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM





PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM 7.

PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM

7.1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter aims to simplify and standardize the process of selection, programming, and design of pharmaceutical steam systems. Guidelines, information, and options are provided, along with advantages and disadvantages, based on the best and most cost effective of current and proven practices and technologies. The absence of regulations governing the use of steam in pharmaceutical processes has resulted in the proliferation of differing practices and interpretations. Most interpretations are made on the side of conservatism. Unfortunately, in addition to increasing cost without an associated increase in benefits, excessive conservatism can result in system complexity, and possibly reduced reliability. One example is the use of clean steam (non-utility boiler produced steam) where a form of utility steam (utility boiler produced steam) would be adequate to maintain product quality. The installation of a clean steam generator when a simple steam reducing station would suffice results in added equipment and the associated impact on cost, complexity, and reliability. In some instances, interpretations are based on inaccurate assumptions of what is important or critical. An example is the over specifying of pretreatment or using WFI as feed to solve the perceived problem. The chapter establishes standard definitions for terms commonly associated with pharmaceutical steam and provides information that facilitates making correct and cost effective decisions.

7.2

cGMP ISSUES

The user has the ultimate responsibility for system design and performance, and for ensuring that the proper type of steam is used for a given process. There is no FDA or USP minimum standard for clean steam. However, cGMPs for large volume parenterals (LVPs) issued in 1976 indicated that feed water for boilers supplying steam that contact components, drug products, and drug product contact surfaces shall not contain volatile additives such as amines or hydrazines. Few regulations govern the design and construction of clean steam generators. There are also no regulations governing materials of construction, type or level of instrumentation, surface finishes, or operating temperatures. Among US Government publications, the FDA’s Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) provides culinary steam recommendations and stipulations related to heat exchanger and tank air vents design and construction. The Culinary steam recommendations apply to food applications only.


US Public Health Service/Dairy Industry Committee, 3A Sanitary Standards, Number 609-02, adds additional limitations to Culinary steam feed water additives for food applications. It should be noted that boiler feed water additives permitted in food for human consumption may not be acceptable in drinking water or orally ingested drug products. 7.2.1

Steam Attributes

7.2.1.1 Quality



The term “Quality” when referring to steam indicates the level of steam saturation. There are no FDA or USP regulations relating to minimum “steam quality” or the level of non-condensable gasses present in pharmaceutical steam. (See Section 7.4.)


75

PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM European regulators have defined specific criteria for pharmaceutical steam used for equipment sterilization. (European Standard EN 285 - Steam Sterilizers - reference section 13.3) These cover acceptable levels of saturation or dryness, the level of superheat, and the volume of non-condensable gases present.

7.2.1.2 Purity Purity requirements for steam used in pharmaceutical manufacturing and product development are driven by the product characteristics, manufacturing process, and the intended use of the product. The product manufacturer is responsible for ensuring that steam used to process the product is appropriate. Though steam purity requirements are product specific, it may be impractical to reliably produce special steam for each situation. Manufacturing operations typically generate and distribute only one or two steam purity grades, commonly grouped.

7.3

TYPES OF STEAM

Pharmaceutical steam is classified into two (2) types based on their respective sources. These are: 1) Utility-Boiler produced steam, hereafter called Utility Steam. 2) Non-Utility Boiler produced steam, hereafter called Clean Steam. 7.3.1

Utility Steam

Utility steam is characterized with usually having: •

Chemical additives to control scale and corrosion

•

Relatively high pressure with the potential of generating superheat during expansion

•

Relatively high pH

Chemical additives: Utility steam is produced, in most cases, using conventional fire-tube steam boilers, normally of steel construction. Such boilers are almost always provided with systems that inject additives in the feed water to protect the boiler and steam distribution piping from scale and corrosion. Some of these scale and corrosion inhibitors may, and often do, include amines and other substances that may not be acceptable in steam being used in pharmaceutical processes. The user must determine what additives are used, and verify if they are acceptable in the particular application, i.e., do not add any impurities or create a reaction in the drug product.


Utility steam can be filtered to remove particulate matter, but filtration does not remove dissolved substances and volatiles such as amines.


Superheat: Superheated steam is produced in water tube boilers by reheating the steam or by generating the steam at a higher pressure in a fire tube boiler and then reducing the pressure through a regulating valve. When the pressure is reduced, the energy in the higher temperature steam is dissipated to generate steam at the lower pressure and produce superheated steam above the corresponding saturation temperature. Superheat is dissipated downstream of the regulating valve due to heat loss in the line.


pH control: In order to protect carbon steel from corrosion by the steam, it is necessary to use additives to raise the pH to between 9.5 -10.5.

76


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM 7.3.2

Clean Steam (CS)

Pharmaceutical clean steam is generated from treated water free of volatile additives, such as amines or hydrazines, and is used for thermal disinfection or sterilization processes. It is considered especially important to preclude such contamination from injectable drug products: Clean steam is characterized as having: •

No additives

•

No generated superheat except when the generated pressure is significantly higher than the use pressure of the steam. (See Section 7.3.1 - Superheat.)

•

Relatively low pH

There are many terms used in the pharmaceutical industry to describe Clean Steam. These include Clean Steam, Pure Steam, Pyrogen Free Steam, WFI Steam, and USP Purified Water steam. There is no standard or accepted definition for any of these terms. However, the most commonly used terms are “Pure Steam” and “Clean Steam”. In this Guide, the term “Clean Steam” is used in lieu of all others. The condensate of Clean Steam has no buffer, and may have a relatively low pH compared to that of utility steam.

7.4

BACKGROUND AND INDUSTRY PRACTICES

7.4.1

Purity of sterilizing steam

When steam or the resulting condensed water comes in direct or indirect contact with the drug product, the purity should be equivalent to the water purity acceptable for final rinsing of the drug contact surfaces. Note: A continuous supply of Dry Saturated Steam at the point of use is considered necessary for efficient steam sterilization. Water carried by the steam in suspension may cause damp loads and superheated steam is considerably less effective than saturated steam when used for sterilization. Non-condensable gases if contained in the steam may prevent the attainment of sterilization conditions in parts of the sterilizer load. 7.4.2

Steam used for humidification

When steam is used for indirect humidification, such as injection into HVAC air streams prior to final air filtration, the steam does not need to be purer than the air that it is being mixed with. However, when humidifying process areas, the potential level of impurities, including amines and hydrazines should be evaluated in order to ascertain the impact on the final drug product. This is particularly important in areas where open processing takes place, such as aseptic filling suites and formulation areas. If the diluted water vapor is found to contribute significantly to the contamination of the drug, a purer grade of steam should be selected.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 7.4.3 Common practices Herzlia, It is common practice to generate pharmaceutical steam from compendial waters and test the steam condenID number: 216389

sate for equivalency to the compendial standard. This practice ignores the ability of the pharmaceutical steam generator to remove impurities. This overprocessing is wasteful and unnecessary. An exception is when the steam quantity is small and the cost and maintenance of a dedicated feed water pretreatment system exceeds the cost of using compendial water. Pharmaceutical Clean Steam is commonly used in applications were utility steam would suffice; such as non-critical room humidification and high purity water heat exchangers.



77

PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM Table lists the commonly accepted industry standards and highlights the trend in the pharmaceutical industry to provide “purer than necessary” steam and over-specified feed water. 7.4.4

Industry and Baseline Practices in the Production of Steam

Table 7-1

Practices in the Production of Steam Intended Use of Steam

Method of generation of steam

Parenteral and Non-Parenteral Dosage form applications where steam is in direct contact with the drug.

The use of a sanitary clean steam generator with entrainment for the control of endotoxins & liquid carry-over (SCSG) is both baseline and common industry practice.

Critical step in the manufacture of API where steam is in direct contact with the Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient (API).

The use of an SCSG is both baseline and common industry practice.

Non-Critical step in the manufacture of an API where added impurities may be removed in a subsequent step.

SCSGs are commonly used; however, utility steam is the acceptable baseline application.

Sterilization of USP water systems.

WHILE THE USE OF A SCSG IS COMMON PRACTICE, AN ALTERNATIVE APPROACH IS TO USE UTILITY STEAM PLUS HOT USP WATER, FLUSHING & WASTE TESTING.

Process humidification for dosage form application where steam is in direct contact with the drug, where open processing takes place and where the potential level of amines, hydrazine’s etc. in the condensate has been determined to have a detrimental effect on the drug product.

SCSGs are commonly used and are the Baseline application.

Humidification of non-critical HVAC systems such as rooms and areas where the drug is not directly exposed to the room atmosphere.

SCSGs are commonly used but utility steam may be totally acceptable.

HUMIDIFICATION OF PROCESS & CRITICAL CLEANROOMS.

Where open processing takes place and where the potential level of amines, hydrazine’s etc. in the condensate has been determined to have a detrimental effect on the drug product the baseline and common practice is the use of a SCSG. However, if it has been determined that the impurities have an insignificant effect on the drug product, a utility steam source would qualify as the baseline approach.


Energy source for non-critical & cGMP heat exchangers.

It is common practice to use a SCSG as the energy source. The baseline approach would be to use a utility steam source coupled with a cGMP heat exchanger design.

Sterilization of fermentation vessels.

It is common practice as well as the baseline approach to use utility steam.


78


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM Figure 7-1 Pharmaceutical Steam System Planning



79

PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM 7.5

SYSTEM PLANNING

Pharmaceutical Steam System Planning, shown in the Figure 7-1 is a graphic representation of the system boundaries, limitations, and restrictions. Initial system planning reveals primary boundaries that establish the cornerstone for design criteria. These system boundaries are Steam Requirements, System Design, Use Point Criteria, and Distribution System requirements. The arrows encircling each boundary represent limitations that establish more specific operating strategies and ranges. To allow more flexibility in final planning and detailed design the designer should always indicate ranges of acceptability, rather than a specific value or position. 7.5.1

Steam Requirements

The planning process starts with the listing of all steam requirements and applications that include: •

Company standards including QA/QC requirements and published Sop’s

•

The categorization of use-point by: •

Type of application (Humidification, critical or non-critical, API, and Dosage for applications)

•

Purity selection (this is based primarily on the application and the endotoxin and chemical purity criteria set for the product for which the steam, or its condensate, will be in contact with. The selection must consider underlying factors which have impacts on purity control, installed and operating cost, maintenance, and practicality)

•

Steam quality (dryness, non-condensable limits, and maximum superheat)

7.5.2

System Design

Pharmaceutical steam is generated using different methods. The most appropriate method for each application must be selected. (See the Pharmaceutical Steam Purity Decision Tree, Section 7.6.) The process continues with an evaluation of the steam system requirements (generation) that includes: the selection of the type of generation system that would satisfy each category, which would include: •

The types of generation systems available. (If both pyrogen free clean steam and clean steam without endotoxin limits is required, the practicality and economy of producing only the higher grade should be raised.)

•

The source of utility steam or electrical power (The plant steam requirement for clean steam as well as utility steam and the option of electric powered steam generators should be considered.)

•

The type and number of systems required based on feedback from the “Distribution System” evaluation

• •


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein The condensate sampling needs Herzlia, Safety considerations ID number: 216389

7.5.3

Use Point Criteria


The third step defines the specific delivery requirement ranges for clean steam at the point of use including:

80


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM •

Utilization, which is determined from each overall system peak demand(s), average demand, and the relationships between peak demand time periods and their flow rates.

•

Pressures and flow levels

•

Use periods and histogram analysis, if available

•

Quality

•

Purity

7.5.4

Distribution System

The fourth step includes the distribution system evaluation, which includes: •

Condensate, non-condensable and moisture removal

•

Pipe size and Insulation requirements including: •

Materials of construction, sanitary design requirements and surface finish

•

Physical location of each use point

•

Heat and temperature losses

•

Natural drainage

Note: Since the steam quality will decline, due to heat losses, with time, the efficiency of the insulation and the length of the distribution system, the quality at the use point will not be expected to reflect the generation quality level. 7.5.5

Re-evaluation of system boundaries and constraints

These sequential steps are repeated and re-evaluated as information in the design process iterates, and further criteria about the overall system boundaries are identified. (See Figure 7-3.) In operations with a requirement for only one grade of steam, the steam system is designed to meet the most stringent requirements of the most demanding product or process. With more than one purity grade of steam, products and processes are often categorized and fed by the most appropriate system. The number of types of steam generated is most often a function of the volume of steam consumed and variation of purity required.



81


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM PURITY DECISION TREE

Figure 7-2 Pharmaceutical Steam Purity Decision Tree


82



PROCESS AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

7.7.1

Utility Steam

Utility Steam is produced in conventional plant utility boilers whose typical design and construction are well known and will not be covered in this chapter. 7.7.2

Clean Steam (CS)

Clean Steam is produced in specially designed non-fired generators or from the first effect of multi-effect WFI stills, which do not use scale or corrosion inhibitor additives. The generator is fed with water pretreated for the purpose of removing elements that contribute to scaling or corrosion, and the materials of construction are resistant to corrosion by steam that has no corrosion inhibitors. The dedicated CS generator is very similar in design and construction to the first effect of a multi-effect still. For information on multi-effect (ME) stills, see Chapter 6.

7.7.2.1 CS obtained from a ME still When Clean Steam is obtained from the ME still, the first effect is usually fitted with two valves; one to isolate the remaining effects and the other to isolate the Clean Steam use points. Depending on the manufacturer, the still may or may not produce steam when the still is producing WFI. Advantages: •

Does not require a separate generator with the associated cost, space, installation, operation, and maintenance

Disadvantages: •

Output is limited to the capability of the first effect of the ME still

•

May not produce steam when the still is producing WFI. In an ME, the steam generated in the first effect becomes the motive (power) steam for the second effect, which in turn produces motive steam for the third effect, etc. Therefore, the impact of the diverted steam is multiplied by the number of effects, and WFI production is significantly reduced.

The still manufacturer should be consulted in advance, if simultaneous production of WFI and Clean Steam is desired.


7.7.2.2 CS Produced from a Sanitary Clean Steam Generator

CONFIGURATION OF A TYPICAL SANITARY CS GENERATOR

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, They can be of the vertical or the horizontal type, depending on the manufacturer and the overhead space available. ID number: 216389 There are various designs of CS generators. All are evaporators.

The disengagement space and the separator may be housed in the same vessel as the evaporator or in a separate vessel.



83

PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM Sanitary construction includes orbital Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG) welding (see section on fabrication of distribution systems) wherever possible or mechanical welding with the inner surface ground smooth after welding. All removable connections use In-Line “sanitary” fittings. Flanges and threaded connections are not considered “sanitary”. Heat Exchangers, using Utility Steam as the heat source, including the evaporator should be of the doubletubesheet, tubular design to prevent the contamination of the Clean Steam by the heating medium. Most CS generators, except those with very small output, are fitted with feed water heaters. In addition, a blow down cooler is used to avoid discharge of very hot and flashing water. A feed pump may be required if the feed water supply pressure is inadequate. Depending on system design and the manufacturer, a feed pressure of approximately 8-10 psig above the maximum expected Clean Steam pressure is required. This allows for pressure drop in piping and valves. A sample cooler fitted with conductivity meter and alarms is often used to monitor Clean Steam condensate purity. This is an optional feature whose use should be decided based on need. Conductivity of the condensate will provide information regarding the suitability and applicability of the distributed steam for its final use. PROCESS AND OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF A TYPICAL SANITARY CS GENERATOR: Clean Steam is normally generated in a shell-and-tube heat exchanger evaporator. Feed water is introduced on one side of the tubes, while the heating medium is introduced on the other side. Heating of the feed water to above the boiling temperature causes the water to evaporate, producing steam. The heating medium does not come in direct contact with the feed water or with the clean steam, and is normally utility steam. However, CS generators may be designed to utilize other heating mediums. The main differences in the designs are the evaporator and separator. a) Operation Clean Steam pressure is maintained by a feedback control loop, which modulates the supply steam control valve. The evaporator feed water is independently controlled using a level sensor and feed water pump. b) Steam Supply The utility steam supplied to the generator at typically 100 psig to 120 psig (7.0 to 8.5 Ks/cm2 gauge or 7.9 to 9.25 bars) must be at a higher pressure than the required clean steam pressure. In general, for a given size generator, the greater the differential between the utility steam pressure and the clean steam pressure the higher the clean steam production rate. Utility steam pressure should be at least 30-40 psig (2.25 Ks/cm2 or 2.0 bars) higher than the clean steam pressure, to optimize the production rate. Utility steam consumption will be approximately 10% to 20% greater than the quantity of clean steam produced.


c) Clean Steam Pressure


Clean Steam pressure is selected by the user. Typical units are designed for pharmaceutical applications at 40 - 60 psig (3.75 - 5.1 bars).


84


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM d) Separator Entrainment separators are normally designed to function over an optimum range of steam velocity. If the volume of steam increases substantially, carryover of endotoxins can occur. This condition can exist if the steam pressure differential significantly exceeds design conditions. Under these conditions, the velocity of the steam through the separator may be excessive. The manufacturer should be consulted regarding the output of the generator at the highest possible pressure difference. An alarm and equipment shutdown is recommended and can be incorporated into the controls to protect against such conditions. e) Feed Water Level The Feed water level is controlled to protect against flooding of the evaporator and carryover of endotoxins by a high level alarm and subsequent shutdown. Evaporator level condition does not affect clean steam purity, but is an indication of insufficient feed water or excessive blow down.



85


SIZING THE CLEAN STEAM SYSTEM

Figure 7-3 Sizing the Clean Steam System


86


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM 7.8.1.1 CS Produced from a Simple Clean Steam Generator There are applications where pyrogen free steam and sanitary construction features are not required, and at the same time, Utility Steam cannot be used. In such cases, it may be most economical to utilize a simple Clean Steam generator of the most economical design. Savings may be worthwhile when the elimination of the steam separator is combined with non-sanitary features such as: •

Non-Sanitary pipe and fittings

•

Non-sanitary instruments and valves

•

No polishing

•

Minimum controls

The elimination of the separator alone does not provide significant cost savings. It is important to remember that the separator’s function is more than removal of endotoxins. It removes entrainment, which includes all types of contaminants present in the feed water, except volatiles. Without an entrainment separator, impurities from the feed water may well be entrained in the steam and the moisture content of the steam as it leaves the generator, can be much higher than in the standard entrained generator. Thus the feed water purity becomes a critical factor in controlling the steam purity if entrainment is not incorporated in the design. Independent sanitary entrainment devices are available for installation at, or close to the point of use, and may be used with typical “Simple CS generators” as well as to control additional moisture build up due to heat losses in the distribution system of Sanitary CS Generators. 7.8.2

Steam Condensate Sampling

7.8.2.1 Purity Sampling When required by the process, the steam purity shall be monitored through acceptable sampling techniques. A slipstream of the steam may be passed through a sample condenser/cooler, fitted with a sampling valve. (See Section 7.2.1 for information on Steam Attributes.) To ensure that the steam does not contribute to drug product contamination, sampling should be included during commissioning, as a good engineering practice, and/or prior to each time the steam is used. If the sampling requirement is for endotoxin or pyrogen testing, the sample cooler, tubing and valve should be of sanitary construction.


Sample coolers can be fitted to the CS generator, or located in the distribution line, or at the use point (recommended location), or a combination thereof. It is common practice to fit sample coolers with conductivity monitors and alarms.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Steam “Quality” SamplingID number: 216389

Endotoxin removal: The condensate sample from a Clean Steam generator with separator is expected to show 3-4 log10 level reduction in pyrogens compared to the level in the feed water.

7.8.2.2

Steam “Quality” sampling may be employed to determine the level of saturation and non-condensable gasses. This can be determined by applying a steam calorimeter and measuring the dryness or saturation level. A steam calorimeter measures the percentage by weight of steam in a mixture of steam and entrained water.



87


Materials of Construction

7.8.3.1 Materials of Construction for Sanitary and Simple CS Generators Structural integrity and chemical compatibility with the contact fluid and its constituents are two of the more practical issues that drive construction material selection for CS systems. The inherent corrosion potential forces CS manufacturers to consider relatively inert metal including stainless steel or titanium etc. Sanitary piping and valves, considered unnecessary for utility and simple CS generators, are often standard features for CS systems based on the specific manufacturer and model. The materials chosen should not contribute to contamination of the drug product Typical materials of construction for Sanitary and Simple CS Generators are: Evaporator and separator: Shell, tubesheets, and internals:

300 series S.S

Evaporator tubes:

300 series or titanium, or other suitable alloy

Heat exchangers (FEED HEATER, BLOW DOWN & SAMPLE COOLER):

300 SERIES

Piping:

300 series for water and Clean Steam, and carbon steel for utility steam contact

Valves:

300 series and elastomers/diaphragms for water

Skid and structural:

Carbon steel

7.8.3.2 Materials of Construction for Utility Steam Generation Chemical compatibility with the Utility boiler generated steam and the carried over feed water chemicals are required for all materials used to condition the contaminated steam. Based on the particulate levels in the steam and the required steam purity, more than one filtration stage may be utilized. Distribution of Utility Steam following filtration follows similar practices as CS to control condensate build up, non-condensable gases and saturation levels as required for the application.


Acceptable materials must be relatively inert and may include SS or tin-coated copper.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Mechanical polishing (MP), electropolishing (EP), and passivation processes are implemented in some stainless CS systems. Chlorine and/or chlorides damage the generator regardless of the finish. IDwillnumber: 216389 7.8.4

Surface Finish

The operating temperatures of these systems are more than sufficient for inhibiting microbiological growth. Therefore, MP is advocated for final finishing of mechanical welds, with mill finishes and final passivation to optimize the formation of the corrosion resistant chromium oxide barrier. Electropolishing will also optimize the chromium oxide barrier, and should be considered if passivation is not an option.


88



Pretreatment for CS (Sanitary and Simple) Generators

The feed water pretreatment for a CS generator is born from three separate and distinct considerations: 1) Scale formation. 2) Corrosion. 3) Volatiles which carryover with the steam and may affect steam purity.

7.8.5.1 Scale Scale formation is a function of generator feed water chemistry, concentration (depends on blow down rate), and temperature. It is independent of design and make, and is outside the control of the generator manufacturer or the operator. Because scale inhibitors are not used, and because of the relatively high operating temperatures of the CS generator, the total dissolved solids (TDS) of the feed water should be very low. Silica is of particular concern. Most manufacturers stipulate a level of less than 1 ppm (parts per million); some go as high as 5 ppm. In addition to having low TDS (Total Dissolved Solids), the feed water should have no measurable hardness. It is therefore common to use DI or reverse osmosis as pretreatment to the CS generator. All CS generators will invariably experience some form of scale build-up and therefore must include routine visual inspections, plus cleaning of the generator during shutdown periods when appropriate. Using compendial water as feed is wasteful, unless the steam quantity is small and the cost and maintenance of a dedicated feed water pretreatment system exceeds the cost of using compendial water. Some manufacturers offer generators to operate on softened water. Usually, the rate of blow down is increased in order to maintain low concentration. Note: If the TDS of the soft water is relatively high, soft scale (such as sodium scale and sludge) can form.

7.8.5.2 Corrosion The most common cause of corrosion is free chlorine, not chlorides. Chlorine and chlorides, at any detectable level, are very detrimental to stainless steel. The higher the temperature and chlorine level, the more severe is the attack. Chlorine is known to migrate and concentrate in localized cells where the level can reach tens, or hundreds of ppm, while the concentration in the main stream is a fraction of a ppm.


Chlorine can be removed from the feed water by chemical injection of a reducing agent such as sodium bisulfate, or by passing the chlorinated water through carbon filters.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Dissolved gasses and substances that are volatile at the operating temperature of the CS generator will carryover with the steam. If such substances are objectionable or may potentially compromise product qualID number: 216389 7.8.5.3 Volatiles

ity, they must be removed at the pretreatment stage. Ammonia and CO2 (carbon dioxide) are examples of volatile gases that will have an effect on the conductivity, such that a condensate sample may not meet USP requirements for Purified or WFI Water.


For more details on pretreatment and the advantages and disadvantages of the different processes, refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this Guide.


89


Treatment of Utility steam

When utility steam is considered, it may be necessary to filter/condition the steam. In certain applications, it may also be necessary to change the steam boiler treatment and substitute additives that do not contain amines or hydrazine. Since the type and degree of conditioning are dependent on the application, as well as on the quality of the utility steam and additives present, this Guide cannot address all possible scenarios. Prior to the elimination of amines and hydrazines, by the substitution for standard boiler pretreatment additives, the Utility Steam boiler manufacturer should be consulted regarding the impact on equipment warranty, performance and expected life. Some of the substitute additives are not as effective as the standard.

7.9

COST IMPLICATIONS

Determining the economics of pharmaceutical steam production is complex. Costs are quite predictable, but vary greatly depending on scale of operation, system design, actual usage, etc. The total operating cost to produce pharmaceutical steams is obtained by adding the cost of feed water to the costs of pretreatment and final treatment (primary ion removal and polishing). The type of pharmaceutical steam system design option selected is typically based on feed water TDS, silica and hardness levels, organic and colloidal content, as well as anticipated steam system utility costs (acid, caustic, salt, power, and source water). Consideration should also be given to maintenance requirements and available resources.

7.10

STEAM “QUALITY”

Steam quality is defined as the saturation percentage of steam to water or more explicitly, the ratio of the vapor mass to the mass of the steam mixture. Dry Saturated Steam with minimum superheat is necessary for efficient steam sterilization. Water can be generated and carried by steam within distribution systems in two ways: 1) In suspension as moisture when the steam is not 100% saturated 2) As condensate separated from the steam Water vapor carried in suspension may be reduced by: adding more heat or raising the temperature, reducing the pressure, or adding a steam entrainment separator. Water moisture and condensate may be reduced by steam traps.


7.11

DISTRIBUTION

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Distribution systems for clean steam follow the same good engineering practices commonly used for utility Herzlia, steam, with the exception that contact materials must be inert to the aggressive nature of clean steam. Corrosion-resistant 304, 316, or 316L grade stainless steel “tubing” or solid-drawn “pipe” are commonly used. ID number: 216389 Surface finish is not critical due to the self-sanitizing nature of the clean steam. Mill finish or 180-grit mechanically polished pipe or tubing is sufficient. TIG Orbital welding and post-installation passivation is considered appropriate for this application. Piping must be designed to allow for thermal expansion and to drain condensate.


Note: Drains should have air breaks.

90


PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM Sanitary clamps or pipe flanges are most commonly used where the piping must be broken, but welded connections are used as much as possible to eliminate maintenance costs and potential for leaks. Threaded connections may be suitable for instrumentation if positioned to drain condensate and remain hot. Ball valves are commonly used for isolation because elastomeric diaphragms do not hold up well in this service. Where diaphragm valves are used, Teflon-encapsulated EPDM diaphragms give the best long-term performance. Steam quality sampling may be determined during “commissioning” and consistency ensured based on the proper location and subsequent maintenance of traps, entrainment separators, and vents. (The subject of maintenance cannot be over emphasized when these devises are involved due to the small orifices required in the separation of gas and liquid.) 7.11.1 Line Sizing The steam distribution header should be sized for a maximum velocity of 7,200 feet per minute (120 ft/sec or 37 m/sec) to limit erosion and extend the life expectancy of the piping. Condensate line sizing should follow good engineering practices for utility condensate. 7.11.2 Water Moisture Removal Water vapor forms in steam systems due to heat loss, causing a change in the liquid/vapor ratio or steam “quality”. Steam may be dried of moisture by reducing the generated pressure just prior to the point of use to coincide with the steam temperature of saturation at the reduced pressure. Moisture entrained in the steam can also be removed by installing an In-Line separator at the point of use, just prior to, or just after, the regulator. If the separator is located upstream of the regulator, the regulator should be protected from water damage (wire drawing) and impingement damage on the regulator diaphragms. In-line separators are available in sizes from 1/2" to 6" (approx. 1 cm to 15 cm) and remove moisture with a series of baffles on which the suspended water droplets impinge and fall out by gravity to the drain, which must be piped to a trap. Separators have a separation efficiency of better than 99% in the removal of all liquid and solid entrainment exceeding 10 microns. 7.11.3 Condensate Removal Condensate is the water that has separated from the liquid vapor mixture and forms in steam systems due to heat losses and natural separation effects. Lines should be designed to prevent the buildup of condensate to avoid dangerous water hammer and to eliminate potential cold spots where bacteria can grow. Any untrapped vertical length of pipe will quickly fill with condensate. If this condensate is allowed to stand for sufficient time, it can cool and become a breeding ground for bacteria. This bacteria could possibly be entrained back into the main distribution header and contaminate use points downstream. Worst case condensate removal locations should be sampled monthly for presence of bacteria. The following practices are commonly employed to minimize these concerns:


• •

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Each line is adequately supported to avoidHerzlia, sagging and subsequent condensate accumulation. Steam traps are installed at allID pointsnumber: where condensate can collect (e.g., at least every 100 feet (30 216389 meters) of line, upstream of control valves, at the bottom of vertical risers, etc.). Steam traps used for clean steam service should be sanitary design and self-draining.


•

If the main distribution header is above the use points, the branches to the users should be routed from the top of the header to avoid excessive condensate loads at the branch. Each branch should be trapped to avoid condensate buildup.


91

PHARMACEUTICAL STEAM •

An alternative is to run the main distribution header below the use points. Then the branches can drain back to the main distribution header, avoiding the need for additional traps.

•

The requirement to trap each branch can be waived for short drops from main headers to vessels or other equipment that are in frequent use where the sterilization and water hammer is not impacted by the collected condensate. An example is a drop from a main distribution header to a media storage tank, which is sterilized daily. The condensate built up in the vertical drop line has only a limited time to cool and is quickly eliminated by the trap at the bottom of the vessel when the block valve is opened. The vertical drop is sterilized daily with the vessel, so there is little chance for bacteria to grow.

7.11.4 Non-Condensable Gas Removal Air and other non-condensable gases should be minimized from pharmaceutical steam systems. Since air acts as an insulator, incomplete sterilization can occur in the process. Air in a system offers a very effective barrier to the heat transfer which will lead to a reduced temperature at the surface of a tube, system component or process equipment. Air can be discharged using steam traps, however excessive levels may slow down the discharge of condensate. The subcooled condensate can then lead to insufficient sterilization temperatures due to the excess water. The removal of air can be achieved by placing thermostatic pharmaceutical steam traps with the inlet in the upward position. These should be placed in positions where air is prone to collect such as the terminal points of the main and large branches of the steam header, high points in the tanks, reactors and sterilizers, etc. In the case of air and condensate discharge at the bottom of large vessels, the air and condensate should be separated by correct piping practices. 7.11.5 Superheat While higher-pressure steam can be used to compensate for superheat, the latent heat, or killing power of the potentially superheated steam is reduced at higher pressures; leading to increased sterilization cycles.


92



FOUR EXAMPLES OF CORRECT PIPING PRACTICE

Figure 7-4 Vessel Sterilization



93



STORAGE and DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS





STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8.

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

8.1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides an overview of eight common distribution configurations and a decision tree to help decide which system best suits the operating requirements. A comparison of tank versus tankless systems is addressed, as well as alternative materials of construction available, and ancillary equipment related to overall distribution systems. Common industry practices are listed as examples, to help clarify regulatory requirements.

8.2

SYSTEM DESIGN

8.2.1

General Considerations

A storage system is used to accommodate peak flow requirements against usage rates. The storage system must maintain the feed water quality to ensure the appropriate quality of the end use of product. Storage allows a smaller, less costly pretreatment system to meet peak demand. A smaller treatment system operates closer to the ideal of continuous, dynamic flow. Large manufacturing sites, or systems serving different buildings, may use storage tanks to separate one section of the loop, and others to minimize cross contamination. The main disadvantage of a storage tank is its capital cost, and the cost of associated pumps, vent filters, and instrumentation. However, this is usually less than the increased cost of pretreatment equipment sized to handle the peak use rate in the facility. Another disadvantage of storage is that it introduces a region of slow moving water, which can promote bacterial growth. 8.2.2

Capacity

Criteria affecting storage capacity include the user’s demand profile or the amount of use, duration, timing, and diversity, (in the case of more than one user), balance between the supply of pre- and final- treated waters, and whether the system is recirculating or non-recirculating. Careful consideration of these criteria will affect cost and water quality. The storage tank must provide reserve to minimize cycling of the treatment equipment and to reduce pump cavitation. It should provide sufficient reserve to enable routine maintenance and orderly system shutdown in the event of an emergency, which can vary from few to many hours, depending on the size and configuration of the system and maintenance procedures.


8.2.3

Storage Tank Location


It may not be cost-effective to locate storage tanks as close as possible to the point of use, within high-cost, GMP-finished areas. It may be more advantageous to locate them close to the generation equipment, for ease of maintenance. Utility areas are acceptable for this purpose, if access is provided (and the area is kept clean). 8.2.4

Types of Storage Tanks


Vertical storage tanks are common but horizontal tanks may be necessary if overhead space is limited. For recirculating systems, tank design should include an internal spray ball to ensure that all interior surfaces are wetted for microbial control. Jacketing is usually provided in hot systems, to maintain water temperature over


95

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS long periods without makeup, or to temper high influent temperatures, to preclude excessive rouging and pump cavitation. To avoid the absorption of carbon dioxide and its effect on conductivity, inert blanketing of the tank headspace should be considered. Storage tanks must be fitted with a sub-micron hydrophobic vent filter to reduce bio-burden and particles. The maximum size of a single storage vessel is often limited by the space available in the facility. It may be necessary to resort to multiple tanks to obtain the desired capacity. In this case, interconnecting piping must be carefully designed to assure adequate flow through all supply and return branches.

8.3

SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION DESIGN

8.3.1

General Considerations

Proper design of both the water storage and distribution systems is critical to the success of a pharmaceutical water system. The optimal design of any water storage and distribution system must accomplish three things: 1. Maintain the quality of the water within acceptable limits. 2. Deliver the water to the use points at the required flow rate and temperature. 3. Minimize capital and operating expenses. Although items 2 and 3 are well understood, item 1 is often misinterpreted. It is not necessary to protect the water from every form of degradation, only to maintain the quality within acceptable limits. For instance, water stored in the presence of air absorbs CO2, increasing the conductivity. This degradation can be avoided by blanketing the storage vessel with nitrogen. However, for many systems this would be a wasteful expenditure if the increased conductivity were still within the required specification. As technology has improved over the years, many design features such as storage at elevated temperature, constant circulation, use of sanitary connections, polished tubing, orbital welding, frequent sanitization, and the use of diaphragm valves have become common place. To incorporate all of these features into each new design typically leads to ever escalating costs with little if any reduction in risk of contamination. Although each of these items provides a level of security, it is a mistake to assume that all of them need to be in every system. Many systems operate successfully with one or more of these design features omitted. In such cases, the cumulative effect of the other design features is adequate to prevent degradation of the water. A more reasonable approach is to utilize design features that provide the greatest reduction in contamination risk at the most reasonable cost, and add the more expensive features in the design phase, only if they are required to maintain quality within acceptable limits. The systems should be designed to be robust, so features do not have to be added later, affecting cost and schedule. The idea of selecting design features based on “return” on investment where “return” is defined as reduction in contamination risk, can be very helpful in controlling system cost and in evaluating different alternatives. Ultimately, the effectiveness of each system design is determined by the quality of the water delivered to the users. The challenge for the design engineer is to know what features to include, to achieve the required degree of protection with the lowest lifecycle cost.


EXAMPLE



A USP compendial water system is designed with a 316L SS storage and distribution system and operates normally at 80°C. The tubing is all sanitary, orbital welded, with minimal clamps and zero dead leg diaphragm valves at the use points. Water is kept circulating through the tubing at a minimum return velocity of 3ft/sec. In this case, use of high mechanical polish tubing (<20 Ra) with electropolishing may not be required. The risk

96


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS of contamination for such a system is already low, and the impact of this upgraded surface finish is questionable. The benefits that will be achieved by further improving the quality of finish may not be justified. However, if the same system were open to the atmosphere, consideration would be given to installing a 0.2micron vent filter on the storage vessel, as the reduction in contamination risk is quite large for a relatively small investment. Similarly, if the zero dead leg valves were replaced with less expensive valves with larger dead legs, you might consider increasing the minimal circulation velocity to help compensate. The purpose of the following chapter sections is to provide information to help the user evaluate the advantages, disadvantages and cost effectiveness of many of the design features commonly used to protect water from degradation. A method of selecting/optimizing system storage and distribution design is also presented. As a general rule, a water system is optimized as a result of the following: 1) Minimizing the time the water is held at conditions which favor growth 2) Minimizing changes to water temperature 3) Contacting all areas during sanitization One system design can be said to be better than another, if it accomplishes these goals to the same degree, but at a reduced lifecycle cost. Examples of storage and distribution concepts commonly used today are presented in subsequent sections of this Guide, to help demonstrate the idea of optimal system design. 8.3.2

Distribution Design Concepts

The two basic concepts developed for distribution of pharmaceutical waters are referred to as the “batch” and “dynamic/continuous” distribution concepts. The batch concept utilizes at least two storage tanks. While one is being filled, the other is in service providing pharmaceutical waters to the various process users. After one tank has been filled from the water final treatment system, it is isolated and the water inside is tested. Only after testing is that tank put into service. The water is often drained after 24 hours, but can be validated for longer periods of time. At the completion of the draining operation, the vessel and distribution system is usually sanitized before refilling. The dynamic/continuous concept off-sets the peak instantaneous water demand, put on the overall water system through utilization of a single water storage vessel which simultaneously receives final pretreatment system make-up, stores the water in the vessel, and ultimately supplies it to the various process users while maintaining water quality. The advantage of the “batch” distribution concept, over the “dynamic/continuous” distribution concept, is that the water is tested before use with tank QA/QC lot release (water used in each product batch lot is traced and is identifiable). The advantages of the “dynamic/continuous” distribution concept include lower lifecycle costs, as well as less complex piping around the storage vessel, and a much more efficient operation.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, System configuration including ID whether series or parallel loops are required, distribution loop points of number: 216389

Once a system distribution concept has been selected, the following additional storage and distribution design considerations should be carefully evaluated: •

use, cooling requirements (steam-able, sub-loop or multiple branched heat exchanger assemblies), reheat requirements, if any, secondary loop tanks versus tankless system considerations, etc.


•

Hot (65-80°C), cold (4-10°C), or ambient temperature process use point requirements

•

Sanitization method (steam, hot water, ozone, or chemical)


97

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8.3.3

Distribution Decision Tree

The decision tree in Figure 8-1 is presented to aid in the analysis of distribution design. Most of the systems in use today are represented by one of these eight configurations, but other designs may also be acceptable. In evaluating which configuration is optimal for a given situation, the designer needs to consider many factors, including the requirements for Quality Assurance release, the desired specification of water (DI, USP WFI, etc.), hydraulic limitations, the required temperature at each drop, the number of use points, and the cost of energy. Decision tree guide 1) Batched System 2) Branched/One Way 3) Parallel Loops, Single Tank 4) Hot Storage, Hot Distribution 5) Ambient Storage, Ambient Distribution 6) Hot Storage, Cool and Reheat 7) Hot Tank, Self-contained Distribution 8) Point of Use Heat Exchanger Each configuration varies in the degree of microbial control provided and in the amount of energy required. Better microbial control is usually achieved by minimizing the amount of time water is exposed to conditions favoring microbial growth. Configurations that store water at sanitizing conditions such as hot, under ozone, or circulation at turbulent velocities, are expected to provide better microbial control than those that do not. Naturally, hot circulating systems are more forgiving than cold systems from a microbiological perspective. However, adequate microbial control may be achieved in other configurations provided they are frequently flushed or sanitized. In any case, system design should prevent stagnation, which promotes formation of biofilm. Energy usage is minimized by limiting the amount of water changing temperature. Configurations storing water hot but supplying it to the use points at lower temperature must cool the water before use. Energy requirements are minimized by cooling only that water drawn from the system. Configurations that constantly cool and reheat water utilize more energy than systems that do not.


The configurations delivering lower temperature water are shown with a single cooling exchanger for clarity. Usually the cooling medium is tower water since this is the least expensive to generate. In most parts of the world, tower water is not cold enough to allow use temperatures much below 25°C. A second cooling exchanger using chilled water or glycol must be added if the required use temperature is below 25°C. It is usually cost prohibitive to cool water from 80°C to less than 25°C using chilled water or glycol alone as the chiller size becomes quite large.



98


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-1 Distribution Decision Tree

This Document is licensed to Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389 8.3.4

Example System Descriptions


The following describes the systems, contained in the accompanying decision tree, that can be used successfully to store and distribute high purity water. Figure 8-2 through Figure 8-12 present simplified schematic diagrams (not meant to be P&IDs) of each configuration.


99

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-2 Batched Tank Recirculating System This system is used where QA release is required on the water before it goes into the process. One batch tank supplies water to the process, while the other is filled and tested for QA release (traditionally due to unreliable means of water production). This is a cumbersome system to operate and is usually limited to smaller systems. The disadvantages are the high capital and operating costs. In-line conductivity and TOC measurements can provide nearly the same degree of assurance for less money. Figure 8-2 Batched Tank Recirculating System


100


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-3 Branched/One Way with Limited Points of Use This configuration is sometimes used where capital is tight, the system is small, and microbiological quality is of lesser concern. It is also useful where frequent flushing or sanitization of the piping is possible. It is a good application where water use is continuous. It is less advantageous where water use is sporadic, as the line stays stagnant when not in use. Microbial control is more difficult to maintain. A program must be set up to flush (e.g., daily) and sanitize the loop to maintain microbial contamination within acceptable limits. More frequent sanitization may be required, increasing operating costs. It is also more difficult to use On-Line monitoring, as indicative of the quality of the water throughout the system, in a non-recirculating system. Figure 8-3 Branched/One Way with Limited Points of Use



101

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-4 Parallel Loops, Single Tank This configuration is a combination of any of the loop distribution schemes off one storage tank. Figure 8-4 shows a hot storage tank with two separate loops; a hot distribution and a cool and reheat loop. Parallel loops are very common and are most advantageous where multiple temperatures are required, or where the area served is so large that a single loop becomes cost prohibitive or hydraulically impractical. The major concern is to balance the various loops to maintain proper pressure and flow. This is accomplished either by using pressure control valves, or by providing a separate pump for each loop. (Note: A different design is intentionally presented for each loop). Figure 8-4 Parallel Loops, Single Tank


102


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-5 Hot Storage, Hot Distribution This is the configuration of choice when all use points require hot (greater than 65°C) water. Temperature is maintained in the storage tank by steam supplied to the tank jacket or alternatively by a heat exchanger on the circulating loop. Water is generally returned to the top of the tank through a spray ball to ensure that the entire top surface is wetted. This system provides excellent microbial control and is simple to operate. In addition, tank and loop sanitization is required less frequently, or not at all, if a temperature of 80°C is maintained. This type of system is universally accepted by regulatory agencies. Areas of concern include protecting workers from scalding, cavitation in the circulation pump, moisture condensation on the vent filter, and the formation of rouge. Scalding is minimized by operating at lower temperature (65°C) or by proper training and personal protective gear. Cavitation is avoided by accounting for the high vapor pressure of hot water in the net positive suction head (NPSH) calculations. Condensation is prevented by positioning the hydrophobic vent filter for good drainage and by heating the filter with either a low pressure steam jacket or electric tracing. Avoid overheating as this can melt the filter cartridge. Rouge formation is controlled by passivation and by operating at a lower temperature. It can be eliminated by using non-metallic or lined components. Figure 8-5 Hot Storage, Hot Distribution



103

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7 Ambient Storage, Ambient Distribution This system is most advantageous when the water is generated at ambient temperature, will be used only at ambient temperature, and there is adequate time for sanitization. Since the water is stored at ambient temperature with no disinfectant, microbial control is not as good as in hot storage system configurations. However, good microbial control is possible provided sanitization is conducted on a frequent basis. Frequent sanitization is usually accomplished by allowing the water level in the storage tank to drop through use, then heating the remaining contents, and circulating through the loop for a set amount of time. Reducing the water level limits the energy and time required to sanitize. Heat is provided by steam supplied to the tank jacket, or alternatively, by a heat exchanger on the circulating loop. Cooling may be required to prevent temperature increases due to heat buildup from the pump, and for cool down after sanitization. Water consumption is low if the level in the storage tank is allowed to drop through use prior to sanitization and moderate if it is drained. The capital and operating costs of this system are minimal. Another advantage is that it can provide high flow rates of ambient pharmaceutical water, without need for complex points of use heat exchangers. Its major disadvantage is the time required to sanitize, which is longer than the previously described systems, due to the need to heat and cool the contents of the storage tank. Figure 8-6 Ambient Storage and Ambient Distribution


104


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Many pharmaceutical water users have found that storing and distributing water at ambient temperatures with periodic sanitization, (utilizing either clean steam or heating to 80°C for microbial control) to be safe and cost effective. The ambient system can also be effectively operated with an ozonated storage and a periodically ozonated loop, in lieu of hot water sanitization (see Figure 8-7). Levels of 0.02ppm to 0.2ppm of ozone protect the water from microbial recontamination. Ozone needs to be completely removed from process water prior to usage, using UV radiation. Consideration therefore must be given to verifying/assuring that ozone has been eliminated, such as the use of In-Line monitors. One advantage of ozonation or chemical sanitization, is that these methods allow the use of plastics as a material of construction (popular in Europe for purified water systems). Figure 8-7 Ozonated Storage and Distribution



105

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-8 Hot Storage, Cool and Reheat This system is most advantageous when the water is generated hot, tight microbial control is required, and there is little time for sanitization. It provides excellent microbial control and is easily sanitized. It requires less capital than point of use exchangers, if there are multiple low temperature use points. Hot water from the storage tank is cooled through the first heat exchanger, circulated to the use points, and then reheated in a second exchanger before returning to the storage tank. Sanitation of the loop is accomplished by turning off the cooling medium on a periodic basis. Water consumption is minimized since no flushing is required. The major disadvantage of this configuration is it’s high energy consumption, since it cools and reheats the circulating water regardless of whether it is drawn out of the loop. Figure 8-8 Hot Storage, Cool and Reheat


106


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-9 Hot Storage, Self-Contained Distribution This configuration is most advantageous when water is generated hot, there are many low temperature water users, and energy consumption is critical. It provides the benefits of the cool and reheat loop without the large energy requirement. Hot water from the storage tank is cooled through the heat exchanger, circulated to the use points, and then returned to the pump suction bypassing the storage tank. The loop is sanitized on a periodic basis by turning off the cooling medium and opening up the return to the storage tank, allowing hot water to flow through the loop. An alternative is to flush the lower temperature water to drain until the loop becomes hot and then return the flow to the storage tank. The water in the storage tank is kept hot through a steam jacket or heat exchanger on an external pump around loop. When water is drawn out of a point of use valve, hot water from the storage tank flows into the loop and is cooled by the heat exchanger. The hot water flushes the short section of line between the storage tank and the circulation pump preventing a deadleg. In most pharmaceutical installations, this happens many times per day so the line stays relatively hot. If the usage rate is low, a small amount of water can be returned to the storage tank on a continuous or timed basis, keeping this line flushed. A third alternative is to return the circulating water to just downstream of the storage tank outlet valve, so the deadleg is negligible. Figure 8-9 Hot Storage, Self-Contained Distribution



107

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-10, Figure 8-11, and Figure 8-12 Hot Storage, Hot Distribution, Point of Use Heat Exchanger This configuration is identical to Figure 8-5 except that use points requiring water at lower temperature are equipped with point of use heat exchangers. Figure 8-10, Figure 8-11, and Figure 8-12 show three different designs for these exchangers. All three allow flushing water to drain to lower microbial counts and adjusting temperature before opening up the point of use valve. All three also allow for sanitizing the exchanger and downstream piping when water is not called for at the drop. The schemes differ in capital cost, sanitation method, and in the amount of water used for flushing. Sanitization is accomplished using low pyrogen steam in Figure 8-10. In Figure 8-11 sanitization is accomplished by circulating hot water from the loop, through the point of use exchanger, back to the main loop. The operation in Figure 8-11 can be facilitated by installing a block valve at the return of the main loop. The valve would be closed immediately prior to starting the sub loop, to prevent back flow from the main loop. The initial draw of point of use water would be diverted to drain. Figure 8-12 is sanitized by flushing hot water from the main loop once through to drain. Tube-in-tube or serpentine type coolers could be used, as well as double tube sheet exchangers, which are depicted. Point of use exchangers are most advantageous when there are both hot and lower temperature water use points off the same loop, and the number of low temperature users is small. Since they maintain the water hot until it is drawn from the loop, they provide excellent microbial control, provided they are frequently flushed or sanitized when not in use. As the number of low temperature users increases, the capital costs and space requirements become prohibitive, and one of the other configurations should be considered. Water consumption is high due to flushing, although this is minimized by the scheme shown in Figure 8-11. Energy consumption is moderate because only water drawn out of the loop is cooled but additional energy must be spent to make up water flushed to drain. Maintenance requirements are high due to the added exchangers and valves. Complexity is high as each exchanger must be properly flushed and sanitized. Each drop is limited in capacity by the sizing of the exchanger. The scheme shown in Figure 8-11 results in added pressure drop in the main loop, which leads to a larger circulation pump.


108


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Figure 8-10

Single Point of Use, Steamed



109


Point of Use Installed in Sub-loop


110



8.3.5

Point of Use Heat Exchanger with Multiple Branch Users

Storage and Distribution Comparison Table

Table 8-1 compares several storage and distribution options currently used in the pharmaceutical industry. Comparisons are made based upon capital, energy, operating costs, maintenance, validatability, and other factors. Each category is rated low (L), medium (M), or high (H) for each system relative to the other systems presented. The particular storage and distribution choice for a given scenario will depend upon the specific situation being addressed, and the priority the end user gives to each of the categories, with quality being the foremost priority.



111

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Table 8-1

Comparison of Storage and Distribution Options

Category

1. Batched 2. Branched / System One Way

4. Hot 5. Ambient 3. Parallel Storage, Hot Storage, Loops, Ambient Single Tank Distribution Distribution

6. Hot Storage, Cool and Reheat

7. Hot Tank, Selfcontained Distribution

8. Point of Use Heat Exchanger

9. Tankless, Ambient Loop

Capital Cost

H

L

M

L

L-M

M

M

H

L

Water Consumption

H

H

M

L

L-M

L

M

H

M

Energy Consumption

L

L

Depends on loops

L

L

H

M

M

L

Validatability

Simple

Complex

Complex

Simple

Average

Simple

Average

Average

Average

Complex

Complex

Depends on loops

Simple

Average

Average

Average

AverageComplex

Average

Maintenance Requirements

M

L

Depends on loops

M

L

M

M

H

M

Tank Turnover

Non-Critical

Limited

Average for Non-Critical ambient tank, non-critical for hot tank

Average

Average

Limited

Non-Critical

Not Applicable

Line Flushing Requirements

Critical

Critical

Depends on loops

Non-Critical

Average

Non-Critical

Average

Critical

Average

Limited by QA hold

Excellent

Average to Excellent

Excellent

Excellent (Cold Surge Volume)

Average

AverageExcellent

Limited by exchanger sizing

Average

Loop Balancing and Control Requirements

Average

Simple

Critical

Simple

Average

Average

Average

Critical

Average

Microbial/ Endotoxin Growth Potential

L-M

H (3)

Hot = L Amb = M

L

M (1)

L - M (2)

L - M (2)

M

Hot = L Amb = M

Operability

Ability to Respond to Large Peak Demands

Most Advantageous When:

High Peak Multiple Hot Water is High Peak Method of Both hot Tight Tight Demands for and warm Temperatures Required, Demands for Generation is Capital, Microbial Ambient to temperature Water is Not Reliable, Continuous Required or Ambient or Control, Hydraulic Generated QA release water Cold Water, Limited Time Cold Water Use, and Unit Limitation Hot, or required required and Water is Frequent for Energy Microbial before water Flushing or number Generated at Sanitization, Costs a Control is use. Small Sanitization. of low Ambient Energy cost concern, Critical system is temperature Temp not a many low required. users is low concern, temperature many low users temperature users

Space Constraints or Tank Turnover a concern, Limited Capital


Least Advantageous When:

Legend:


Hydraulic Per Unit Initial Capital Sanitization Capital and Space, Initial Sporadic High Per Unit or Energy will not fit into Energy Cost Energy Cost operating Demand Use balancing is Capital or demands for difficult is High, or Availability is cost is a operating Energy Profile, or Ambient or is High tank turnover Availability is Cold Water Tight concern schedule operating cost is a concern Tight a concern

L = Low

M = Medium

H = High

Amb = Cold or Ambient Conditions


Notes: 1) Lower with hot water sanitization once every 24 hours. 2) Storage tank is always hot, loop is cold or ambient, and hot water sanitized once every 24 hours. Loop return is heated prior to reentering storage tank. 3) Frequent hot water flushing or steaming can effectively control bioburden. High turnover of the water in each branch due to use (at least once daily) can significantly reduce bioburden.

112


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8.4

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

Pharmaceutical equipment and piping systems rely extensively on stainless steels to provide the non-reactive, corrosion-resistant construction needed in manufacturing and heat sterilization. However, thermoplastics are available that may offer improved qualities, or lower cost. Less expensive plastics such as polypropylene (PP) and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) may be acceptable for non-compendial systems. Others, such as polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) offering greater heat resistance, may be suitable for compendial waters, although they require continuous support in hot applications. The cost of a PVDF system may be approximately 10-15 percent lower than the cost of a stainless steel system once factors such as passivation, boroscope, radiographic inspection, etc., are included. New methods of joining PVDF tubing leave a weld much smoother than possible with stainless steel. At higher temperatures, however, thermal expansion of the plastic becomes a major concern. While certain changes to higher grade materials (higher alloys such as AL6N and Hastelloy) and methods of fabrication to assure compliance can yield minor improvements, others may only provide minor gain despite considerable additional expense. Material selection should be consistent (all 316L or all 304L etc.) throughout the distribution, storage, and processing systems, if regular passivation is planned. For compendial water, the use of 316L stainless steel is preferred. Insulation for stainless piping should be free of chlorides, and hangers provided with isolators to preclude galvanic corrosion. 304L and 316L stainless steel has been the industry preference in tanks for the storage of compendial waters. Jacket material in contact with the shell should be compatible, to avoid chromium depletion in the weld-affected zones. Non-compendial water storage may not require the same level of corrosion resistance or the use of low carbon nickel chromium alloys and special finishes, depending on the owner’s water specifications. High purity water distribution systems, using the material and finishes specified by the design, should be joined using acceptable welding or other sanitary techniques. The distribution and storage systems should be installed in accordance with cGMPs and fabricated, manufactured, procured, and installed in strict accordance with explicit operating procedures. Orbital welding has become the preferred method for joining high purity metallic water piping systems, due to the greater control over critical weld parameters and the smooth weld bead characteristics of the process. However, hand welding is still employed and may be required in certain situations.


304 and 316 stainless steel have been preferred grades for use in metallic piping systems due to their high chromium and nickel content and ease of automatic welding. Low carbon and low sulfur grades of stainless steel are preferred for compendial systems, and control and inspection of the welding process is necessary to limit corrosion and crevices in the system. A maximum sulfur content of 0.04% would be ideal for welding but any mismatch in the sulfur content of the mating parts will easily cause the weld to weaken, outweighing the advantages lower sulfur levels.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Where possible, all fittings, valves, tubing, and weldable pieces of the same nominal size (diameter) should ID number: 216389 be purchased and manufactured from steel with the same specification and Heat Number in order to standardize the weld quality for each tubing size.



113


Comparison of Materials of Construction for Tanks and Distribution Systems

Table 8-2

Comparison of the relative values of key factors in the design and installation of water systems PVDF

ABS

POLYPRO

PVC

316LSS TUBING

304LSS TUBING

316LSS PIPING

304LSS PIPING

Installed Cost

M

M

L

L

M

M

M

M

Ease of Installation (1)

H

M

M

H

M

M

H

H

Steam Sanitizable

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Hot Water Sanitizable

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Ozone Sanitizable

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Chemical Sanitizable

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Rouging Susceptibility

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Corrosion Resistance

H

H

H

H

H

M

H

M

Availability

M

L

M

H

H

M

H

H

Extractables

L

M

L

H

L

L

L

L

Degree of Thermal EXPANSION

H

H

H

N/A

L

L

L

L

Joining Method -TRICLAMP -Solvent -THERMAL FUSION -WELD

Y N Y N

N Y N N

Y N Y N

N Y N N

Y N N Y

Y N N Y

Y N N Y

Y N N Y

External Support

H

H

H

M

L

L

L

L

Legend:

Y = Yes

N = No

H = High

M = Medium

L = Low

Notes: 1) Based on skilled labor requirements, ease of welding, ease of visual inspection, shop fabrication requirements, etc. 2) The steam pressure and steam temperature control is critical to keep both below the manufacturer’s ratings.

8.4.2

Workmanship

Fabrication should be performed by certified welders in a controlled environment to preclude contamination of equipment and material surfaces. Facilities dedicated to the fabrication of stainless steel (or higher grade alloys) are preferred, to avoid contamination by carbon steel. Fabrication must follow an approved quality assurance plan. There needs to be adequate documentation in the design and construction of the system, including up to date P&IDs, system isometrics, weld test reports, etc.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Tubing and piping welds, whether orbital or manual, must have a smooth internal diameter contour without Herzlia, excessive concavity or convexity, bead wandering, misalignment, porosity, or discoloration. One hundred percent photographic or radiographic analysis, while utilized to an increasing extent, is neither cost effective ID number: 216389 nor infallible. Appropriate sampling is strongly recommended.


114



SYSTEM COMPONENTS

8.5.1

Heat Exchangers

Shell and tube, tube-in-tube, and plate and frame heat exchangers are employed. Although plate and frame units may offer a cost advantage, they are used less often in the distribution portion of the system in compendial service because of the perceived greater risk of contamination. However, they are common in the pretreatment side prior to final purification. In a shell and tube exchanger treated water flows through the tube bundle; the risk of contamination from cooling or heating media can be significantly reduced by means of a double tube sheet. Complete drainability of the u-tube bundle is achieved by weep holes located at the low point of each chamber in the exchanger channel. Ensuring a positive pressure differential on the “clean” side can further reduce contamination risk. Similarly, a plate and frame unit should be operated with the cleaner water side at higher pressure than the heating or cooling medium. Conductivity meters may be used for monitoring leakage. Unit design should permit full drainage and ready access for inspection and cleaning. 8.5.2

Vent Filters

Used on storage tanks in compendial water service to reduce contamination during drawdown. Units are constructed of hydrophobic PTFE or PVDF to prevent wetting and generally rated at 0.1 to 0.2 microns. Filters should be capable of withstanding sterilization temperatures and sized for maximum fill or drawdown rates to effectively relieve the negative pressure created by high temperature sanitization cycles. Filters in hot systems are usually jacketed to minimize condensate formation that could result in blinding vessel exhaust hydrophobic filters. Storage tanks should be rated for full vacuum, (or have vacuum protection), if steam is used for sterilization. Installation should also allow for drainage of condensate caused by high operating or sanitizing temperatures, and ease of replacement. The filter cartridges need to be appropriate for the filter housing. Vent filters should be integrity tested for compendial water storage tanks, but may not need to be validated as sterile filters. 8.5.3

Pumps and Mechanical Seals

Centrifugal pumps are commonly employed in distribution systems. Performance curves and suction head requirements should be reviewed to preclude cavitation, which might lead to particulate contamination. The generation of pump heat over extended periods of low or no draw off should also be considered, since significant temperature rise in cold systems, or cavitation due to vapor pressure in hot systems could occur. Casing drains allow for full system drainage, where the pumps are at the low point of the distribution. Although with double mechanical seals, with WFI or other compatible seal, water flushing may minimize the possibility of contamination; single mechanical seals flushed to the outside have also been used. In extremely critical applications, polished rotating elements may be warranted. The installation of dual pumps, for standby purposes, should ensure flow throughout the system. 8.5.4


Piping System Components

a) Piping and Tubing: Extruded seamless and/or longitudinally welded tubing is commonly used in systems two inches in diameter and smaller. Recently, welded steel tubing (ASTM A-270), similar to seamless in appearance, has become available at significantly lower cost. PVDF has also been shown to be a viable alternative. b)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Fittings: Single fittings may beID manufactured from as 216389 few as one, to as many as five pieces. This can number: materially affect the suitability of the end product, in terms of weld content, documentation, and cost.


c) Valves: The trend in the industry has been to use diaphragm valves in high purity systems, particularly in isolation applications. For steam service, sanitary ball valves may be acceptable and require less maintenance.


115

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS The following is a summary of water system components, listing the common industry practice, and listing advantages and disadvantages: 8.5.5

System Components Comparison Table

Table 8-3

System Components Comparison

Item

Industry Practice

Advantages

Disadvantages

Valves

Diaphragm

Drainable* Sanitizable Cleanable No steam seal No body pockets

Higher initial cost and maintenance Wears out quicker Not absolute shutoff for high pressure systems

Plug/Ball

Low cost Tight shutoff Low maintenance

Need stem seal Have body pockets where bacteria may linger, making sanitization difficult

Butterfly

Low cost Tight shutoff Low maintenance

Need stem seal Have body pockets

Elastomers, including Viton

Temperature resistant Less expensive

Chemical resistant

Silicone


Chemical resistant

EPDM


Steaming not recommend

Teflon

Best temperature resistance Inert

Cold flow in service More expensive

Teflon encapsulated

Good temperature resistance Good chemical resistance

Expensive Sensitive to pinching

Vent Filters

0.2 Micron Hydrophobic Membrane Steam jacketed or electric traced housing

Bioburden and particulate reduction

Possible plugging due to wetting Cost

Heat Exchangers

Double tube sheet (Shell and tube)

Sanitary design Protection against plant to clean side leaks

More expensive

Single tube sheet (Shell and tube)

Less expensive than double tube sheet

Need to maintain a higher Delta P on clean side is operationally difficult

Gaskets

This Document is licensed to Concentric pipe

Pumps

Low leak potential


Low heat transfer coefficient, requiring a large surface area

Plate and Frame

Least Expensive

Greatest leak potential Needs double gasketing

Centrifugal

Commonly available

Less expensive Lower maintenance

Positive Displacement

Commonly available More efficient when higher discharge pressure is required

More expensive Higher Maintenance

Double

Constantly being flushed Higher on-stream reliability

More expensive, both installation and operation

Single

Less expensive

For non-shrouded impeller type, cleanability an issue

Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM Mechanical Seals

116


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Table 8-3

System Components Comparison

Item

Industry Practice

Advantages

Disadvantages

Connection Types

Sanitary clamped

Minimal crevicing Ease of inspection Ease of Disassembly

Pressure limitations Size limitations

Flanged

Easier in piped systems Good in high pressure applications Recommended for >4” OD

High cost Gasket protrusion Greater chance for crevicing

Jacketed (1/2 pipe)

Good thermal efficiency

Significant welding required

Jacketed (full jacket)

Less welding leading to lower probability of weld failure

Less thermal efficient

Non-Jacketed

Allows for complete external inspection of the tank

Requires an external heat exchanger

Tanks

Safety relief device prevents tank rupture should vent filter become blocked Tank to be designed as an atmospheric tank rather than a pressure vessel

Rupture Discs

*If canted at the correct angle, and installed in pitched lines

8.6

COMPARISON OF WFI SYSTEMS WITH STORAGE TANK AND WITHOUT STORAGE TANK

Figure 8-13

Tankless Ambient Distribution



117

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS It is possible to feed sub-loops off a single main loop without the use of an intermediate storage tank (Figure 8-13). This configuration is most advantageous when space or capital constraints are tight. The sub-loop is generally a circulating loop. Water drawn out of the main loop when a point of use valve is opened cannot return to the main since the sub-loop is at a lower pressure. This provides a degree of isolation between the sub-loop and the main, or other, sub-loops. The major disadvantage is that there is no storage capacity. Usually this capacity is provided by a storage tank on the main loop. Table 8-4

Comparison of WFI Systems: with Storage Tank and without Storage Tank

STORAGE TANK SYSTEM Advantages

Disadvantages

Provides air break to minimize back contamination of hot WFI supply.

Added capital expense of tank, filter, etc.

Minimize WFI cooler capacity by averaging hot WFI feed flow into tank.

Sanitization/steamout may be more involved than for a tankless system.

Provide cooled WFI “surge” volume ready on demand to facilitate production schedules.

If the system is drained daily, potential loss of WFI may be greater than tankless loop.

Positive point to relieve system pressure due to normal venting or hot water sanitization. Once operational, conditions easier to maintain than tankless system. Potential problems easier to isolate. Eliminate back pressure control valve cavitation by dividing pressure drop between valve and spray balls. TANKLESS SYSTEM Advantages

Disadvantages

Decreased capital expense (no tank, filter, etc.)

WFI tank may be required to satisfy peak demands of ambient system.


Increased perception of improved system sterility due to “totally welded tubing”

Thermal expansion of WFI during hot water sanitization has nowhere to relieve, except flush to drain.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein More difficult to isolate than storage tank system. Herzlia, ID number: 216389 System hydraulics more difficult to manage/control

If system is drained daily, potential WFI lost may be less than storage tank system.

than storage tank system.


118



MICROBIAL CONTROL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

In any given water storage and distribution system, there are certain fundamental conditions that can always be expected to aggravate a microbial problem. Likewise, several basic measures will always tend to counteract such problems. Fundamental conditions that typically could aggravate the problem include: •

Stagnant conditions and areas of low flow rates

•

Temperatures that promote microbial growth (15-55°C)

•

Poor quality supply water

Some basic measures that have been shown to alleviate such problems are: •

Maintaining ozone levels of 0.02ppm to 0.2ppm

•

Continuous, turbulent flow

•

Elevated temperatures

•

Proper slope

•

Smooth, clean surfaces that minimize nutrient accumulation

•

Frequent draining, flushing, or sanitizing

•

Air breaks in drain piping

•

Ensuring no leaks in the system

•

Maintaining positive system pressure

All pharmaceutical water must meet the EPA standard for microbiological quality of potable water; which means it must basically be free of specific indicator organisms. Beyond that, microbiological quality for noncompendial water should be based upon its intended use and the types of products that will be formulated with it. It is important to note though that although the required microbial population acceptance level for USP compendial purified water is 100 CFU/ml, reliance on such a single parameter can be misleading. The 100 CFU/ml limit may generally be applied to the manufacture of solid oral dosage forms. Many times, however, aqueous or topical formulations require tighter controls to maintain product quality. The USP points out that these types of products have been the subject of recalls when found to be contaminated with gram negative organisms, and the typical microbiological flora of water are gram negative organisms.


A common appropriate approach to dealing with this key issue involves the use of trend analysis. Using such an approach, alert and action levels are related to the system norm. In this context, strategies for responding to the alert and action levels can, and should, be developed. Even with the most conscientious design, there may be places in which biofilm can form. Good Engineering Practices, such as eliminating deadlegs, ensuring adequate flow velocities through out the system, and periodic sanitization help control microbial activity.



119

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS It is common practice, therefore, to store and distribute water in a circulating system under any of the following scenarios: •

At conditions which are self-sanitizing such as above 65°C or under ozone.

•

At conditions that limit microbial growth such as below 10°C with periodic sanitization.

•

At ambient temperatures where sanitization is determined by the validated methods that control microbial growth

8.7.1

Regulatory Clarification to Common Industry Practices

The following are industry practices that are all Good Engineering Practices (GEPs), and have been perceived in the past to reduce the chance of microbial growth. If you collectively ignore all of these items, you increase the likelihood of having a bioburden problem. These items include finishes, storage tank orientation, storage tank isolation, storage tank turnover, piping slope and drainability, deadlegs and velocity.

8.7.1.1 Finishes Common industry practices typically range from milled pipe to 320 grit (0.38 microns Ra) mechanical polish with electropolish. Electropolishing is a reverse plating process, which improves the surface finish of mechanically polished stainless steel piping and equipment. It reduces surface area and removes surface intrusions caused by mechanical polishing, which may cause subsequent rouging, and/or discoloration. After mechanically polishing or electropolishing the system, the polishing compounds should be confirmed to have been completely removed from the pipe, so as not to accelerate corrosion. The benefits for electropolish or finishes smoother than 0.76 microns Ra (approx. 180 grit or 30 micro inch) are questionable. Systems operating at ambient temperature or with infrequent sanitization may require a smoother surface finish. The interior surfaces of stainless piping systems, in compendial water service, are typically ground and/or electropolished, at considerable cost, to achieve a smooth surface of minimal porosity (0.4 to 1.0 microns Ra), in order to reduce bacterial adhesion and enhance cleanability. A viable alternative is extruded PVDF piping, which can produce a smoother surface than most metallic systems, without recourse to polishing, although PVDF has other disadvantages. (See Section 8.4.)

8.7.1.2 Storage Tank Orientation


Vertical orientation is the most common because of the following advantages:

120

•

Lower fabrication cost

•

Less dead volume

•

Simpler spray ball design

•

Less floor space required

•

Horizontal vessels are used where height is a constraint




STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8.7.1.3 Storage Tank Isolation Common practice for compendial and non-compendial waters where microbial contamination is a concern is to use a 0.2 micron hydrophobic vent filter. For hot storage vessels, the vent filter must be heated to minimize moisture condensation. An alternate practice is to blanket the tank with 0.2 micron filtered air or nitrogen. Nitrogen blanketing can be used if CO2 absorption is a concern, or if final product oxidation is a problem.

8.7.1.4 Storage Tank Turnover Common practice is 1-5 tank turnovers per hour. The turnover rate may be important for systems using external sanitization or polishing equipment. The turnover rate is less important when storage is under sanitizing conditions, including hot storage or ozone. It may be less important under conditions that limit microbial growth, such as cold storage (4-10°C), but this must be demonstrated by documentation. Some storage tank turnover is required to avoid dead areas.

8.7.1.5 System Drainability Systems that will be steam sterilized must be fully drainable to assure complete condensate removal. Systems that will never be steam sterilized do not need to be fully drainable, as long as water is not allowed to stagnate in the system. It is good engineering practice to allow for the draining of equipment and associated piping.

8.7.1.6 Deadlegs Good engineering practice is to minimize or eliminate deadlegs where possible. Common practice is to limit deadlegs to less than 6 branch pipe diameters or less. This stems from the “6D” rule contained in the proposed CFR 212 regulations of 1976. Recently, industry experts have suggested using a guideline of 3D or less. However, this new guideline causes confusion since the proponents of this standard generally are discussing the length of dead leg from the outer wall of the pipe, while the original 6D rule describes the distance from the center line of the pipe to the end of the deadleg. Obviously, if a 1/2” branch is placed on a 3” main, the distance from the center line of the pipe to the outer wall of the pipe is already 3D. Thus, even a zero deadleg valve might not meet the 3D requirement.


To avoid confusion in the future this Guide suggests that the length of the deadleg be considered from the outer wall of the pipe. We propose avoiding a hard rule of thumb for maximum allowable deadlegs.


Ultimately, the water must meet the required quality regardless of the length of the deadleg. Good Engineering Practice requires minimizing the length of deadlegs and there are many good instrument and valve designs available to do so. It should be recognize that any one-way system can constitute a deadleg if it is not frequently flushed or sanitized.



121

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8.7.1.7 Positive Pressure It is important to maintain the system under positive pressure at all times. One common concern is systems designed with insufficient return flow, which could draw a vacuum at points of use under periods of high water usage. This causes an unexpected microbial challenge to the system.

8.7.1.8 Loop Velocity Common practice is to design circulating loops for a minimum return velocity of 3 feet/second or higher, and for Reynolds numbers in the turbulent region of greater than 2,100. Return velocities less than 3 feet/second are acceptable for short periods of time, or in systems that do not favor microbial growth, such as hot, chilled, or ozonated loops. A minimum return flow is required to maintain the loop in a flooded condition under positive pressure.

8.8

CONTINUOUS MICROBIAL CONTROL

Process water systems generally employ both continuous methods of microbial control, and periodic sanitizations. This section discusses continuous methods for controlling microbial growth. 8.8.1

“Hot” Systems

The most effective and reliable means of preventing the growth of bacteria is to operate the system at temperatures above which bacteria can survive. If the distribution system is maintained in hot conditions, sanitization on a routine basis can be eliminated. Systems operating at 80°C have a long history of data showing the prevention of microbial growth. More recently, companies have been validating water systems at 65°C. The advantages of operating at lower temperature include energy savings, lower risk of injury, and reducing the amount of rouging. Systems operating at the higher end of this range have a greater safety margin with regard to microbial contamination. The effectiveness of temperatures below 80°C must be verified with test data, on a case by case basis. Note that these temperature ranges will not destroy endotoxin. As noted in Chapter 6, where endotoxin is a concern, the treatment system must be designed to remove it. 8.8.2

“Cold” Systems

The use of the term “cold” in this case implies that a system is maintained at a low enough temperature to inhibit microbial growth. While this has been shown to be effective, the energy costs associated with it generally make this type system costly to operation. Generally, “Cold” systems are operated from 4°C to 10°C. Microbial growth rates drop off significantly below 15°C, so the sanitization frequency of cold systems may be reduced compared to ambient systems. The effectiveness of a specific temperature, and the associated sanitization frequency in any particular system, must be determined by statistical analysis, on a case by case basis.


8.8.3

“Ambient” Systems


Circulation temperatures of any pharmaceutical water system are dictated by either the required microbial specification or the required temperature for usage. “Ambient” temperature purified water systems using either ozone and/or hot water sanitizations are common throughout the industry, and normally result in lower lifecycle costs, as well as reduced energy consumption compared with either the “hot” or “cold” systems. However, without increased levels of system sanitizations, the lack of temperature control at the water stor-


122


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS age vessel and distribution loop could result in the formation of a biofilm within the system, which could sporadically and unpredictably produce water failing microbiological specifications and necessitate non scheduled water system shutdowns. 8.8.4

Ozone

Ozone has been shown effective for microbial control. It is a strong oxidant, which chemically reacts with organisms and destroys them. The destruction of these organisms results in organic compounds, which may be further degraded by ozone, ultimately to carbon dioxide. Ozone is twice as powerful an oxidant as chlorine and needs to be dosed continually to maintain concentration. In any compendial water system and most other applications, water at the use points is expected to be totally free of ozone. Ozone removal is commonly effected through ultra violet radiation. 254 nanometer UV light converts ozone to oxygen. A common design is to maintain an ozone concentration between .02 ppm and 0.1ppm in the storage tank, and use a UV light at the beginning of the distribution loop for removal. To sanitize the loop itself, the UV light can be turned off during periods of no use, and the ozone will circulate through the loop. The UV dosage required for ozone destruction is generally 2 to 3 times that required for microbial control. Testing should be done to verify absence of ozone at the use points. 8.8.5

UV Light

Ultraviolet lights have been shown to reduce microbial populations in storage and distribution systems. UV energy is germicidal in the wavelengths of 200 to 300 nanometers, which falls below the visible spectrum. UV light de-activates DNA leading to bacteria reduction. A UV light is not a sterilization device, as it is often referred to. The effectiveness of the light will depend on the quality of the water in which it is acting, the intensity of the light, flow rate of water, contact time, and the type of bacteria present. 8.8.6

Filtration

Along with other particulate matter, bacteria and endotoxins may be removed via filtration. This filtration media can be either of the microfiltration (2-0.07 microns) or ultrafiltration (0.1-0.005 micron) scale. The integrity of these filters must be maintained.

8.8.6.1 Microfiltration Microfiltration includes the use of depth cartridge filters, pleated filters, and cross flow filtration membrane elements. These filters can remove particles ranging in size from 100 microns down to 0.1 micron. Depth and pleated filters allow water to flow through a wall of fibers perpendicular to the water direction (dead ended filters). The particles are then trapped on the outside wall of these filters, or within the filter walls (for depth filters), due to the pore size of the filter. The filter will fill up with these particles and then needs to be replaced with a new filter.


8.8.6.2 Ultrafiltration


Ultrafiltration can be used to remove organics and bacteria, as well as most viruses and pyrogens from a water source. Filtration is typically from 0.1 micron down to 0.01 micron. Cross flow ultrafiltration forces the water to flow parallel to the filter media, and the particles which are too large to pass through the membrane elements are then expelled from the system in a concentrate stream to drain (typically 5-10% of the feed flow). This allows the filters to be self-cleaning and eliminates the need to replace these membrane elements frequently. This type of filtration can be used as a “maintenance “ step downstream of the storage tank in certain situations.



123

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS In general, for any purified water system, filtration downstream of the storage tank is not recommended. This comes from concerns of “grow through” where bacteria will colonize on the upstream side of the filter, and ultimately be found on the downstream side even though the pore size of the media may theoretically be smaller than the size of the bacteria. An additional concern is the potential for accumulation of nutrients on the filter media, which may in fact increase the opportunity for microbial growth. However, filters downstream of a circulation pump are sometimes used in water systems. System designs should be predicated on obtaining the desired water quality upstream of the storage tank, using the treatment train. Filters downstream of the storage tank should not be relied on to purify the water. 8.8.7

Circulation

Most new water systems use a circulating loop for distribution. The primary purpose of circulation is to reduce the chance of microbial growth, or microbial attachment to the surfaces of the system. Although the mechanisms are not universally agreed upon, it is thought that the shear forces associated with turbulent water flow inhibit nutrient concentration and attachment of bacteria to surfaces. The velocity required to obtain these benefits is generally agreed to be greater than 3 feet per second, or Reynolds numbers greater than 2,100. Velocity may drop off for short periods of time during high use times without adversely affecting the system, so long as positive pressure is maintained in the system. Circulation also serves to maintain proper temperature throughout the system in hot and cold systems. Studies have shown that the velocities required to remove biofilm are higher than practical for a water system (above 15 ft/sec). However, a combination of high velocity (5 ft/sec or greater) with an antimicrobial agent, such as ozone or chlorine, may, over a long enough period of time, effectively remove biofilm. A turbulent condition may be maintained in short dead ended pipe stubs if the length of the stubs is limited. This limiting length varies with the pipe stub diameter and to a lesser degree with the main pipe diameter. A rule of thumb for the maximum dead leg is 6 branch pipe diameters. This “rule of thumb” may be difficult to achieve in large mains with small branches, and may result in unacceptably long dead legs in large branches. Rather than universally applying “rules of thumb”, it is important to recognize dead legs as an area of concern and take appropriate steps to prevent them in the original design or implement special provisions to address them if unavoidable. Some of the factors to consider include operating temperature, velocity in the main, and frequency of use (if the dead leg is a use point).

8.9

PERIODIC STERILIZATION/SANITIZATION

Periodic sanitization of storage and distribution systems is generally required. Based on monitoring the microbial quality of the system, a required frequency of sanitization should be formally established. Sanitization may also be done in response to reaching an “action limit” during routine testing. Various methods of periodic sanitization are discussed below. 8.9.1


Chemical

Various chemicals or combinations of chemicals can be used to periodically sanitize storage and distribution systems. Chlorine solutions on the order of magnitude of 100 ppm are very effective at killing organisms, but are not generally used in distribution systems because of corrosion problems associated with stainless steels. Hydrogen peroxide in concentrations on the order of 5% is a more practical alternative. Peracetic acid can also be used, generally in concentrations of 1% or less. Many different mixtures of these and other chemicals are commercially available for the purpose of sanitization.



Verification of the removal of the sanitizing agent is critical. Commercially available indicators (test strips or sticks) are commonly used to indicate when the amount of rinse water is sufficient. A rinse water analysis is then required to verify the absence of objectionable chemicals before the system is placed into service.

124



Ozone

Sanitation can be done either periodically or continuously with ozone. Storage tanks are typically continuously ozonated, and then the ozone is removed prior to the distribution loop or individual use points through the use of ultraviolet radiation. The distribution system can be periodically sanitized by turning off the UV light and, if necessary, increasing the ozone concentration while allowing it to circulate through the distribution loop. Concentrations as high as 1 ppm may be needed for periodic sanitization, particularly if biofilms must be removed. 8.9.3

Heat

It has been found that periodic sanitization by heating of the process water system is highly reliable and effective. The frequency at which sanitization must occur will vary depending on many factors. •

System design

•

Size of distribution system

•

Components of system

•

Volume of process water in the system

•

Frequency of use of the process water (turnover volume)

•

Temperature of the circulating process water

Each distribution system must develop its own microbial profile, and the sanitization cycle and frequency will have to be developed to fit that system. The most straightforward method of sanitization is to heat the circulating process water in the distribution system to 80°C ± 3°C and hold it at that temperature for a validated period of time. The use of this heat sanitization has been proven to be very effective and if designed properly can also be economical. Controls needed to perform this cycle of sanitization can be either manual or automatic. Because of the types of bacteria found in purified water systems, the use of steam is not required for effective microbial kill. Steam sterilization of distribution piping may require additional valving for vents and drains, and may require a higher pressure rating than otherwise needed. Storage tanks are by their nature more easily steam sterilized and this practice is common, although not required. Hot systems inherently are continuously sanitized. Thus, the need for sanitization should be based on microbial testing results, or when the system is off line for an extended period of time and the temperature of the loop drops to below the validated temperature range.


Depending on the process water specification, a conservative initial sanitization frequency should be assigned for “cold” systems. After the operating characteristics of the system are determined through microbial testing, the routine sanitization frequency can be determined. 8.9.4

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Initial Sanitization (Ambient IDSystem) number: 216389

Steam sanitization has a successful history, and is probably the most reliable method for sanitization. However, there is no requirement for steam sanitization in Purified Water or WFI systems. The following procedure is suggested as one option for hot water sanitization of an ambient system.



125

STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Immediately after passivation (for a SS system), the system should be flushed with process water at a high temperature (80°C ± 5°C) and all valves opened and points of use flushed. Normally two (2) times the volume of the system (after conductivity readings), or rinse water tests indicate that no passivation chemicals are detected, is required. This is the initial sanitization of the system. Once it has been determined that the chemical characteristics for the quality of the process water have been achieved by USP chemical testing, then microbial samples should be taken after each component, the points of use, and the storage tank. This initial sampling should show that the distribution system at any sampling point has no viable bacterial contamination. Once this is achieved, the system should be brought down to its operating temperature and allowed to stabilize.

8.10

SYSTEM DESIGN FOR STERILIZATION/SANITIZATION

The following sections highlight particular aspects of storage and distribution system design, which are relevant to sanitization. 8.10.1 Materials of Construction The sanitization methods used must be compatible with the materials in the system. By far the most widely used material for storage tanks and piping is 300 series stainless steel (generally 316L). This choice provides the most flexibility with regard to sanitization options. Sanitization with heat, UV, or ozone can be used in stainless systems practically without restriction. Chemical sanitization must be carefully managed with regard to concentration, pH, and temperature to avoid corrosive effects on stainless distribution systems. Other material used for distribution piping is PVDF. PVDF is susceptible to degradation by UV light. It is common to use stainless piping immediately adjacent to the UV light in a PVDF system to compensate for this problem. The temperature limitation of PVDF is approximately 140°C, which is high enough to allow heat sanitization or sterilization. In stainless systems, the gaskets used must be reviewed for compatibility with the sanitization method. A widely used gasket material is PTFE or EPDM, both of which have good thermal memory and excellent resistance to temperature, ozone, and chemical sanitizers. Other gasket materials must be carefully reviewed for compatibility with the sanitization methods, and to ensure that they will not leach substances into the water. The key is to recognize that the materials of construction “shall not be reactive, additive or absorptive so as to alter the safety, identity, strength, quality, or purity of the drug product beyond the official or other established requirements” (21 CFR 211.65). The sanitization procedures must be considered when selecting materials to comply with this requirement.


8.10.2 Storage Tank Design

Storage tanks are an area in the system that could be considered at high risk for microbial contamination because of the large surface area, low velocities, the need for venting, and potential for “cold spots” in the head space.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Tank size is generally based on economic considerations in combination with the pretreatment train sizing. ID number: 216389 From a bacterial standpoint, smaller tanks are preferred because they have higher turnover rates, which reduce the likelihood of bacterial growth. They also reduce surface areas and make it easier for ozone to permeate the water, if the tank is ozonated.


126


STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS Spray balls may be used on the return loop to wet the head space of storage tanks. The use of a spray ball serves to keep the top of the tank at the same temperature as the water, in heated systems, and avoids alternately wet and dry surfaces, which could promote corrosive action with stainless steel and allow microbial growth. Connections on the top head (relief devices, instrument connections, etc.) should be kept as close to the head as possible to simplify the spray ball design and get the benefit of the spray action. An exception is the vent filter, which should be removed far enough from the storage tank to avoid direct contact from the water spray, which could blind the filter. If dip tubes or instruments project down from the head, multiple spray balls may be needed to avoid a “shadow” being created in the spray pattern. The tanks must be vented to allow filling, and a filter should be used at the vent to avoid airborne particulate and microbial contamination. To avoid the problem of condensation in the filter and the resultant potential for colonization and grow through, hydrophobic vent filters are used and/or the filters are maintained at a temperature above the tank temperature with steam jacketing or electric tracing. To help avoid microbial growth, and avoid the change in conductivity resulting from absorption of atmospheric gasses into the water, nitrogen blanketing on the head space may be used. This eliminates outside air passing into the tank through the vent filter. Note that gasses added to storage tanks should be appropriately filtered to avoid objectionable contamination. Table 8-5

Comparison of Alternate System Designs for Microbial Control in Storage and Distribution Installed Cost

Operating Cost

Relative Effectiveness/Reliability

Ambient system, with ozonated tank, periodic ozone in distribution piping

Low

Low

Good

Ambient system with periodic hot water sanitization (note 2)

Low

Low

Good

Continuous “Cold” system (4-10°C) with periodic hot water sanitization

Medium

High, unless cold water is required for process

Better

Continuous “Hot” system (65-80°C) with multiple Point of Use Coolers

High

Medium

Best

Microbial Control Methodology


Note 1: All systems are circulating Note 2: Operating costs and effectiveness will increase with frequency of sanitization




127



INSTRUMENTATION and CONTROL





INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 9.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

9.1

INTRODUCTION

Instrumentation and controls are often used within pharmaceutical water systems to: •

control the operation of equipment and components

•

monitor and document the performance of critical equipment

•

monitor and document pharmaceutical water quality

The concepts and regulatory philosophy of defining critical versus non-critical parameters is discussed as it relates to instrumentation and controls. This definition could be summarized as:

“All instruments and control systems should be commissioned following Good Engineering Practices. Critical instruments and control systems should be commissioned and qualified.” There is no regulatory requirement that requires the use of On-Line instrumentation. A monitoring program may include a combination of On-Line instrumentation, manual documentation, and laboratory analysis. If On-Line instrumentation is used to measure or record a critical parameter, action and alert limits may be established. The methods of addressing “spikes” are also discussed. Automation can have a significant impact on the cost and performance of a pharmaceutical water system. There is no single optimum level of instrumentation and control for all systems. The optimum level for a given system balances the benefits of improved process control, improved documentation, and lower labor costs against the cost of procuring, installing, validating, and maintaining the instruments and control systems. In many cases, the level of automation for a pharmaceutical water system should be consistent with that utilized for the manufacturing process it supports.

9.2

PRINCIPLES

a) To achieve GMP compliance, the manufacturer must demonstrate, through documented evidence, that the pharmaceutical water system is in control and consistently produces and delivers water of acceptable quality. b) Although many quality attributes can be continuously monitored using On-Line instrumentation, there is no compendial or regulatory requirement for On-Line monitoring of pharmaceutical water quality. A monitoring program typically includes a combination of On-Line instrumentation, manual documentation of operational parameters, and laboratory analysis of water samples.


c) Instruments and control systems are critical and must be qualified when they are used to measure, monitor, control, or record a critical process parameter. A critical parameter is a processing parameter that affects the final water quality. For example, the temperature of the final water product may be considered critical for microbial control. In this case, the temperature controls (e.g., sensors and alarms) would be considered critical. However, it is not necessary to consider the temperature of the heating media (e.g., steam) as a critical parameter.


Documentation should clearly indicate which instruments are critical and which are not. It is also advisable to identify non-critical instruments as such on the field device.


129

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL d) All instruments and control systems should be designed, installed, calibrated, and maintained appropriately, according to Good Engineering Practice. All critical instruments and controls require qualification. e) Items that should be recorded in the system documentation include maintenance procedures and maintenance work performed, procedures for sampling and analysis, reporting the results, and trend analysis of the laboratory data. The monitoring program during start-up typically defines maintenance frequency and alert and action levels for the process variables.

9.3

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

9.3.1

Instrument Selection and Installation

a) Instruments should be selected for accuracy and reliability over the entire process range. b) Instruments should be selected and installed in a way that reduces the potential for contamination. •

Water contact surfaces should be constructed of materials that are compatible with the water they contact. Materials of construction and surface finishes (see Chapter 8) are commonly specified for instruments installed in distribution systems.

•

Sensors in direct contact with waters with strict microbial limits should be of sanitary design. Nonsanitary instrumentation is commonly used in feed water and pretreatment systems.

•

Instruments may be installed directly in the water system or in a side stream that may, or may not, be returned to the main system.

•

Deadlegs should be avoided.

c) When possible, instruments should be installed such that exposure to harsh process conditions, such as pH and temperature extremes, is avoided. For example, In-Line sensors used to monitor effluent from a deionizer should be positioned such that exposure to regeneration chemicals is avoided. Instruments that are not compatible with passivation agents, sanitization agents, or sanitization temperatures should be installed so that they may be easily removed or bypassed. Such devices may need to be sanitized off line. d) Instruments should be installed in accordance with manufacturers’ requirements to ensure proper operation. For example, flow meters should be installed in the proper orientation and with the correct upstream and downstream straight run of pipe. The impact of process and ambient conditions on an instrument’s accuracy and reliability should be addressed.


e) Conductivity cells are especially sensitive to the presence of air or steam bubbles, which can be present where there is turbulence, cavitation, or flashing. Such locations should be avoided. f)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Accessibility for maintenance should be Herzlia, considered, but improving control response is usually more critical. Poor response time may be a consequence of the poor placement of a device and, in most cases, can be improved by installing the device closer to the point of measurement. ID number: 216389

9.3.2

Instrument Calibration


a) The calibration of critical instruments should follow a regular program, which provides evidence of consistently acceptable performance. Non-critical instruments may be calibrated on a frequency deemed appropriate for the service.

130


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL b) Calibration should follow approved procedures and the results should be documented. Each component in a control loop should be calibrated individually or the loop may be calibrated in its entirety. All calibrations should be traceable to certified standards (e.g., NIST). c) Vendor-supplied calibration certificates should reference the applicable instrument serial numbers. The impact of shipment and installation on the vendor’s calibration should be addressed. 9.3.3

Types of Instrumentation

9.3.3.1 Conductivity a) Although non-ion specific, conductivity is a valuable tool for measuring the total ionic quality of water and is a critical parameter for many high purity water systems. Conductivity limits for Purified Water and WFI are specified in the USP. b) On-Line conductivity instrumentation is frequently used to monitor and control the performance of many types of purification equipment and to continuously monitor the quality of pharmaceutical waters. On-line conductivity instrumentation may also be used for final quality assurance testing, thus eliminating the need for periodic laboratory analysis of water samples. c) Temperature has a profound impact upon conductivity measurement. To eliminate this temperature dependence, most instruments include a temperature sensor in the conductivity probe and one or more algorithms to correct the actual measurement to a standard temperature. However, due to he inaccuracy inherent in temperature compensation algorithms, compensated conductivity measurements are not suitable for critical quality assurance testing of USP purified water and WFI. When In-Line conductivity measurements are used for final quality assurance testing of USP purified water and WFI, a non-compensated conductivity value and the water temperature must be measured as required by the USP. Compensated conductivity values used strictly for process control and monitoring are not subject to USP requirements. d) To operate properly, conductivity sensors must be installed such that there is continuous water flow through the sensor and air bubbles or solids cannot become trapped inside the electrodes. Air bubbles will result in lower-than-expected conductivity readings while solids can impact the conductivity in either direction. Clean steam must be condensed prior to conductivity measurement. e) Conductivity meters may be used throughout a pharmaceutical water system to monitor and control purification processes or to monitor pharmaceutical water quality. Some examples are: •

Feed water monitoring can detect seasonal or unanticipated quality changes that could impact pretreatment equipment operation.

•

RO influent and effluent monitoring allows calculation and trending of percentage rejection. Changes in percentage rejection may be a sign of membrane failure, scaling or fouling, seal failure, improper pH, inadequate feed pressure, or too high a recovery rate.

•

•


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Deionizer effluent or in-bed monitoring detects, or predicts, resin exhaustion and allows automatic Herzlia, initiation of regeneration cycles. ID number: 216389

The conductivity of pharmaceutical water may be monitored after the final treatment step to verify acceptable quality prior to delivery to a storage tank. In addition, conductivity meters are often installed in the return piping of distribution loops downstream of the final point of use. Many systems include provisions for automatic diversion to drain or recirculation back through purification equipment when water quality entering the tank is outside the acceptable range.



131

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 9.3.3.2 Total Organic Carbon (TOC) a) Total Organic Carbon (TOC) is a measure of the carbon dissolved in water in the form of organic compounds. It is a valuable tool for measuring the aggregate level of organic impurities in pharmaceutical water systems. A TOC test with a nominal limit of 500 ppb for USP Purified Water and WFI is a required test in the USP. b) TOC meters are relatively sophisticated analytical instruments. The USP provides guidance on how to qualify an instrument and how to interpret the instrument results. c) In addition to “continuous” monitoring of equipment performance and pharmaceutical water quality, OnLine TOC meters may be used for final quality assurance testing, thus eliminating the need for periodic laboratory analysis. When used for critical assurance testing of USP purified water and WFI, instrument precision, system suitability, test methodology and calibration procedures must meet USP requirements. Instruments used strictly for process control and monitoring are not subject to USP requirements. d) TOC is often monitored at several locations in a pharmaceutical water system. Some examples are: •

Feed water monitoring can detect seasonal or unanticipated quality changes that could impact pretreatment equipment operation or the potential for resin or membrane fouling.

•

Monitoring TOC downstream of carbon filters, organic scavengers, RO units, and UV lights can verify proper equipment operation and provide advance warning of bed exhaustion, compromised membranes, or the need for lamp replacement.

•

TOC levels of pharmaceutical water may be monitored after the final treatment step to verify acceptable quality prior to delivery to a storage tank. In addition, TOC meters are often installed in the return piping of distribution loops downstream of the final point of use. Many systems include provisions for automatic diversion to drain or recirculation back through purification equipment when water quality is outside the acceptable range.

e) There has been much interest in the possible use of TOC analyzers to indicate endotoxin contamination. While this type of contamination will lead to higher TOC levels, there is no quantitative correlation to TOC levels. TOC results cannot substitute for microbial or endotoxin testing.

9.3.3.3 PH a) pH measurement is relatively straightforward for high conductivity water. Reliable results can generally be obtained using pH indicators or laboratory, field, or On-Line pH meters.


b) Accurate pH measurement is difficult in many pharmaceutical waters due to the low conductivity. Low conductivity water is susceptible to pH swings due to contaminants introduced from the air, sample containers, and test equipment, as well as instrument difficulties associated with measuring low ionic strength solutions. c)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Common locations for On-Line pH measurement and control include: Herzlia, • Upstream of cellulose acetate membranes, where acid is injected to minimize membrane hyIDROnumber: 216389 drolysis

•

132


Upstream of a degasifier, where acid is injected to increase C02 removal


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL d) While pH limits for purified water and WFI are no longer specified in the USP, On-Line pH meters are rarely used for process control or for final quality assurance testing of pharmaceutical waters for several reasons: •

Conductivity is a more sensitive measurement of overall ionic quality since changes in pH reflect logarithmic changes in water quality

•

A pH sensor’s reference electrode contains a buffer solution that may leak through the reference electrode into the water being measured. To prevent contamination of the pharmaceutical water system, a pH sensor is installed in a side stream that flows to drain. The water flow rate through the meter must be controlled and held constant to achieve repeatable results.

•

pH meters require frequent (daily in some cases) calibration with standard buffer solutions

9.3.3.4 Ozone a) Dissolved ozone levels should be monitored in storage and distribution systems that utilize ozone for microbial control. Ozone levels can be determined periodically in the laboratory using several wet chemistry methods, or continuously using an On-Line analyzer. On-line analyzers are relatively inexpensive and easy to maintain, but they should periodically be calibrated against laboratory methods. b) For effective and safe system operation, ozone levels should be monitored at the following locations: •

At the storage tank discharge to control operation of the ozone generator

•

Downstream of the UV light to ensure ozone destruction prior to water use

•

In loop return piping to ensure proper ozone levels are maintained during sanitization

c) Since Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) analyzers are nonspecific and unable to differentiate ozone from other oxidants, ORP analyzers should not be used for controlling ozone levels in pharmaceutical water systems.

9.3.3.5 Flow A wide variety of flow meters may be used in the feed water and pretreatment portion of a pharmaceutical water system including magnetic flow meters, mass flow meters, vortex shedding meters, and ultrasonic meters. All meters should be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure proper operation.


Water flow rate (or velocity) may help to reduce microbial growth and maintain temperature within hot or cold systems. It is commonly verified upon startup, but not continuously monitored. Flow rate may vary. It may be monitored for information only.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Temperature is often monitored and/or controlled at various locations to ensure optimum equipment operation and/or for microbial control. Temperature interlocks may be used to prevent damage to membranes, ID number: 216389 9.3.3.6 Temperature

resins, or equipment if water temperatures drift outside allowable ranges.


In distribution systems where temperature is controlled or where heat sanitization is used, temperature is considered critical to ensure proper system operation or effective sanitization.


133

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 9.3.3.7 Pressure Pressure may be monitored and controlled throughout the purification process to ensure optimum equipment operation. Monitoring differential pressure across filters indicates when backwashing or element replacement is needed. Differential pressure measurement across resin beds is useful in detecting resin fouling and poor flow distribution. Monitoring RO feed, interstage, permeate, and concentrate pressures provides early warning of membrane fouling and scaling. Back pressure control in distribution systems may be critical, if minimum pressures are required at points of use. Pressure is not normally considered a critical parameter, however, the system should maintain positive pressure at all times. It may typically be monitored for information only.

9.3.3.8 Level Various types of level measurement are used in the feed water and pretreatment portion of a pharmaceutical water system, including simple float switches, ultrasonic sensors, capacitance sensors, and differential pressure transmitters. The stub from the tank must be kept as short as possible to minimize deadlegs. Calibration of this type of transmitter is time consuming, since it requires filling the tank to verify proper operation. Tank nozzles with integral valves minimize deadlegs and allow calibration while the tank is in service. Tank level may be monitored to control the supply of water into a tank and for control and protection of downstream pumps. In some instances, level may not normally be considered a critical parameter and may be monitored for information only. In these cases, it is usually not validated.

9.4

DESIGN CONDITIONS VERSUS OPERATING RANGE

The control system may recognize the distinction between design conditions and operating ranges, and the impact this distinction has upon validation and facility operation. These criteria are defined as: •

Design Condition: the specified range, or accuracy, of a controlled variable used by the designer as a basis to determine the performance requirements for an engineered system.

•

Allowable Operating Range: the range of validated critical parameters within which acceptable water product can be produced.

•

Normal Operating Range: a range that may be selected as the desired acceptable values for a parameter during normal operations. This range must be within the Allowable Operating Range.


a) While it is desirable that a facility should meet all stated design conditions, the acceptability of the water system for operation from a cGMP standpoint depends on operating within the Allowable Operating Ranges. b)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Normal Operating Ranges cannot exceedHerzlia, the Allowable Operating Range for the product water. Design condition selection should reflect Good Engineering Practice. ID number: 216389

c) It may be desirable to apply the concept of Alert and Action points along with Normal Operating Range. Alert levels are based on normal operating experience and are used to initiate investigations or corrective measures, before reaching an Action level. Action levels are defined as the level at which some corrective action must be taken to avoid jeopardizing water quality.


134


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 9.5

INSTRUMENTATION SPIKES

“Spikes” may be experienced in the measurement of some parameters. These excursions may be the result of the measurement technique or sensor and may not be representative of the actual parameter value. If a spike occurs in a system with a significant physical lag or mass, the rapid changes in a parameter as evidenced by spikes may be physically impossible and consequently can be treated as instrumentation spikes. In other cases, it may be decided to treat these spikes as Alert Level deviations based upon their frequency and duration even though their magnitude may exceed the Action level. A procedure for defining and handling spikes should be developed in conjunction with Quality Assurance based on the specific water system.

9.6

CONTROL SYSTEMS

9.6.1

Level of Automation

Selection of a control strategy for a pharmaceutical water system should consider feed water quality and reliability, the complexity of the purification and/or distribution system, labor costs, personnel skill levels and capabilities, and documentation and reporting requirements. Options for control include: a) Local instrumentation with manual control: In this option, a combination of instrumentation, periodic samples, and visual examination is used to monitor critical process parameters. Data is collected and recorded manually, and analysis and trending capabilities are limited. Excursions of critical parameters outside acceptable ranges typically trigger local alarms to reduce the risk of unacceptable water quality. Satisfactory manual operation requires significant human intervention. This requires detailed operating procedures and conscientious documentation of critical quality parameters. This option has the lowest installed cost, but is very labor intensive and may be subject to human error. b) Semi-automatic control: These systems use local operator control panels, relay logic control, local chart recorders and printers, and some manual data collection to monitor and control the water system. These systems are less labor intensive over the manual systems, but are still labor intensive due to the manual data collection and monitoring required to control the process. c) Automatic control: Automated systems use a computer (PLC or DCS), or computers, to control the pharmaceutical water system. The computer system utilizes appropriate process monitoring instrumentation (conductivity probes, flow meters, etc.) to gather data and make appropriate adjustments to the system automatically. As water generation systems become more sophisticated, relying on human intervention to control and monitor the water system becomes more difficult and labor intensive. An automated system requires less operator involvement, but requires a more highly trained maintenance and engineering support staff.


d) Fully integrated systems: These systems include a fully automated system and a wide area network connected to other computer systems in the building or site. These systems allow for central site monitoring, automatic electronic data collection, centralized alarm monitoring with automatic recording, response, and report generation.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Additional information on control system is available216389 in the Good Automated Manufacturing Practice ID design number:

(GAMP) Guide and in various guidelines by the Instrument Society of America (ISA). Whichever level of automation is selected, the validation effort should verify operation of the complete system, including vendor-supplied sub-systems.



135

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 9.6.2

Control System Software

The software/control system may be used to measure, monitor, control, or record critical process parameters. Programming and design standards, especially concerning operator interface, control techniques, alarm handling, and interlock processing should be applied during the development, validation and maintenance phases of the project. The control system software consists of: a) Firmware, Operating System and Application Software: This is software permanently loaded into memory that may or may not be accessible to the user. While the functions performed by the control system may be divided between critical and non-critical functions, it is impossible to divide or isolate the firmware, operating system, application software, and associated hardware functions. Therefore, if some of the functions of a control system are considered critical, all of the above software is considered critical, and should be validated. b) User Configurable Software: The functions of the user configurable software may be defined as critical or non-critical. The critical functions or modules require enhanced documentation, including validation. In some cases, it may be impossible to divide or isolate software adequately. In such cases, if some of the functions are critical, it may be necessary to validate all the software. The type of process control required is often the determining factor in the type of software needed, and software requirements often define the type of system selected. Major considerations are: •

Number of I/0 points

•

Mathematical or statistical functions required

•

Reporting features required (particularly if the control system is to be further integrated into higher systems)

•

Whether or not advanced control techniques are required (e.g., neural nets; fuzzy logic controllers; adaptive gain; dead-time compensation)

9.6.3

Control Hardware and Operation Interface

a) Critical software requires enhanced documentation and should be designed and tested in accordance with the Lifecycle Methodology. b) The water system, field instruments and control requirements all affect control hardware selection. Plant standards, or a large installed base of a particular system may drive the selection.


136


COMMISSIONING and QUALIFICATION





COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION 10.

COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION

10.1

INTRODUCTION

Commissioning and qualification comprise the validation process by which a system is put into service and demonstrated to consistently produce water of a specified quality, under various conditions, while operated under set procedures. Although commissioning and qualification are typically separated within a project schedule, they are in essence, one continuous process. The specific activities and processes during commissioning and qualification will not be discussed in this Guide. These are considered by a separate ISPE Baseline® Guide on Commissioning and Qualification, and pharmaceutical water systems are used as examples throughout. A summary of key concepts are listed below: a) Due to the interdependence between activities and those involved, excellent communication, planning and coordination between operations, engineering, commissioning, and validation personnel will enable timely and cost-effective project completion. b) Each component of the system should be built in accordance with plans and specifications and should be inspected, tested, and documented by qualified individuals. These activities, and the production of supporting documentation, are defined as Good Engineering Practice (GEP). c) GEP recommends a minimum level of documentation for all systems and equipment. This encompasses design, fabrication, vendor testing, construction, field inspection, and commissioning. If these documents are appropriately planned, organized, and authorized, they may become an integral part of qualification support documentation, thus avoiding redundancy and saving time and money. d) Design criteria and documentation requirements should be clearly defined early in the design phase, to ensure clear expectations and appropriate planning, and facilitate timely commissioning and validation. Engineering firms, vendors, and contractors should be required, per the system specifications, to provide the necessary documentation, to avoid unnecessary costs and delays associated with obtaining or creating these documents. e) During construction, timely review of documentation and periodic “walk-throughs” can ensure that Installation Qualification requirements are met. f)

Commissioning takes the system from a state of substantial completion to a state of operation. It is the phase of a project that includes mechanical completion, start-up, and turnover. Commissioning incorporates a systematic method of testing and documenting the system at the conclusion of construction, and prior to the completion of validation activities.


g) Commissioning documents should not be created and executed for the purpose of regulatory compliance. However, commissioning tests and documentation will typically satisfy many installation and operational qualification requirements.

10.2

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, SYSTEM QUALIFICATIONID DOCUMENTATION number: 216389

Good Engineering Practice dictates that documentation be developed to provide evidence of the design, and that the water system operates in accordance with the design. This documentation encompasses engineering, installation, inspection, and testing. Such documentation is common to all system commissioning activities and is partially summarized below:



137

COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION •

A system description stating design intent

•

A schematic drawing of the system (P&ID)

•

Written system specifications

•

Detailed design drawings

•

Vendor manuals and drawings

•

Field inspection and test reports

•

System qualification test results

Because of their critical impact on pharmaceutical production, water systems require additional emphasis on certain sections of this documentation. Specific design requirements for water and steam systems are contained within the body of this Guide. When compiling documentation related to water systems, particular attention should be paid to the following: a) Schematic documentation may be enhanced by the inclusion of a system isometric diagram (or diagrams) indicating location and numbering of welds, relative elevations, slope of lines, and points of drainage. b) The system specification should indicate performance criteria, as well as design parameters. c) Field inspection and test reports should include cleaning and passivation procedure and record, weld parameter documentation and inspection reports, slope verification, and verification of the absence of “dead-legs”. d) System qualification tests may or may not be subject to a pre-approved protocol addressing qualification test requirements. In either case, test results should be reported in direct comparison to acceptance criteria derived from system design and operating specifications. e) System qualification tests should include verification of all automated functions, specified temperature control, distribution system velocity, and initial water quality determination. Additional details regarding water system qualification may be found in the associated “ISPE Baseline® Guide on Commissioning and Qualification”.

10.3


SYSTEM QUALIFICATION SAMPLING PROGRAM

The qualification of water systems is unique in that performance must be proven over an extended period of time, and is subject to variations in use rate and initial feed water quality. Therefore, the sampling program associated with pharmaceutical water systems validation is unique and specialized.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Extensive sampling is required to establish and confirm that the entire system will operate within specified operating ranges, to develop and evaluate the system operation and maintenance procedures, and to verify ID number: 216389 that the water produced and delivered to the points of use consistently meets the required quality specifications and acceptance criteria. This portion of the program is sometimes termed performance qualification.


Because of the critical impact that water has upon pharmaceutical quality, the sampling program and evaluation of results is usually subject to a pre-approved plan or protocol, with clearly defined acceptance criteria. Also included should be procedures to deal with deviations from specified parameters and analytical results.

138


COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION The sampling program consists of three successive phases, each with a specific purpose and sampling scheme, as outlined below. The initial phase of the sampling program typically begins after the water system is shown to be fully operational, as demonstrated through integrated system testing in Operational Qualification. The water generated during the various phases may be used for manufacturing as long as analytical results are acceptable. The intended applications and impact of water quality should be considered in determining how much data is required before use. Table 10-1 Sampling Program Phase

Primary Objectives

1

• Develop appropriate operating ranges.

Typical Duration 2-4 weeks

• Develop and finalize operating, cleaning, and maintenance procedures. • Demonstrate production and delivery of water of the required quality. 2

• Demonstrate consistent operation within established ranges.

2-4 weeks

• Demonstrate consistent production and delivery of water of the required quality. 3

• Demonstrate extended performance.

One year

• Ensure that potential seasonal variations are evaluated and treated.

10.3.1 Phase 1 The purpose of this phase is to establish appropriate operating ranges and provide data for the development of cleaning and sanitization procedures and frequencies. Sampling should be performed after each step in the treatment process and from each point of use. In addition, the incoming feed water to the water system should be tested and verified to comply with the relevant “Drinking Water” regulations. The FDA Guide to Inspections of High Purity Water Systems suggests daily sampling for two to four weeks, but recognizes that other sampling programs may be acceptable.


In devising the sampling scheme, consideration should be given to the system configuration, maintenance cycles, how the water is drawn for use, and the expected or potential variation in chemistry and microbiological attributes, at each potential sample point. In treatment, chemistry testing is specific for each processing step and microbiological testing between each component is important to determine the microbial load and the component’s ability to manage the load.


At the end of this phase, the SOPs for system operation and maintenance should be developed and approved for continued interim use during the next phase. System logs, documentation for critical parameters (e.g., conductivity and TOC data, sanitization data, etc.), and responses to critical alarms or action levels should be reviewed, to verify the appropriate procedures are in place. In addition, the process that will be followed to investigate a confirmed test failure should be developed at this time. The intent of this process is to assess



139

COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION whether a failure is localized (i.e., isolated to a specific port) or systematic, and to define how different types of failures will be handled. 10.3.2 Phase 2 The second phase is intended to demonstrate that the system consistently operates within pre-determined operating ranges and delivers water of the required quality when operated in accordance with the SOPs. The FDA Guide suggests that the sampling scheme and duration should be the same as for phase one. During phases 1 and 2, multiple samples should be taken from each point of use. Sampling methodology should be representative of the way water will be used. For example, sampling should not involve a lengthy preliminary purge if water usage will be direct and immediate. If water is used through an attached hose, then the sample should be taken from the hose. It is recommended that each point be sampled at least once per week as a minimum. In this manner, localized contamination may be discovered. (Note that too frequent sampling of little used points may mask incipient localized microbial growth by artificial purging.) Phase 2 allows the gathering of sufficient data to establish microbial alert and action limits (see Section 10.4). 10.3.3 Phase 3 The third phase is intended to demonstrate that, when operated for an extended time period (typically one year), the system produces and delivers water of the required quality, despite possible seasonal variations of the feed water. Sample locations, frequencies, and test requirements are based on the established procedures. For WFI systems, the FDA Guide recommends sampling daily from a minimum of one point of use, with all points of use tested weekly. At the end of this phase (i.e., after a full year of testing), the validation is considered completed. In most cases, ongoing monitoring will establish a continuing record of water quality.

10.4

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

Acceptance criteria for water are dependent upon its use. For both Purified Water and WFI, the chemical acceptance criteria are clearly described in the US Pharmacopoeia (USP). It is expected that a well designed water system, operating within specified design parameters will consistently be able to meet these criteria. Therefore, failures in chemical analysis during phases 1 and 2 must be investigated, the reason for failure corrected, and (except where errors in sampling or laboratory error are clearly indicated) the sampling phase extended to re-establish consistency of performance. Microbial quality is not specified by the USP, but is established by the user based upon water use. The USP does recommend action limits for the different waters in its General Information chapter. These are 10 CFU/ 100ml for WFI and 100 CFU/ml for Purified Water. These may be employed as initial acceptance criteria for system qualification, although some flexibility is allowable, depending upon system design and use. It is permissible that a single excursion, followed by acceptable re-sampling would not constitute a failure. In addition, because of the inherently bacteriostatic nature of WFI production and distribution systems, it should be expected that the large majority of samples should be well below the initial acceptance criterion. Therefore, for WFI it is prudent to establish a sample average acceptance criterion, which will be below the limit for a single sample. Failure investigation would be handled similarly to chemical analysis failure.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, During phases 1 and 2, normal system limits may216389 be established. Acceptance criteria may then be IDmicrobial number: converted to alert and action limits for use during phase 3 and beyond. These would take into account repeated excursions from the norm as well as step increases in micro count.


140


COMMISSIONING AND QUALIFICATION 10.5

QUALIFICATION REPORTS

Qualification data should be compiled and conclusions written into a summary report. This is to be reviewed and approved by those responsible for operation and quality assurance of the water system. An interim report should be written and approved at such time during the qualification sampling program, as it is desired to use water in production activities. A summary report should be prepared at the conclusion of phase 2, periodic updates provided throughout phase 3 and a major update issued at the conclusion of phase 3.

10.6

CHANGE CONTROL AND REQUALIFICATION

Changes to the system must be assessed with regard to potential impact of the change on the entire system. Required action would be determined based on that assessment. It may involve extensive re-qualification, localized increase in sampling frequency, or inclusion in the routine monitoring program.



141



APPENDIX





APPENDIX

DISCLAIMER: The Water and Steam Systems Appendix contains material considered “informational” which, although necessary, would have been detrimental to the clarity of the dedicated chapter. The Appendix has not been reviewed by and therefore is not endorsed by the FDA.

11.

APPENDIX

11.1

USP REGULATED WATER QUALITY

See Chapter 2, Section 2.3 on USP Regulated Water Quality for more details. In order to set the maximum allowable conductivity, USP determined the limit concentration of the least conductive water attribute species used in USP 22 to be chloride at 0.47 ppm and 1.01 µS/cm at the standard temperature. When actual measurements of conductivity are evaluated at temperatures above the standard 25°C, the least conductive water attributes between pH 5 and 7, changes to favor ammonia at the maximum acceptable concentration of 0.3 ppm, using chloride as the electro-neutrality-balancing counter ion. Thus by maintaining a water conductivity less than the value corresponding to the least conductive water attributes between pH 5 and 7 at the specific water temperature, failure of any single Ionic chemical test in USP 22 is precluded. 11.1.1

USP Three Stage Conductivity Levels

Stage 1

Primarily intended as an in-line test

Measure water conductivity and temperature using a non-compensated conductivity sensor using a suitable container or an in-line measurement. See USP Stage 1 table. Stage 2

An off-line test using a “grab” sample

If the sample fails the Stage 1 test, adjust the temperature to 25°C and stir. If the sample stabilizes to the minimum conductivity value listed in the Stage 3 table, the water meets the requirements. Stage 3

Additional test to account for the variation in conductivity with respect to alkalinity

Measure pH within 5 minutes of the Stage 2 conductivity reading after increasing its ionic strength to allow a pH reading, using saturated potassium chloride solution at 3%. See “Stage 3 Conductivity Levels at 25°C” chart.


11.1.2

Derivation of USP Stage 1 Conductivity Levels

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Due to the difficulty experienced inID accurately measuring 216389 pH of high purity water, USP have selected the number:

The following chart shows conductivity levels for temperatures between 0°C and 100°C for the chlorideammonia model at the least conductive water attributes between pH 5 and 7.

minimum conductivity levels, occurring at pH 5 and 7, to limit the water quality at each temperature increment. These levels are listed in the table following the chart.



143

APPENDIX Figure 11-1

11.1.3

Conductivity Levels for Chloride-Ammonia Model

In-Line (Stage 1) Conductivity Limits for Temperatures 0° to 100°C

Temperature Range Maximum In-Line (Stage 1) Conductivity (µS/cm) Temperature Range Maximum In-Line (Stage 1) Conductivity (µS/cm) Temperature Range Maximum In-Line (Stage 1) Conductivity (µS/cm)

0 TO 4.9°C

5 to 9.9°C

10 to 14.9°C

15 to 19.9°C

20 to 24.9°C

25 to 29.9°C

0.6

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

1.3

30 to 34.9°C

35 to 39.9°C

40 to 44.9°C

45 to 49.9°C

50 to 54.9°C

55 to 59.9°C

1.4

1.5

1.7

1.8

1.9

2.1

60 to 64.9°C

65 to 69.9°C

70 to 74.9°C

75 to 94.9°C

95 to 99.9°C

100°C

2.2

2.4

2.5

2.7

2.9

3.1


144


APPENDIX 11.1.4

Derivation of Stage 2 and 3 Conductivity Levels

When the least conductive water attributes are plotted for water exposed to atmospheric CO2 at 25°C, the following chart is produced: Figure 11-2

11.1.5

Derivation of Stage 2 and 3

Total Organic Carbon (TOC) and Requirements for TOC Control

TOC is an indirect measure, as carbon, of organic molecules present in high purity water. A TOC limit was determined by USP to be 0.5 ppm or 500 ppb, based on the results of studies and an industry wide survey of pharmaceutical water systems. Special Requirements Organic contamination may be detected from different sources, and once a commitment is made to monitor using a sensitive TOC meter, care must be exercised in controlling TOC in numerous materials used to support and maintain the water purification systems. These materials may include: •

Replaced Filter Cartridges

•

Particles from Valves, Seats, Gaskets, etc.

•

Soap and Detergent


•

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Chemicals used for General Cleaning, etc.Herzlia, Regeneration and Sanitization Materials ID number: 216389

•

Alcohol and other solvents used to clean and sanitize seals and gaskets

•

Plastics used for sampling apparatus (beakers, bottles etc.) or other applications that may leach out organic chemicals into the water samples to be tested.

•



145

APPENDIX •

DI resin, detected after regeneration or when beds are switched. Sources of TOC from ion exchange resin beds include: unconverted monomers or low molecular weight polymers; decomposition products and compounds resulting from oxidation or hydrolysis of the organic resins; organics in water used to regenerate and rinse ion exchange beds.

New or replaced DI resin may be recycled five or six times to remove leachables, or resin may be specified as preconditioned. A TOC rinse down certification curve is available from most resin suppliers. Sample containers for off-line sampling must be scrupulously cleaned of organic residues and care must be exercised in handling the containers to avoid transferring natural skin oils onto the container surfaces.

11.1.5.1

Systems Available for Measuring TOC

Instruments are available for measuring TOC in-line from slip streams and from grab samples manually removed from the water system. Automatic off-line sample introduction systems are available for processing large numbers of grab samples. USP have not prevented acceptable technologies from being used, but limit the methods to the following instruments that are capable of completely oxidizing the organic molecules to carbon dioxide (CO2), measuring the CO2 levels as carbon, discriminating between Inorganic Carbon (IC) and the CO2 levels generated from the oxidization of the organic molecules, maintaining an equipment limit of detection of 0.05 mg/l or lower, and periodically demonstrating an equipment “suitability.” A number of acceptable methods exist for measuring TOC in high purity water and all share the same basic methodology, the complete oxidation of the organics to CO2 and the measurement of this CO2 Three general approaches, based on the above concept, are used in a variety of commercially available instruments which measure Organic Carbon in a water sample by completely oxidizing the organic molecules to carbon dioxide (CO2) and measuring the CO2 levels as carbon. Four common oxidation methods and four common CO2 measurement methods are used in different combinations in these TOC analyzers. The Total Carbon (TC) result may be expected to include Inorganic carbon resulting from dissolved CO2 and bicarbonate which must be subtracted from the TC to produce the TOC level in the sample. Some TOC analyzers remove the IC by acidifying the samples and either gas stripping or vacuum degassing the CO2. In pharmaceutical waters, the IC levels are generally very low and IC removal processes are not usually required. 11.1.6

TOC Measurements

USP have applied laboratory quality control procedures, common in a laboratory for setting wide range equipment for measurement over a specific range. These include: Standardization (Limit Response Test) and Suitability (USP Suitability Test).


These tests are in addition to calibration requirements and in no way replace or compensate for an acceptable calibration program. Types of TOC Analyzers

Method of Oxidation

Mr. Laboratory ShlomoInstruments Sackstein Herzlia, Method of CO Detection ID number: 216389 2

High temperature combustion

Require the Addition of Chemicals or Gases

NDIR Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM

146

Yes

Heat activated persulfate

NDIR

Yes

UV activated persulfate

NDIR or CO2 selective conductivity

Yes


APPENDIX These instruments require the injection of pure carrier gasses and/or persulfate to achieve more robust oxidation levels allowing the successful analysis of high levels of TOC in unknown water samples. In-Line Instruments (Simplified TOC Analyzers) Method of Oxidation

UV light

Method of CO2 Detection


Direct conductivity or CO2 selective conductivity

No

These instruments are designed for TOC measurement of deionized water, with or without CO2. These conditions allow the accurate measurement of the IC in the sample. If they are used in water that has significant levels of other ions, the IC results and therefore the TOC results will be in error. Waters that do not meet these requirements should use the laboratory type TOCs (in-line or off-line). Laboratory Instruments Capable of Operating In-Line and Unattended Method of Oxidation

Method of CO2 Detection


Heat activated persulfate

NDIR

Yes

UV activated persulfate

NDIR or CO2 selective conductivity

Yes

These instruments require the injection of pure carrier gasses and/or persulfate to achieve more robust oxidation levels allowing the successful analysis of high levels of TOC in unknown water samples.

11.1.6.1

Typical Organic Oxidation Methods used in Commercial TOC Analyzers

The four most common oxidation methods for TOC are: high temperature combustion, thermally activated persulfate, UV activated persulfate, and UV light only. The “high temperature combustion” (>500°C) oxidation method is rapid and can easily oxidize large particles, but requires a source of compressed oxygen or air as a carrier gas for the sample.


The “thermally activated persulfate” method uses heat to activate the persulfate to form highly oxidative sulfate and hydroxide radicals which then react with the carbon in the organics to produce CO2. The “UV activated persulfate” method uses ultraviolet light (<280 nm) to activate the persulfate to form the highly reactive sulfate and hydroxide chemical oxidizing radicals. In both of these persulfate methods, the persulfate is a source of oxygen and can be added at higher levels to allow the complete oxidation of higher concentrations of organics. TOC levels (without sample dilution) of 50 to 100 ppm can be measured. Each persulfate method can easily oxidize macromolecules and biomolecules to CO2, but can have difficulty oxidizing large particles (>30 µm) in reasonable periods of time.



The “UV light only” method uses short wave ultraviolet light (<195 nm) to activate dissolved oxygen or water to produce powerful oxidizing agents such as the hydroxide chemical radical which react with the carbon in the organic molecules to form CO2. The “UV light only” method does not require the addition of a chemical reagent, but the upper levels of TOC are limited. With this method, the short wave UV light will activate


147

APPENDIX dissolved oxygen free water molecules to completely oxidize organics at TOC levels of up to 250 ppb, and in the presence of oxygen, saturated water (at 25°C) will completely oxidize organics at TOC levels of up to 1500 to 2000 ppb (1.5 to 2.0 ppm).

11.1.6.2

Typical CO2 Detection Methods used in Commercial TOC Analyzers

There are four CO2 detection methods currently used in commercial TOC analyzers: Non-Dispersive Infrared (NDIR), CO2 selective conductivity, direct conductivity, and differential conductivity. The “NDIR” method measures the infrared absorption of CO2 in the gas phase. This method requires the CO2 in the water sample to be removed and transferred to the IR absorption cell by a carrier gas stream. The “NDIR” absorption detectors also measure water vapor; therefore, it must be removed from the CO2 gas prior to measurement. This detector responds quickly, must be calibrated regularly, has a dynamic linear range of about 1.5 to 2 orders of magnitude, and a limit of detection of 2 to 10 ppb. It is the most common TOC detector used in laboratory type analyzers. The “CO2 Selective Conductivity” method uses a special membrane to selectively diffuse CO2 from the water sample into a deionized water collector. The CO2 ionizes in the collector water, the temperature and conductivity are measured and the concentration of CO2 calculated. This detector is slower responding than an NDIR, but has excellent long term calibration stability (typically six to 12 months), a linear dynamic range of five to six orders of magnitude and a limit of detection of 0.05 ppb. The “Direct Conductivity” CO2 detection method measures the conductivity of the sample water directly. To accurately measure CO2 with this method, the water sample must be composed of only CO2, deionized water, OH-, HCO3- and H+(deionized water in equilibrium with CO2). When this is true, the CO2 concentration can be calculated from the conductivity and the temperature measurements of the sample water. If other ions are present, the accuracy decreases with increasing concentration of these other ions. This method can be applied to the sample water before oxidation to measure the level of IC. The same method can be applied after the oxidation of the sample to measure TC. Although not as specific or selective to CO2 measurements as the prior detectors, it is fast, has excellent calibration stability (typically six to twelve months), and has a low limit of detection (about 0.05 ppb). The “Differential Conductivity” CO2 detection method produces a differential conductivity signal (pre and post oxidation). The analyzers using this method are designed to only partially oxidize the organics to the very conductive organic acids stage (not completely to CO2) and measure organic acids not CO2. The analyzer measures the difference between the initial sample water conductivity and the post oxidation sample conductivity, and relates this to specific organic compound calibration tables. 11.1.7

Limit Response and System Suitability Testing


Apparatus Requirements for Limit Response and System Suitability Tests

a) Reagent Water (r W) complying with the USP definition in section 661 of USP 23, having a TOC level of not more than 0.25 mg/l. b) Standard Solution (r S 105° C for 4 hours)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein ) containing 1.19 mgHerzlia, of sucrose (produced from r ID number: 216389

W

and USP Sucrose RS dried at

c) System Suitability Solution (r SS) produced from r W and USP 1,4-Benzoquinone RS (containing 0. 5 mg/l of carbon)


Instrument Standardization (Limit Response Test)

USP require that TOC instrument must be standardized by performing a test on each water sample or “test solution.”

148


APPENDIX The test solution meets the requirement if the response for the standard solution less the response for the reagent water used to produce the standard solution is greater than the test solution response, or: r t < ( r S - r W ). For in-line testing, standardization (determination of the limit response) may not be practically performed with each TOC reading; therefore, standardization (determination of the limit response) once per operating day (or less frequent) may be appropriate. Support data generated from standardizations performed over a suitable period could be used to justify modifications to the testing frequency, based on system reliability, repeatability and stability, i.e., TOC levels may be maintained, nominally, far below the limit response over a suitable period, thus decreasing the risk in supporting less frequent standardization testing. Standardization (Limit Response) Testing for In-Line Instruments In-line instruments must be disconnected from the water system to conduct Standardization (Limit Response) tests. At once per day, these tests represent a considerable investment. TOC meters with built in provisions for automating these tests and minimizing materials have the potential for considerable savings in both time and expense. Instrument Suitability or Response Efficiency An instrument is “suitable” if its response efficiency is within ±15% of the theoretical response. Suitability tests may only be performed off-line, or with the in-line instrument disconnected. TOC measuring equipment must be tested for suitability “periodically” which may range from, each water sample test for off-line lab testing, to once per month for in-line testing, depending upon the experience with the system and the data produced from suitability tests. The Instrument Suitability Response Efficiency is equal to 100 times the ratio of the Suitability solution response and the Standard solution response, or: 100[(r SS - r W)/(r S - r W)] = 100% ± 15%. Suitability Testing for In-Line Instruments In-Line instruments also must be disconnected from the water system to conduct Suitability tests. Suitability tests may be conducted together with the standardization tests.


TOC meters with built in provisions for automating both the standardization and suitability tests have the potential for further savings. Prepackaged traceable and certified standards are available from some manufacturers for both standardization and suitability testing. Special Requirements


Organic contamination may be detected from different sources. Once a commitment is made to monitor using a sensitive TOC meter, care must be exercised in controlling TOC in numerous materials used to support and maintain the water purification systems. These materials may include:


•

Replaced Filter Cartridges


149

APPENDIX •

Particles from Valves, Seats, Gaskets, etc.

•

Soap and Detergent

•

Chemicals used for General Cleaning, etc.

•

Regeneration and Sanitization Materials

•

Alcohol and other solvents used to clean and sanitize seals and gaskets

•

Plastics used for sampling apparatus (beakers, bottles, etc.) or other applications that may leach out organic chemicals into the water samples to be tested

•

DI resin detected after regeneration or when beds are switched. Sources of TOC from ion exchange resin beds include: unconverted monomers or low molecular weight polymers; decomposition products and compounds resulting from oxidation or hydrolysis of the organic resins; organics in water used to regenerate and rinse ion exchange beds.

New or replaced DI resin may be recycled five or six times to remove leachables, or resin may be specified as preconditioned. A TOC rinse down certification curve is available from most resin suppliers. Sample containers for off-line sampling must be scrupulously cleaned of organic residues and care must be exercised in handling the containers to avoid transferring natural skin oils onto the container surfaces. Calibration of TOC Meters Calibration should be performed using solutions of a known carbon content, covering the normal range of the instrument. The frequency of calibration should ensure that the levels of accuracy are maintained. Refer to manufacturer for specific recommendations on both method and frequency. Calibration should be performed independent, and in addition to, Standardization and Suitability testing. Dual Purpose TOC/Conductivity Meters A number of TOC meters designed for in-line applications include conductivity measurements that are claimed to be in accordance with USP. These instruments use the conductivity method of CO2 detection and utilize the conductivity reading taken prior to water processing. To use this dual purpose instrument to measure compendial water conductivity, it is important to be able to calibrate the conductivity cell separately and ensure that it contains a cell constant adjustable and maintainable to the limits defined; an accurate temperature measurement being included since most modern conductivity instruments monitor temperature; a conductivity and resolution accuracy as defined and a conductivity calibration which must be accomplished by replacing the conductivity cell with a NIST-traceable precision resistor, accurate to ±0.1% or by an equivalently accurate adjustable resistance device.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Microbial and Endotoxins are traditionally sampled at the points of use in a water system. See Chapter 2, Section 2.3 USP Regulated Water Quality. ID number: 216389 11.1.8

USP Microbial and Endotoxin Testing

11.1.9

USP pH Testing


See Chapter 2, Section 2.3 USP Regulated Water Quality (pH testing to support in-line conductivity testing was eliminated in May 1998.)

150


APPENDIX 11.1.9.1

Calibration of pH Instruments

See Chapter 2, Section 2.3 USP Regulated Water Quality.

11.2

EUROPEAN PERSPECTIVE

11.2.1

Regulatory Structure

The pharmaceutical industry within the nations that make up the European Union (EU) is regulated by the European Agency for the Evaluation of Medicinal Products (EMEA), based in London. This Agency is funded by the EU under the authority of the European Commission (EC), the EU’s policy making body. EMEA is established as an autonomous body to promote public health and free circulation of pharmaceuticals. It is charged with coordinating the resources of the national drug regulatory authorities and has three major functions: •

Centralized drug approval, granting marketing authorization across Europe. This procedure is mandatory for biotech products and optional for other drugs. The EMEA also coordinates the mutual recognition of marketing authorization among the Member States when a decentralized method (application to one or more selected Member States) is used.

•

Supervision of continued use of medicinal products, using the resources of the national agencies, including site inspections and monitoring of adverse effects (“pharmacovigilance”).

•

Coordination of European and internal harmonization of guidance and regulations, particularly within the framework of the International Conference of Harmonization.

Within the Member States, each national has established a national agency. Examples are the Medicines Control Agency (MCA) in the United Kingdom and the Bundeinstitut fur Arzneimittel and Medizinprodukte (BfArM) in Germany. These are responsible for national registrations, inspections, and enforcement of regulations within their national boundaries. Another important body with membership from several nations both within and without the EU, is the Pharmaceutical Inspection Convention (PIC), which has been superseded by the Pharmaceutical Inspection Cooperation Scheme (PICS). These bodies provide entirely non-binding guidance to member nations, most of which are harmonized with the EU. 11.2.2

Regulations Governing Water and Steam

The EC recognizes the European Pharmacopoeia (EP) as the source of compendial water standards for Purified Water and Water for Injection. The use of these waters parallels that in the United States. Nations outside the EU may maintain national compendia, which differ in some parts from the EP.


The EP does not regulate Clean Steam. In Europe, the requirements for the chemical quality of steam to be used in the sterilization of medicinal products in autoclaves are governed by European Standard EN 285. The EU cGMP Annex for Sterile Products requires that steam be “of suitable quality and does not contain additives which could cause contamination of product or equipment.” Although similar in concept to US requirements, interpretation of this standard by European investigators may be quite different. Insight into interpretation by inspectors may be found in important guidance on the quality of steam found in Health Technical Memorandum HTM-2010, published by the United Kingdom National Health Service (NHS Estates). [Editor’s Note: criteria described in HTM-2010 are of major concern in the sterilization of porous autoclave loads and present less of an issue in the sterilization of product in vials, hard goods, or equipment.] In addition, UK HTM-2031 deals directly with the quality of steam to be used in sterilizers.




151

APPENDIX 11.2.3

Water Issues

•

While USP requires that the starting point for compendial waters must meet the national drinking water standard, the EP requires only that the history of the starting water be documented.

•

The EP does allow the production of Water for Injection by distillation only. There are some pharmacopoeias, notably among the former Soviet bloc, which allow WFI produced by reverse osmosis.

•

The EP requires sample sizes of 100 ml for purified water and 500 ml for WFI. The USP is not definitive on these sample sizes.

•

EP has not accepted the substitution of conductivity/resistivity for the traditional wet chemistry analyses of ionic contaminants. There is some early discussion about adopting a conductivity test, but it is likely that this may be quite different from the USP test.

•

The EP has not added the test for TOC.

•

EP continues to require the test for pH as an independent test. This is likely to remain, even in light of potential changes.

•

European inspectors seem to be sensitive to the drainability of systems through points of use. Additional low point drains are acceptable only if necessary. Guidance in this area remains unclear.

11.2.4 •

Steam Issues

HTM-2010 emphasizes the dryness requirements for steam. If steam is too wet, it may cause dampness in porous loads (e.g., hospital gowns). If it is “too dry,” it may become superheated upon expansion into the chamber, reducing the sterilizing effectiveness. [Editor’s Note: considering the use of modern, wellcontrolled steam generators which produce saturated steam, and the large mass made up by the sterilizer and the load, excess dryness is seldom a problem. Excess wetness is controlled by proper insulation of steam lines and judicious use of steam traps to remove condensate.] Standard EN-285 requires steam for use in sterilizers to have a dryness value of not less than 0.9 (0.95 for metal loads). In practice, dryness between 0.9 and 1.0 will not present a problem if the final pressure reduction into the chamber is around 2:1. A method of testing dryness may be found in HTM-2010, part 3.

•

Superheat is also an issue of concern. Superheated steam is not as effective a sterilizing medium as is saturated steam. It may result from adiabatic expansion (as across a control valve) an exothermic reaction resultant from the re-hydration of a hygroscopic load, or the application of jacket heat above the saturation temperature of the internal steam. A specification and test method for superheat may be found in HTM-2010. [Editor’s Note: again, considering the production of saturated steam by modern generators, the control of jacket heat, and the condensate resulting from loss of heat to the sterilizer and load, superheat is an uncommon problem.]


•

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein The third area of concern which European Herzlia, inspectors have focused on is Non-Condensable Gas (NCGs). Major NCGs in steam are air and carbon dioxide. These may result from the failure to degas boiler/ generator feed water. They present in those areas where localized “pockets” of gas are allowed IDa problem number: 216389

to accumulate, preventing the penetration of steam. This may be effected by preheating the feed water in a vented tank at above 80°C. A test of method may be found in HTM-2010. [Editor’s Note: the presence of air in a well-mixed sterilizer is common practice and does not reduce the effectiveness of sterilizing steam.]


152


APPENDIX 11.3

PASSIVATION

11.3.1

Introduction

Pharmaceutical equipment and high purity water systems are designed so that product contact surfaces are not reactive, additive, or absorptive so the drug product is not adversely altered. High purity water systems are primarily composed of austenitic stainless steel (SS) materials due to their corrosion resistant and contaminant free properties. Passivation is performed to maximize the metal’s corrosion resistance. The stainless steel is sulfuric/nitric/hydroflouric acid pickled at the mill to remove manganese sulfide inclusions, scale, and other impurities or imperfections from the surface of the steel. As the steel is removed from the pickling bath, a thin oxide layer forms immediately over the surface. This oxide layer is what renders the stainless steel passive and non-reactive to corrosion. Any 300 series chromium steels containing 17% or more chromium that has been handled, welded, or worked should be passivated prior to service and suitably cleaned prior to passivation. Passivation is the method used to fortify the steel surface by strong oxidizing chemicals such as nitric acid. The acid depletes the steel surface of acid soluble species, leaving the highly reactive chromium on the surface in a compounded oxide form. 11.3.2

Advantages of Passivation

When SS systems are fabricated, the welding process destroys the existing passive film and compromises the metal’s ability to ward off the corrosive process. This is particularly applicable in those zones that are either heat affected or have had residues remain in contact with the metal surface for prolonged periods. Passivating then provides a method to restore the integrity of the metals corrosion resistant surfaces that were disturbed. Passivation must be proceeded by a cleaning process. 11.3.3

The Chemical Process

Excessive electron depletion of the upper film and an inadequate supply of oxygen (molecular O2) will ensure the formation of surface corrosion products. When this occurs, the chromium (Crn+) separates from the surface and opens the way for oxidation of the iron (Fe) and nickel (Ni), lower in the metal lattice. Establishing a passive surface or film on austenitic SS is essential to maximize the corrosion resistance that the metals offer. Passive surfaces on these metals occur naturally when exposed to an oxidizing environment. Sources of oxygen include air, aerated water, and other oxidizing atmospheres. Formation of a substantial uniform oxidized corrosion resistant surface or film is the result of passivation. Besides natural occurring passivation, chemical and electro-chemical processes can be used to obtain an anodic oxide film. Nitric acid solution (HNO3), is an oxidizing acid (depletes electron from the metal surface) which erodes the metal. This initial reaction or oxidation resists further chemical reaction on the metal surface. Metals that have such a state are called “passive” and the phenomenon itself is called “passivity.”


The chromium oxide film thickness typically ranges from 0.5-5.0 nm, averaging 2.0-3.0 nm. The chrome to iron ratio measured in atomic percent within the chromium oxide should be at least one with ratios of two or more being optimal. 11.3.4

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Passivation Procedures ID number: 216389

Numerous procedures are available for passivating; they share the commonality of consisting of four main steps which are:


1) Wash (Solvent Degreasing)


153

APPENDIX 2) Water Rinse 3) Acid Wash (Passivation Step) 4) Final Water Rinse Proper preparation of the metal surface to obtain a uniform non-defective passive film mandates the metal surface be completely clean and void of any organic or inorganic soils, free iron, metallic contaminants, or corrosive products.

The First Step (Degreasing) of the procedure is designed to remove dirt, dust, oil, and grease. A watersoluble detergent is used to accomplish this, or a solvent. The Second Step (Water Rinse) is required to remove dissolved and freed soils and the detergent itself from the metal being cleaned. The Third Step (Acid Wash) is to remove free iron, metallic residues, oxides, and other corrosion products from the surface of the metal. By removing these soils from the metal surface and providing an oxidizing atmosphere, the passive film is allowed to form and the passivation is accomplished. Inorganic acids are typically used in this step of the procedure. The Fourth Step (Final Water Rinse) - The acidic solution is flushed and the system is rinsed until the quality of the effluent is equal to that of the influent. The American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM A 380-96, “Standard Recommended Practice for Cleaning and Descaling Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment and Systems,” is an excellent source of information about passivation. It includes cleaning and passivation procedures, chemical applications, methodology, and testing procedures. The standard is valuable in establishing specific passivation and other specialized cleaning procedures. Establishing an effective passivation procedure can be obtained by using the following guidelines: •

Start with an accepted or specified procedure. (See the chart on the next page.)

•

Obtain weld coupons from the system or have weld coupons made for testing purposes.

•

Perform specified procedure along with alternate procedures to offer a choice, meeting specific situations, or requests.

•

Confirm the effectiveness of the procedures tested with specified field and/or laboratory testing.

•

This process for confirming the effectiveness of a specified procedure or qualifying alternative procedures should be included in the passivation documentation being submitted as part of the final validation package.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 11.3.5 Passivation Chemical Alternatives Herzlia, Nitric acid, a strong oxidizing acid, is the number: most common acid specified for passivation. Besides its ability to ID 216389

produce a free iron surface, the acid supplies the oxidizing atmosphere needed for passivation to occur. Because nitric acid is a corrosive chemical, extreme care must be used with handling, storage, and use. Federal Specification QQ-P-35C (1988) is an excellent reference for obtaining guidelines when using nitric acid on a variety of stainless steel alloys.


154


APPENDIX Although nitric acid has traditionally been the preferred passivating acid, the trend in use of passivating solutions is to reduce chemical aggressiveness and to make safety, cost, and the environmental impact of the waste solution effluents a consideration. Citric acid and ammonium citrate (ammoniated citric acid) are gaining popularity as alternatives to using nitric acid. The safety these chemicals offer the personnel and the work environment are desirable qualities. The ASTM Standard A 380 (1996) refers to these acids as cleaning acids, not passivating acids. This distinction has probably been made because the acids are not oxidizers as is nitric acid. The standard states that the citric acid-sodium nitrate treatment is the least hazardous for removal of free iron and other metallic contamination and light surface contamination. To achieve a true oxidation chelating agents in conjunction with citric acid and ammonium citrate has recently been introduced to the pharmaceutical/biotech industry. Phosphoric acid is a weak oxidizing acid sometimes specified in passivation procedures; however, there is no formal documentation referencing the use of phosphoric acid as a passivating acid. Chelants, otherwise known as sequestering agents or co-ordination compounds, which include all the standard water softening compounds such as Sodium tri-polyphosphate (STPP), Nitrilotriacetic acid (NTA), and Ethylene Diamine Tetra Acetic acid (EDTA) may be compounded into acid passivation solutions to enhance metal ion extraction. Orbital welding in conjunction with the increased use of electropolished tubing decreases the aggressiveness required of the passivating acids during the initial passivation. Decreasing acid contact time, temperature, and/or concentration accommodates the quality of the welds and already passive surface of the electropolished stainless steel. 11.3.6

Chemical Application Methods

Passivation can be accomplished using a variety of applications. Among these are: Circulation

Recirculating through distribution systems

One Way Intermittent Flow

Large non-recirculating distribution

Spraying

Tank interiors

Tank Immersion

Numerous small parts

Prefabricated tubing

Swabbing/Wiping

Isolated Areas/Tank/Equipment Exteriors

Equipment that does not allow spraying or other applications

Long one way pipe runs systems


When detergent washing, agitation or impingement provides the best results. During the acid wash step, chemical contact is usually sufficient. Recirculation is the preferred application method for performing passivation procedures. Recirculating allows flow rate criteria, usually specified at 5 feet per second (1.5 m/sec), to be achieved. Meeting flow rate requirements of a procedure should not be confused with particle removal. Many people assume when high flow rates are used that particle removal will be achieved. This is not true. Particle removal is achieved by including the total linear feet of the system into the appropriate mathematical equation. A recirculating water system of 1000 feet (300 meters) with a consistent tube diameter would require as much as 25 hours of filtered recirculation time for total particle removal.



155

APPENDIX 11.3.7

Tests for Cleanliness and Passivity

There are several tests available to determine an acceptable level of cleanliness. Should confirmation of cleanliness be required prior to continuing with the passivation procedure, the water break free surface test, wipe test, or ultraviolet light testing are just a few of the tests that could be performed. These tests are for gross cleanliness inspections as stated in the ASTM Standard A 380 (1996). Once the passivation procedure is completed, a test method should be used to confirm or establish confidence that the passivation procedure has been successful. One inexpensive method is the Ferroxyl Test for free iron as set forth in the A380 (1996). The test is used to detect surface iron contamination, i.e., iron salt residue from pickling, iron tool scratches on the stainless steel surface, iron deposits at weld areas, and iron oxides. The testing solution is applied to the surface being tested. A blue stain appearing within 15 seconds of application indicates presence of free iron. Testing for a passive surface is usually accomplished by looking for traces of free iron on the metal surface. The assumption is made that if there is no detectable free iron, the metal surface is clean enough for a uniform oxide film to develop. Another excellent source for specific testing methods is the Military Standard 753B (1985). Both Standards discuss specific tests for detecting free iron. They include Water Immersion/ Water Wetting and Drying Test, High Humidity Test, Copper Sulfate Test, and Ferroxyl/Potassium Ferricyanide-Nitric Acid Test. Direct testing for a passive surface can be accomplished by X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) testing which is used to measure the oxidation states of elements found on the metal surface. Another direct, destructive testing method is Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES) which measures the elemental chrome/iron ratio on the metal surface and sub-surface with depth profiling. The direct testing methods for passivity supply detailed information about the oxide film itself rather than indirect observations. XPS or AES testing offers direct evidence as to whether the passivation procedure being used is effective or not. These methods of testing are more costly than the other above mentioned tests and are ideal for use with weld coupons to determine the effectiveness of the passivation procedure for the system. 11.3.8

Modified Passivation Procedures

A passivation procedure can be modified to deal with a variety of soils, surface finishes and weld area conditions. Adjusting contact times and solution’s temperature and concentration would be the simplest way to modify a specific procedure. Sometimes detergent wash or acid wash chemicals are changed or modified with additives to remove certain soils. For example, when removing rouge, solutions containing sodium hydrosulfite can be substituted for the detergent wash step of the procedure. Citric and Phosphoric Acid also could be used as they do have some ability to remove light rouging. Another example would be the use of Hydrofluoric Acid, or more specifically, Ammonium Bifluoride to remove silica scale. The descaling step and associated rinse would necessitate additional steps being added to the standard procedure.


It is important when developing a passivation procedure, that laboratory testing is performed to determine the effectiveness of your procedure. Without preliminary laboratory testing, an educated guess would have to be made and the results may not prove satisfactory.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Below is a guide that can be used for passivating and de-rouging stainless steel components, piping, and Herzlia, equipment. The chart has some possible options for determination of the contamination and a course of action. ID number: 216389 Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM

156


APPENDIX Cleaning and Passivation Condition/Status

Contamination Analytical Method

Cleaning & Passivation Method

System Chemistry

Procedure

New Component Electropolished

N/A

2,4

3

2

Component Newly Welded

N/A

1,3,4

1,2,3

1,2

New System - Tubing

N/A

2

2,3,4

2

Component/System Discolored (Gold Color)

1

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4,6

2

Component/System Discolored (Brown, Red/Brown Color)

1,2

2,3

4,5,6

3

Component/System Discolored (Black, Blue/Black Color)

2,3

2,3

4,5,6

3

11.3.9

Contamination Analysis

Method 1

Filtration of 1 liter sample through a 0.2-0.5 µm filter and inspect.

Method 2

Quantitative analysis of the specified metals and organic compounds with wet chemistry techniques or as available.

Method 3

SEM or Auger Electron microprobe/spectroscopy for analysis of surface chemistry and contamination.

11.3.10

Cleaning and Passivation Method

Method 1

Clean surface with aqueous cleaning solution, apply passivation paste to surface, rinse surface with DI water until traces of chemicals are removed.

Method 2

Circulate cleaning solutions through piping or vessels by circulation method. Circulate cleaning solutions as required by procedure. Circulate passivation solution as per recommended conditions. Rinse surfaces once through with DI water until conductivity of inlet and outlet fluids are within tolerances.

Method 3

Spray cleaning and passivation solutions onto surfaces of vessels, containers, and equipment as per recommended conditions. Rinse surfaces for minimum of 30 minutes per each rinse stage, and perform triple rinse.

Method 4

Soak components or equipment items in treating solutions or tanks as per recommended conditions. The minimum soak time per each solution is two hours. Process requires cleaning, passivation, and rinsing as a minimum. The cleaning system should include circulation, filtration, and heating.




157

APPENDIX 11.3.11

System Chemistry

Chemistry 1

Nitric acid passivation is performed at Ambient Temperature for 30 to 60 minutes and at 5060°C for 20 to 40 minutes.

Chemistry 2

Alkaline degreasing is performed with detergents (phosphates, sodium hydroxide, and potassium hydroxide), pH buffers, and surfactant. The process will remove organic films and particulate debris from the surface of the stainless steel. Utilize approximately 1.0-2.0% detergent, 0.2-0.5% buffer and 0.01-0.2% surfactant.

Chemistry 3

Citric acid/chelant passivation is performed with chelants, reducing agents, surfactants, and pH buffers. These systems are proprietary processes and the exact chemistry and percentages are not available. The chelant systems are able to remove most metal contamination from the surface including iron, manganese, aluminum, and copper. The systems include 3.0-5.0% Citric acid and a variety of chelants, reducing agents, pH buffers, and surfactants.

Chemistry 4

Mineral acid cleaning and passivation can be performed for iron oxide removal or passivation. Typical mineral acids include phosphoric, sulfuric or sulfamic acid. These acids can be utilized at 3.0-10.0% concentrations and at a variety of temperatures. Sulfuric acid is not typically used due to its highly hazardous nature.

Chemistry 5

Intensified acid/chelant systems are utilized for removal of high temperature iron oxide films, silica scales, and organic/carbon films. These systems are a citric based solution with additional organic acids, strong reducing agents, and acid chelants. These systems can use fluorides for silica removal. After strong acid cleaning in a reducing environment, it is recommended that an oxidizing flush be used to ensure oxidation at the surface, removal of organic films, and sanitization of the system.

Chemistry 6

Sodium Hydrosulfite, a strong reducing agent, typically used at 5% by weight at 120 to 160°F for two to four hours.

11.3.12

Procedures

11.3.12.1

Procedure 1

Clean surface of organic film and other debris. a) Rinse surface with DI water. b) Apply gelled acid onto surface at ambient temperature.


c) Brush passivating agent on surface very 15 minutes, maintain a wet surface.

d) After one hour minimum, brush surface with sodium bicarbonate solution until all reaction ceases.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein e) Rinse surface with DI water until all tracesHerzlia, of chemicals are removed. 11.3.12.2 Procedure 2 ID number: 216389 a) Fill system with DI water and perform leak test with circulation pump.


b) Circulate for a minimum of one to two hours with alkaline degrease stages and heat to 60-80°C with filtration. c) Drain and rinse with DI water.

158


APPENDIX d) Circulate for a minimum of one to two hours with passivating acid solution and heat to 60 - 80°C. e) Drain and rinse with DI water.

11.3.12.3

Procedure 3

a) Fill system with DI water and perform leak test with circulation pump. b) Circulate for a minimum of two hours with alkaline degrease stages and heat to 60 - 80°C with filtration. c) Drain and rinse with DI water. d) Circulate for a minimum of eight hours with intensified passivating acid solution and heat to 60 - 80°C. e) Drain and rinse with DI water. f)

Flush with oxidizing/sanitization solution.

g) Drain and rinse with DI water. 11.3.13

Rouging

Rouging is seen in many water systems, usually high temperature (80°C) distilled water and clean steam systems. Rouge is not limited to storage and distribution systems; it also can be found in distillation and clean steam generating equipment. The main constituent of the rouge film is ferric oxide, but it can contain iron, chromium, and nickel of different forms. From Auger Electron Spectroscopy, it has been found that the outer layer of a rouge film is carbon rich, and the underlying region is iron and oxygen rich, probably iron oxide. Over time, the film uniformly distributes itself throughout the system. The exact mechanism of the rouge formation and proliferation is unknown. Because the phenomenon occurs in systems that offer the most corrosive environment, it is thought that low molecular weight ions of the stainless steel, such as iron, are drawn to the metal surface or are dissolved and uniformly re-deposited throughout the system. Others feel the rouge is an external contaminant probably colloidal in nature that once in the system, uniformly deposits itself. Rouging would seem to be very site (facility) specific because of the variety in appearance and texture. Rouge can be observed in a variety of colors including; orange, light-red, red, reddish-brown, purple, blue, gray, and black. It can be a very loose film, dust like in appearance and texture that can be readily wiped off to a tight pertinacious film that requires scraping with a sharp instrument to be removed. In addition to the diversification already discussed, rouge can be multi-layered exhibiting different colors and textures. Traditionally the red rouges are most common in high purity high temperature water systems, while the blue/black rouges are typically found in clean steam systems.


Evidence of the migration of rouging in distribution systems can be demonstrated by monitoring a system over a period of time. Key places to look for rouging are still and clean steam generator discharge lines, tank water/vapor interface, pump heads, Teflon® diaphragms on diaphragm valves, interior surface of tank spray ball, and heat effected area of welds. Rouge deposition seems to have an affinity for Teflon® and would be one of the first places to look for signs of system rouging.


In some cases, the rouging appears as quickly as a month or two after system start up. In other cases, it is several years before rouging is observed. In either case rouging is an industry wide phenomena. In a specific case, a facility cold WFI system would re-rouge within a week of being derouged and passivated. The system was derouged and passivated a total of three times. Each time, within a week, the system was totally rouged again. The specific cause was never determined.



159

APPENDIX The presence of rouge in high purity water systems has not been proven to effect water quality. The FDA has no written position addressing rouging, its existence, or presence in high temperature high purity water and clean steam systems. Their criterion has and remains to be in meeting established USP standards for water quality. There is some fear that as the unwanted film develops, it might eventually slough off and be dispersed throughout the system. This, in fact, does occur and is manifested in systems with filtered use points. Filters become discolored with the typical reddish-brown rouge color. Phosphoric, citric, oxalic acids, and ammonium citrates are used depending on the severity of the problem. Oxalic acid solutions are used for the worst cases of rouge. Passivation with nitric acid is required after an oxalic acid rinse. 11.3.14

Preparing Systems for Passivation

Hydrostatic pressure testing is the first test in preparing a system for passivation. All newly constructed or modified systems require pressure testing prior to implementing any chemical procedure. The second check prior to passivation is to confirm the compatibility of the system, its components, and the passivating solutions. This would include in-line instrumentation, flow meters, regulating valves ultraviolet lights, pumps, pump seals, filter membranes, gasket and seal materials, and other specialized in-line devices. The manufacturer or supplier should be consulted to determine whether their equipment is compatible with passivating solutions. Items that are not compatible should be removed from the system and replaced with a blank, valve, spool piece, or temporary jumper hose. In some cases with in-line instrumentation, chemical incompatibility may lie in the effect it has on instrument calibration. Incompatible components should be processed independent of the main system. Once the system/chemical compatibility has been established, the system to be passivated should be isolated from existing systems, process equipment, utility tie-ins, etc. In most cases, in-line heat exchangers (excluding plate and frame design) and small filter housings (filter elements removed) are left in place and flowed through. This is acceptable as long as the ability to vent and drain is available. Isolated equipment that requires passivation should be handled independently from the main system unless, by agreement, it is left in-line and flowed through. All isolation points must be valved to avoid forming dead legs in the system being passivated. Elimination of all dead legs is critical to ensure chemical contact and complete rinsing. High point vents and low point drains are desirable for complete filling and draining of systems. In distribution systems where high point vents are not installed, high velocity flow and flow restriction techniques can be used to ensure complete filling of the system. After the system has been pressure tested, compatibility has been confirmed, the system isolated and dead legs valved, consideration must be given to automated controls that govern the system.


Are all the automatic valves operational?

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Will in-line temperature sensors open diverter valves if unusual temperatures are detected? ID number: 216389 Will valve alignments atypical of normal system operation be permitted?

Can the desired flow path safely and effectively be achieved.


Passivation contractors generally supply temporary equipment such as circulating vessels, pumps, heat exchangers, flow meters, filters, hoses, spray heads, fittings, specialized adapters or transition fittings, and neutralization vessels. All this equipment should be inspected to assure it meets the requirements for its intended use.

160


APPENDIX 11.3.15

Disposal of Passivation Chemicals

Disposal of waste solutions is an important issue. The chemicals discussed for cleaning and passivating are all water-soluble and can easily be neutralized. Except for heavy metals dissolved in the acid wash solution, the only criterion that makes the waste solutions hazardous is having the pH outside the range of 2 to 12.5. It is the heavy metals contained in the waste effluent that can cause an environmental or disposal problem. Of the 13 priority pollutant metals tested for, two are found in elevated levels in passivation waste effluent waters. The two heavy metals are chromium and nickel. Fluids discharged must meet the site’s discharge temperature requirements. There are three options for dealing with waste solutions generated when passivating: •

They can be put into chemical drains. This can only be done where compatible drain and treatment systems are available.

•

Neutralize waste solutions in contractor-supplied equipment and discharge through chemical drain to site treatment system.

•

Off-site disposal is the final option. It is the most costly form of disposal.

Should a site waste treatment system not be available, permission could be obtained from the municipal or private sewer authority to put neutralized waste solutions to sanitary drains. Under no conditions should any waste solutions in any form be permitted to enter storm sewer systems You will, however, receive documentation confirming proper disposal of waste solutions. Documentation would include a bill of lading or hazardous waste manifest and receipts from the state certified treatment facility where the waste solutions are being transported and treated. When off-site disposal is being used, it is important to verify the credentials of the hauler and final destination site before utilizing their services. Ultimately, disposing of waste solutions in a proper and legal manner is the responsibility of all involved parties. The owner of the property where the waste solutions are generated, contractors, subcontractors involved with the use of the chemicals, haulers, and the final waste treatment facility would all have some liability for proper disposal of waste solutions. 11.3.16

Documentation

Complete and detailed documentation should be kept as the procedure is being performed. Specifics on chemical concentrations, temperatures, contact time, quality of rinse water supply, and effluent sample readings should all be recorded.


Some contractors use job log sheets to record chronological job data including specifics from the time the contractor arrives on-site until the time he leaves. In addition to job log sheets, passivation log sheets should be completed. Detailed information, as discussed above, can be plugged into a “fill in the blank” form supplied by passivation contractor, validation firm, or owner. No matter how the information is recorded, the important thing is that detailed and accurate documentation is kept. The following information can be submitted to the owner and become incorporated into the final validation documentation:


•

Passivation Procedure

•

Miscellaneous Pertinent Information

•

Procedure Development Data



161

APPENDIX •

Testing Procedure and Equipment

•

Calibration Documentation

•

Passivation Log Sheets

•

Chemical Batch Record Information

•

Marked up system drawings, completed using point check list or line identification list.

11.4

PRETREATMENT PROCESSES

11.4.1

Turbidity and Particulates

11.4.1.1

Definitions

Particulates are insoluble suspended materials present in the water. Concentrations are measured in mg/l. Sources of particulates are dust, pollen, silica, insoluble minerals, and corrosion products. Turbidity is a cloudy appearance in water caused by the presence of suspended and colloidal materials. Rather than a physical property, it is an optical property based on the amount of light reflected by the suspended particles and is measured in Nephelometric Turbidity Unit (NTU). The EPA limit for turbidity in drinking water is 1 NTU. Turbidity cannot be related to particulates since it is affected more by particle size, shape, and color rather than concentration. Light colored particles reflect more light than dark colored particles and many small particles reflect more light than a few larger particles of equivalent concentration. Removal of particulates and turbidity is required to prevent fouling/plugging of final treatment processes using a membrane (RO).

11.4.1.2

Filtration Mechanisms

The principal methods for removal of turbidity and particulates are: •

clarification and the accompanying operations of flocculation, coagulation, and sedimentation

•

media filtration including single and multimedia filtration

•

barrier filtration included pre-coat filter, surface, and depth media such as cartridges and finer barriers such as nanofiltration or ultrafiltration


Factors affecting the removal of turbidity and particulates are: • •

•

particle size and shape relative to the filtration media

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, surface effects including surfaceID tension, hydrogen bonding, and electrostatics number: 216389

tendency of the particles to adhere to each other or the media which may be enhanced by addition of a flocculating agent or alum (agglomeration)

11.4.1.3

Clarification


Clarification is one method used by municipalities and large water treatment suppliers for removal of particulates and turbidity. Addition of alum, lime/FeCl3, or other flocculating agents, and pH adjustment aids the sedimentation and clarification to remove particles larger than 25µm. Flow rates are generally large and cost/

162


APPENDIX gallon is low. This process is typically not found in the production of purified water because it would be redundant to the treatment typically done by a municipality. The scale of these systems is much larger than most purified water systems and clarification is not 100% efficient so that some additional filtration method would be required to prevent particulates from being retained by filtration and cause blockage in subsequent pretreatment operations such as ion exchange, carbon beds, and fine barrier filtration.

11.4.1.4

Media Filtration

Media filtration using a depth filter is the most common method of removing particulates from the water in pharmaceutical water systems. It also may have some minor effect on turbidity. Design can be with either a single size media or multi-sized media in a tank that has the means to support the media. With multi-sized media, the larger media is typically at the top with the main flow direction downward through progressively finer layers of media. The porosity of the media bed selected permits removal of particles down to a size of 10-40 µm. Accumulated particulates are removed by a back flush operation based on increase in pressure drop or time. This back flush in the upward direction also decompresses the filter bed and is followed by a rinse to resettle the media and remove fines. This back flush is generally considered a sanitary rather than chemical waste and is typically 3-10x the design flow rate for a period of about 30 minutes. Following the back flush, a short flush to drain in the direction of the process flow is required to resettle the bed and remove fines. The filtration media in a depth filter may be sand, anthracite, carbon, or manganese. Sand is the most common because of cost and availability in a wide range of sizes and purities. Anthracite might be used where leaching of the silica from a sand filter is a problem due to high temperatures or alkalinity. Depth filters using anthracite often have higher filtration rates over extended runs and require less back washing (and regeneration) because of the sharply angular particles rather than the rounded silica particles. A depth filter using carbon might be selected if the water has a high loading of organics, or if there is a particular reason to combine removal or particulates, organics, and chlorine. The carbon is usually a course retention layer under an extended layer of an activated granular carbon such as coconut, lignite, or anthracite. A depth filter using particles coated with potassium permanganate or manganese zeolite as the depth media might be selected for water having high concentrations of iron or manganese. It also may oxidize sulfur or hydrogen sulfide. Generally, an oxidant, potassium permanganate or chlorine and permanganate is added prior to this filter to convert the metals to the higher oxidation states that are insoluble. Removal down to levels of 0.03 mg/l of iron and 0.05 mg/l of manganese are possible. Microbial growth is a key consideration in any filter, but particularly a depth filter. This occurs because of the large surface areas and relatively low velocities. In the case of a carbon filter, the media also is a source of nutrient. Design of the system should include the presence of a disinfectant such as chlorine or chloramine in the feed water, an added disinfectant, or the ability to periodically sanitize with a disinfectant or heat. The filter bed also may be designed with constant recycle to ensure continuous flow through the bed to minimize stagnation and growth.


Advantages: filtering material; works well in a chlorinated environment; large capacity at low cost Disadvantages: filter out only large particles; can be a source of microbiological growth

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Barrier filtration includes cartridge filtration, pre-coat filtration, ultrafiltration, and nanofiltration. This type of filtration has a “barrier” through which the number: water must flow. The barrier retains particulates that are removed ID 216389 11.4.1.5

Barrier Filtration

by changing the barrier (cartridge and pre-coat) or by a purge stream (ultra and nanofiltration).


Barrier filtration is typically not used as the primary method for removal of particulates because of cost of the barrier, labor, and the frequent need for replacement of the barrier due to the relatively high particulate loading in the water entering pretreatment. It is frequently used as a “final clean-up” after the other pretreatment process such as ion exchange or carbon bed filtration, and before going to a final treatment step such as reverse osmosis.


163

APPENDIX As a “final clean-up,” the barrier is often cartridges that might typically have a nominal particle size retention of 1-10 µm for just the removal of particulate carry-over from the previous operations. If, however, the objective is to remove insoluble forms of silica and iron and achieve a SDI (silt density index) of less than 5 for feed to an RO system, the absolute particle size retention might be <1 µm and as such are at the lower end of microfiltration or the upper end of ultrafiltration. An absolute rated cartridge filter or a pre-coat filter can achieve this. The later is usually not used unless the high particulate loading offsets the associated labor cost. Ultrafiltration (0.1-0.001 µm) and nanofiltration (0.005-0.0005 µm) are methods of barrier filtration. They are not used as for primary removal of particulates for the reasons noted above, particularly cost and rapid blinding of the membrane. Ultrafiltration is discussed in Section 11.4.4.3E. Advantages:

low initial cost; can vary particle size retention by cartridge selection

Disadvantages: Cartridge filtration is an expensive way to remove solids due to the cost of cartridges and labor if solids concentration is high; potential for microbial growth in a non-chlorinated environment. 11.4.2

Hardness and Metals-Ion Exchange

An ion exchange system consists of a tank containing small beads of synthetic resin. The beads are treated to selectively absorb either cations or anions and exchange these ions based upon their relative activity compared to the resin. This process of ion exchange will continue until all of the available exchange sites are filled, at which point the resin is exhausted and must be regenerated by the appropriate chemicals. For removal of hardness and metals, a cation exchange system will remove positively charged ions (metals) and exchange them for sodium ions. Ion exchange resins that remove cations or anions and replace them with hydrogen and hydroxyl ions are discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. The presence of calcium (Ca) and magnesium (Mg) in a water supply is commonly known as “hardness.” It is usually expressed in grains per gallon (gpg). Ion exchange is the principal method of removing hardness from water in a pretreatment system. The process of removing hardness is often called “softening.” This is required to prevent scale formation in final treatment operations such as RO and distillation.

11.4.2.1

Water Softening

Hardness in a water supply can result in “scale formation,” which is a deposit of minerals left over after the water has been removed or evaporated. This can be found in boilers, cooling towers, reverse osmosis machines, clean steam generators, and distillation systems. The function of an ion exchange water softener is removal of scale forming calcium and magnesium ions from hard water. In many cases, other multivalent ions such as soluble iron (ferrous) and ionized silica also are removed with softeners.


A standard water softener has four major components: a resin tank, resin, a brine tank, and a valve or controller. The softener resin tank contains the treated ion exchange resin - small beads of polystyrene. Capacity depends on volume of the resin bed. The resin beads initially absorb sodium ions during brine regeneration. The resin has a greater affinity for the multi-valence ions such as calcium and magnesium than it does for sodium. As a result, when hard water is passed through the resin, calcium, magnesium, and other multivalent ions such as iron and silica adhere to the resin, releasing the sodium ions until equilibrium is reached. The water softener has exchanged its sodium ions for the calcium, magnesium, and iron ions in the water.



Regeneration is achieved by passing a sodium chloride (NaCl) solution through the resin, exchanging the hardness ions for sodium ions. The resin’s affinity for the hardness ions is overcome by using a highly concentrated solution of NaCl (brine). The spent brine solution plus the associated water back-flushes and rinses

164


APPENDIX are waste streams and might typically approximate the nominal throughput for one hour for each regeneration cycle. Water softening is a simple, well-documented ion exchange process. It solves a very common form of water contamination: hardness. Regeneration with brine is simple and inexpensive and can be automatic with no strong chemicals required. Advantages:

Industry standard, low cost and effective. Works well in a chlorinated environment for microbial control with chlorine having only minor effect on resin life and efficiency. Inherent in the regeneration is flushing of some microbial growth, but this should not be relied on as the sole means of microbial control.

Disadvantages: salt handling for brine regeneration and disposal of spent brine solution

11.4.2.2

Demineralization/De-ionization

Three multivalent ions (iron, silica, and aluminum) present unusual removal problems. a) Iron Iron is a common water contaminant. It is one of the more difficult contaminants to remove because it may change valence states--that is, change from the water-soluble ferrous state to the insoluble ferric state. In solution, ferrous iron behaves like calcium and magnesium; however, when oxygen or an oxidizing agent is introduced, ferrous iron becomes ferric and precipitates, leading to a rusty (red brown) appearance in water. Certain bacteria can further complicate iron problems. Organisms such as Crenothrix, Sphaerotilus, and Gallionella use iron as an energy source, eventually forming a rusty, gelatinous sludge that can plug up piping and equipment, particularly barrier processes such as nanofiltration and reverse osmosis. One removal method for iron in the oxidized state is a replaceable barrier filtration such as a cartridge filter with an absolute rating of <1 µm. It also can be removed by nanofiltration or reverse osmosis with some membrane fouling, or with sequestering agent dosing that is removed further downstream in RO. b) Silica Like iron, silica may be present in more than one form and is a major problem in some parts of the western United States. It may be a soluble ionized species or an insoluble material, sometimes as a colloidal mixture with organics and other metals. The concentration of ionized silica will be reduced by a water softener and insoluble silica forms can be removed by a replaceable barrier filtration with an absolute rating of <0.5 µm (ultrafilter). The insoluble silica also can be removed by nanofiltration or reverse osmosis with some membrane fouling or by strong base ion exchange.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Like iron and silica, aluminum can exist in multiple valences and its chemistry is complex. It also can be a component of colloid complexes. solubility, particularly as hydrated oxide compounds, is a function IDItsnumber: 216389

c) Aluminum

of pH. Aluminum may be present in the water either naturally or as a result of the alum treatment used by a municipality as part of coagulation. Aluminum that is present as a colloidal component can be removed by fine barrier filtration. Softening or de-ionization removes aluminum in an ionized form. Aluminum also can be removed by reverse osmosis if the pH is <6 or >8. However, between these pH values that are often common in an RO unit, the hydrated aluminum oxides are only partially (about 80%) rejected by RO and often lead to fouling in an RO. If aluminum is a major problem, softening or de-ionization followed by pH adjustment and then RO may be required for removal.



165

APPENDIX 11.4.2.3

Ion Removal

Ion exchange (softening) is often part of the pretreatment process where it is used for removal of hardness. Ion exchange as a total ion removal process (cations are exchanged for hydrogen ions and anions are exchanged for hydroxyl ions) is discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. 11.4.3

Hardness and Metals-Other Processes

This section covers two alternate means (acidification/degasification and nanofiltration) for removing scale forming components in water destined to be further purified in RO systems.

11.4.3.1

Acidification and Degasification

a) Carbon Dioxide Use of a pH adjustment step is common in the process design to favor or inhibit the formation of CO2. As discussed in the section on pH (Section 4.11), injecting acid to a pH of approximately 5.5, will maximize the concentration of CO2 whereas, the addition of a base to a pH of 8.3 will minimize the formation of CO2, converting it to carbonate ion. See Sections 4.6 and 4.11. If high levels of CO2 are present in the water, it can be removed down to a concentration of about 5-10 ppm with an atmospheric degasifier. An atmospheric degasifier has the potential of increasing bacterial burden and should be located where bacterial control measures are available. One example is to locate the degasifier between the stages of a two pass RO system. b) The Acidification/Degasification Process The process is well known and accepted in water purification systems. It is usually used where there is a high flow rate (>50 gpm or 0.18 m3/min) or high hardness (>50 ppm). The incoming water is acidified before the RO unit and a degasifier is used to remove residual CO2 prior to moving on to a second pass RO or a mixed bed de-ionization (DI) unit. In this pretreatment process, the incoming water is adjusted to a pH in the range of 3.8-4.2 with sulfuric acid. The acidified water is sent to a packed column degasifier for removal of free CO2 by air. Removal efficiency of CO2 is better than 98% (typical commercial degasifiers are designed to reduce outlet CO2 to less than 5 ppm). This residual CO2 should not pose a problem for downstream single and mixed bed de-ionization units or electro-deionization. The residual CO2 also can be removed by addition of a base to increase the pH to ³ 8.5 that converts it to CO3= which is removed in the second stage of the RO. Commercial degasifiers are typically from 18 in. in diameter for 50 gpm to 72 in. diameter for 680 gpm (0.46 m for 0.18 m3/min to 1.83 m for 2.57 m3/min). Fan power requirements will range from 1/2 HP to 10 HP for the preceding sizes. Smaller and larger units are possible to meet exact needs. Standard packed tower design methods are used.


The pH after removal of CO2 will be in the range of 6.5-7.0. Just prior to feeding the RO unit, the pH should be adjusted to approximately 8.0-8.5 in order to minimize the amount of free CO2 still remaining in the water and enhance removal of remaining carbonate in the second pass of the RO. The acidification/degasification process has some associated problems. Air borne bacteria, if a problem or concern, can be removed by a HEPA filter in the inlet-air line. The air also may oxidize any iron present to form solids.


Water from the degasification column is usually collected in a holding tank. Further treatment in this tank is possible for TOC removal and microbial control. A multimedia filter usually follows the degasifier for removal

166


APPENDIX of initial incoming solids and any solids generated in the degasification step. When using gasification as a “softening” process, addition of an anti-scaling agent is recommended just before the RO (if used as the first stage in the final treatment step). The anti-scaling agent will be removed along with minerals, high molecular weight organics, and endotoxins in the RO. Monitoring for removal of the anti-scaling agent by the RO is required. Advantages:

Replaces softener and the handling of large amounts of salt for softener regeneration; the CO2 is released to the atmosphere rather than being purged as an ion in a waste steam; the added sulfate ion from acidification is easier to remove in RO than added sodium ion from softening.

Disadvantages: Handling acid for acidification; instrumentation and chemical handling for two pH adjustments.

11.4.3.2

Nanofiltration

Nanofiltration is a pressure driven membrane process with performance characteristics between RO and ultrafiltration. The theoretical pore size of the membrane is one nanometer (10-9 meter). These membranes are sometimes referred to as “softening membranes” and will remove anions and cations. The removal of the larger anions (sulfate for example) is easier than the removal of a smaller anion (chloride) as discussed earlier. The nanofiltration membrane offers high rejection of salts of divalent anions as well as organics with molecular weights above 200. This includes color bodies, trihalomethane precursors, and sulfates. The rejection is lower, but effective for salts with monovalent anions or non-ionized organics with a molecular weight above 150. Typical rejections (based on pure salt solution--mixtures may differ) are shown in the following table: Solute Descriptive

Solute formula

MW

Rejection-%

Sodium chloride

NaCl

58

60

Calcium bicarbonate

Ca(HCO3)2

162

80

Magnesium Sulfate

MgSO4

120

98

Glucose

C6H12O6

180

98

Sucrose

C12H22O11

342

99


Final product conductivity will range from 40-200 µS/cm depending on the inlet water total solids and mineral species make-up. A single pass RO unit will produce conductivity of 5-20 µS/cm.


The investment cost and size of a nanofiltration system is about the same as for a RO system. Energy use is lower because they operate at 70-150 psig (4.76-10.2 bar) as opposed to 200-350 psig (13.6-23.8 bar) for reverse osmosis membranes. Operating pressures are always a function of temperature, feed water salinity, and recovery. Nanofiltration membranes, like other membranes, are to a large extent application dependent. Key factors are the quality of the feed water and the quality of the product water required. The feed water should be processed through a multi-media filtration system prior to going to the membranes. Potential applications are:


•

Removal of color


167

APPENDIX •

Removal of trihalomethane precursors and organic carbon compounds from surface waters

•

Removal of hardness, radium, and TDS from well water

•

Feed waters with high silica

Industrial uses are where moderate water quality is required. 11.4.4

Organics and Microbiological Impurities

11.4.4.1

Introduction

Organic and microbiological contaminants need to be addressed in water treatment systems. The concerns are twofold: contaminants entering the system and contaminants created/growing in the system. Organics usually enter with the feed water, but also may leach from some non-metallic materials of construction. Microbiological contaminants may enter with the feed water or grow in the system and are classified as viable and non-viable. Viables are those organisms that can proliferate, given specific conditions. Non-viables are derived from a breakdown of or a product of a viable organism. The first issue to consider is water source since it affects organic loading. If the water is drawn from a well, organic loading is usually not very great. Surface water (lake, river, or reservoir) will probably contain relatively high levels of organics and the composition and quantity may show seasonal variation. Water from a municipal system is usually chlorinated, sometimes with ammonia added to form chloramines. Microbiological content of the feed water will be low and will generally be inhibited until the chlorine/chloramine is removed. The second issue to address is biological growth occurring within the water pretreatment system. Most pretreatment systems are designed to keep an oxidant in the water for as long as possible to minimize the potential for growth. Special design and maintenance requirements need to be addressed in all equipment that operates without a microbial control agent, chlorine, or chloramine present. These include materials of construction and piping layout (set up and fittings for sampling and periodic sanitization and instrumentation for monitoring) compatible with the sanitization method selected.

11.4.4.2

Organic Contaminants

The organic contaminants found in many water sources are: a) Bacterial Contamination


Bacterial contamination is usually expressed as “total viable microbial counts per ml” or as “Colony Forming Units (CFU) per unit volume.” CFUs are determined by counting the growth resulting from incubating samples. Each colony is assumed to form from one bacterium.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Pyrogens are substances that can produce a fever in mammals. The pyrogens are often endotoxins, organic compounds (lipopolysaccharides) that are shed216389 by bacterial cells during growth, or are the resiID number:

b) Pyrogenic Contamination

due of dead cells. They are chemically and physically stable and are not necessarily destroyed by conditions that kill bacteria. Their molecular weight may vary, generally 12,000 to 320,000. Pyrogen levels are quantified in Endotoxin Units (EU) per milliliter. Pyrogens are of great concern to the pharmaceutical industry, since high concentrations may cause responses in humans ranging from fever to shock or death.


168


APPENDIX c) Total Organic Carbon (TOC) TOC is a measure of organic materials contaminating the water and is specified in mg/l or µg/l. TOC is a direct measure of the organic material that is oxidizable. TOC is a very fine measurement used in sophisticated water treatment systems where any organic contamination can adversely affect product quality. TOC is not a good measure of microbial contamination. d) Dissolved Organic Compounds Organics occur both as the product of the decomposition of natural materials and as synthetic compounds such as oils or pesticides. Naturally occurring organics include Tannin, Humic acid, and Fulvic acids. They detract from the aesthetics of water (i.e. color), but unless they come in contact with certain halogens, they have no known health consequences in normal concentrations. Under conditions of free halogen compounds (principally chlorine and bromine), they form chlorinated hydrocarbons and trihalomethanes (THMs), which are suspected carcinogens.

11.4.4.3

Removal of Organics

A number of technologies are available to remove organic materials, and these have differing benefits and drawbacks. The use of chlorine and chloramines to remove bacterial contamination are the most common and are discussed in the next section. Treatment devices used to remove one or more of the other types of organic material are: a) Ozone Ozone is twice as powerful an oxidant as chlorine. It will prevent microbial growth as well as reduce the concentration of organics. Ozone is not used frequently in pretreatment systems due to the preference for chlorine and materials of construction that are readily degraded by ozone. Ozone is discussed more fully in Chapter 8, Storage and Distribution Systems. b) Strong Base Ion Exchange Organic scavengers or traps are ion exchange resins that contain strong-base anion resins and are regenerated with sodium chloride brine. Most naturally occurring organics have a slightly negative charge and are absorbed by the anion resin. After the resin is loaded, the organics can be displaced by high concentrations of chlorides during regeneration. Advantages:

removes most natural organics; can be regenerated

Disadvantages: disposal of brine and organic solution; requires chemicals for regeneration; brine carryover may result after regeneration


c) Carbon

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Carbon is also one of the methods to remove chlorine. Use of carbon for this and its advantages IDused number: 216389 A carbon bed containing activated carbon will remove organics by adsorption of the organics on the carbon. Periodically the carbon must be replaced when its capacity to adsorb diminishes.

and disadvantages are discussed in Sections 4.7 and 11.4.4.4. d) Microfiltration


Microfiltration includes the use of depth cartridge filters, pleated filters, and cross-flow filtration membrane elements. These filters can remove particles ranging in size from 100 µm down to 0.1 µm, thus


169

APPENDIX capturing bacteria, giardia cyst, and large molecular weight organics. Depth and pleated filters allow water to flow through a wall of fibers perpendicular to the water direction. The particles are trapped on the outside wall of these filters, or within the filter walls (for depth filters), due to the pore size of the filter. The filter will fill up with these particles and then needs to be replaced with a new filter. Cross flow microfiltration forces the water to flow parallel to the filtering media, and the particles which are too large to pass through the filter are then expelled from the system in a concentrate stream to drain (typically 5-10% of the feed flow). This allows the filters to be self-cleaning and eliminates the need to replace these filters frequently. See Section 5.5 for additional discussion. e) Ultrafiltration Ultrafiltration can be used to remove organics and bacteria, as well as viruses and pyrogens from a water source. Filtration is typically from 0.1 down to 0.001 µm. Cross flow ultrafiltration forces the water to flow parallel to the filter media, and the particles which are too large to pass through the membrane elements are then expelled from the system in a concentrate stream to drain (typically 5-10% of the feed flow). This allows the filters to be self-cleaning and eliminates the need to replace these membrane elements frequently. The UF membrane elements will need to have any suspended solids removed from the feed stream prior to the UF system. Advantages:

effective filtering barrier; no by-products; works with chlorine

Disadvantages: medium to high capital cost; 10% constant concentrate stream; can be source of microbial growth f)

Reverse Osmosis (RO) RO, if included in a pretreatment system to remove anions and/or cations, also will remove organics and microbiological impurities. Like ultrafiltration, a purge stream removes impurities that are too large to pass through the RO membrane. Advantages and disadvantages are similar to ultrafiltration but tolerance to chlorine depends on membrane selection. RO as a unit operation is discussed in Chapter 5.

11.4.4.4

Control of Microbiological Growth

The methods of controlling microbiological growth in pretreatment systems are periodic sanitization, ultraviolet (UV) light and chlorine/chloramine. a) Periodic Sanitization


Periodic sanitization methods, employed on a scheduled or as needed basis, include heat, chemical sanitization, regeneration or replacement of media, flushing, or drainage. With heat, USP indicator organisms are killed above 60°C and the majority of pathogenic organisms will not proliferate. Temperatures above 80°C result in complete kill. Sanitization times might be one to two hours at temperature. Total cycle time including heat-up and cool down might be four to eight hours. Heat is commonly used in carbon beds, filters, and distribution systems.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Chemical sanitization agents (when cannot be216389 used) include hydrogen peroxide, iodine, ammoIDchlorine number:

nium compounds, and organic or inorganic per-oxygen compounds. Sanitization times might be 0.5-4 hours with additional time for set up to feed the sanitization agent and to flush it from the system. Total cycle time might be eight hours.


170


APPENDIX Controlling temperature to minimize microbial growth permits increasing the period between sanitizations. Temperatures below 15°C slow microbial growth. Avoiding stagnation and dead legs also minimizes microbial growth. Recycle loops around various unit operations can be utilized during shutdown periods, i.e. recycle around depth filter and softener while sanitizing carbon bed or while cleaning and sanitizing RO. Times for specialized periodic sanitization methods such as regeneration, replacement of media, and drainage will depend on the equipment piece and specific design. All sanitization methods (frequency and length of sanitization) will be system and sanitizing agent dependent, and must be validated. b) Pressurized Carbon Dioxide Periodic microbial growth inhibition coupled with shutdown is sometimes practiced where the high cost of electricity and water favors shutdown of pretreatment and RO systems during normal non-work periods such as third shift or weekends. During the shutdown, rather that maintaining water flow to drain to inhibit microbial growth, the cartridge filters and RO are deadheaded and pressurized with carbon dioxide to 24 bar. This lowers the pH to <5.5 which inhibits microbial growth in the stagnant water as well as dissolving scaling chemicals such as carbonate from the RO. Before start-up, the acidic water and carbonate salts are flushed to drain. The advantages include savings on energy and water consumption coupled with microbial inhibition and de-scaling during a normal shutdown period. In addition, this technology has the potential advantage of eliminating the need for a softener before the RO if there is a match between shutdown frequency and fouling frequency of the RO without a softener present in pretreatment. c) Ultraviolet Light (UV) Treatment with UV light is a popular form of microbial control and disinfecting due to ease of use. Water is exposed, at a controlled rate, between ultraviolet light waves. The UV light de-activates DNA in the microbes preventing duplication and hence leading to bacteria reduction. See section on UV light systems in Chapter 8, Storage and Distribution Systems for additional information. In pretreatment systems, UV is used when chlorine/chloramine and heat are not available or possible. The feed water to a UV needs to be free of suspended solids, which can “shadow” bacteria, preventing adequate UV contact. UV is typically used in controlling feed water to an RO unit that cannot accept chlorine or heat, and in controlling non-chlorinated water re-circulation during system idle time. The UV system does not leave a residual in the treated water, and therefore is only effective if there is direct UV light contact with microbes. d) Chlorine


Municipalities frequently use chlorine to disinfect the water before and during, distribution. Chlorine is fed into the system to kill bacteria at typical dosage levels of 0.2 to 2.0 ppm. In order to maintain the “kill potential,” an excess of chlorine is fed into the supply to maintain a chlorine residual. The chlorine level at outlying distribution points is targeted at about 0.2 to 0.5 ppm; however, if the water supply is heavily contaminated with organics, the chlorine may react and form certain chlorinated hydrocarbons (trihalomethanes or THM’s). In other cases, chlorine can dissipate and no residual level is maintained at outlying points in a municipal distribution system. Chlorine concentration should be monitored in the feed water and in parts of the pretreatment system prior to its removal.


Molecular chlorine can have adverse effects on the components in a water purification system. It will cause oxidative deterioration of the membranes, particularly polyamides, used in ultrafiltration and RO. It also will cause degradation, embrittlement, and loss of capacity in de-ionization resins (oxidation rate varies with resin type) although the amount is low to moderate at chlorine concentrations usually found in drinking water. It also will cause corrosion of stainless steel, particularly at elevated temperatures and



171

APPENDIX may carryover into the product in a distillation system. Therefore, in most systems making purified water, the chlorine is removed at some point. Advantages:

low capital cost; common treatment; compliments municipal water treatment; maintains a residual; easy to test and maintain levels

Disadvantages: can create THMs; does not affect all organics; residual chlorine is not acceptable in many final treatment systems The two principal methods of chlorine removal are activated carbon and reduction, often with sulfite. Activated Carbon Activated carbon removes the chlorine by adsorbing it onto the carbon particles in a carbon bed. There is also some reduction of chlorine to chloride. Removal efficiency depends on bed depth, face velocity and adsorptive capacity of the carbon. Design is based on rate of adsorption with adsorption rates typically being more rapid for chlorine than organics if this is done in the same operation. Design based on chlorine removal will occur with bed depths of as little as 2-3 feet (0.61-0.91 m) and hydraulic rates of 2-4 gpm/ft3 (270-540 l/min/m3) of empty bed volume. Carbon bed volume is a balance between total adsorptive capacity and the frequency of replacement of the carbon bed. Use of carbon to remove chlorine provides the perfect conditions for microbiological growth: slow flow rates in a warm media with lots of nutrient present. Hence a program to periodically sanitize the carbon bed is required. Heat (either steam [plant steam can be used, but often is not] or hot water at 190°F) is effective with sanitization frequency varying from daily to a couple of times a week or less. With a proper sanitization program, microbial growth in carbon beds can be controlled. Following the sanitization the carbon bed is usually rinsed to remove fines before being put back in service. Advantages:

removes low molecular weight organics; removes color; removes chlorine effectively; technically not complex; relatively low cost

Disadvantages: high potential for increase in bioburden; medium to high capital cost; shedding of fines requires downstream filtration; periodic replacement of the spent carbon Reduction The addition of a reducing agent will reduce the chlorine to chloride. Sulfite, usually as sodium bisulfite, is generally the reducing agent of choice. The chemistry is: SO3- + Cl2 + H2O ----> 2Cl- + 2H+ + SO4=


The addition of sulfite, also may require an accompanying pH adjustment step. The chloride and sulfate that are formed may be removed by a subsequent de-ionization step or RO.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Disadvantages: technically more complex, chemical handling including sodium bisulfite and acid/base ID number: 216389 Advantages:

effectively removes chlorine; lower capital cost than carbon filters that can be heat sanitized; no regeneration or replacement required; low operating cost

for pH adjustment; potential for microbial growth in sulfite feed tank requires frequent (<5 days) preparation of sulfite solution; higher capital cost for feed systems and monitors; higher cost than disposable carbon.


172


APPENDIX e) Chloramines Chloramines are formed by the reaction of chlorine and ammonia. Municipalities add ammonia (nearly 25% in 1990, principally in the southeast and Midwest US) to form a longer acting disinfectant than chlorine and to reduce the formation of trihalomethanes during the chlorination of municipal water. Chloramines are three compounds: monochloramine (NH2Cl), dichloramine (NHCl2), and trichloramine (NCl3). Dichloramine is a particularly strong biocide. Chloramines present problems since the removal is typically not a single step. The methods for chloramine removal are: •

activated carbon

•

reduction (sulfite injection)

Activated Carbon Chloramines, like chlorine, can be removed by carbon; however, the absorption is much slower than for chlorine or organics. Chloramine adsorption will require hydraulic rates as much as 3-6X less than chlorine and empty bed contact times of 3-6X those required for chlorine. The removal of chloramines by activated carbon results in dissociation of some of the chloramines to ammonium ion and ammonia. The ratio is dependent on pH and temperature. The ammonium ion can be removed by cation exchange (water softening). Thus, if chloramines are present in the feed water, it may be desirable to locate the carbon bed for removal of microbial control agent prior to the water softening operation in the pretreatment system design. The advantages and disadvantages of carbon are similar to those for chlorine. The potential dissociation of chloramines to form ammonia is a disadvantage and can cause problems in final treatment. See Section 4.9. Reduction Reduction with sulfite will convert chloramines to ammonium ion and chloride ion. These are removed by an ion exchange operation or the ion removal process in final treatment. Again, if chloramine is present, it may be desirable to locate the microbial agent removal prior to the water softening operation in the pretreatment design. The advantages and disadvantages of sulfite reduction are similar to those for chlorine. 11.4.5

pH and Carbon Dioxide


pH, the negative log of the hydrogen ion concentration, is a measure of the concentration of hydrogen ions (H+) in a water-based solution. The more hydrogen ions that are present, the lower the pH and the more acidic the solution.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein The concentration of H ions (pH) is very important because it affects the chemistry of the water. For inHerzlia, stance, the pH of the water, along with other parameters, can tell us if the water will corrode piping or if certain contaminants (carbonates) are likelyID to precipitate and cause scaling. number: 216389 +

In water or aqueous solutions, a certain ratio of water molecules, H2O, separates (or “dissociates”) into ions, H+ and OH-.

Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM H2O <----> H+ + OH-


173

APPENDIX Because of the properties of water, when the concentrations of hydrogen (H+) and hydroxyl (OH-) present in any water-based solution are multiplied together, the value is always the same. This number is the “equilibrium ion product”, Kw, which has been determined to have the value shown below: Kw = [H+] x [OH-] = 1.01 x 10-14 at 25°C Where [H+] = Concentration of H+ (moles/liter) [OH-] = Concentration of OH- (moles/liter) Free carbon dioxide in water is produced by the decay of organic matter, dissolution of carbon dioxide from underground sources, and solution from the atmosphere. Since the carbon dioxide content of the atmosphere is quite low (less than 0.04%), this is not a major source of carbon dioxide in the water and surface waters normally are relatively low in free carbon dioxide; however, well waters usually contain an appreciable quantity of free carbon dioxide. Free carbon dioxide is the term used to designate carbon dioxide gas dissolved in water. The designation “free” carbon dioxide differentiates a solution of carbon dioxide gas from combined carbon dioxide present in the form of bicarbonate and carbonate ions. In the case of high purity water, low levels of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere can cause the pH to drop from 7.0 to 5.5 and the conductivity to increase from 0.1 µS to 1 µS. Low levels of CO2 also can prevent a water purification system such as two-pass RO from producing water with a conductivity of <1 µS. The pH of the water causes the equilibrium between free carbon dioxide (gas) and bicarbonate alkalinity (dissolved ion) to shift to more or less carbon dioxide. The determination of the level of CO2 present in the water as it proceeds through the treatment process is important to understand because it can affect the final water quality or it can cause premature exhaustion of ion exchange systems. The approach to pH in the pretreatment system affects the equilibrium between carbonate, bicarbonate, and carbon dioxide. As the pH is lowered the equilibrium is shifted toward carbon dioxide which is a neutral species dissolved in the water with the ionic charge being maintained with anions from the added acid and the net formation of water. As the pH is increased, the equilibrium is shifted toward bicarbonate and then carbonate with the ionic charge being maintained by the addition with cations from the added base and the net formation of water. 11.4.6

Importance of Feed Water pH

EPA drinking water standards require that the pH of the water be within a range of 6.5-8.5; however, the range of most water is much narrower due to the corrosive nature of water with an acidic pH and a scaling potential at a high pH. The feed water pH is very important when designing the pretreatment for a purified water system. Also, the pH is an important parameter is designing a RO system or an ion exchange system.


If the pH of the feed water is less than 8.3, the feed water will have to be analyzed for the amount of CO2 present in the water. The lower the pH from a pH of 8.3, the higher the potential capacity for dissolved CO2. The CO2 will directly pass through pretreatment and an RO membrane and depress the conductivity and pH, making it difficult to meet the USP conductivity requirements. If the system has an ion exchange system following the RO, high levels of CO2 will produce a high ionic loading on the system. High CO2 may require the use of a degasifier to remove the CO2. See Section 11.4.3.1.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, If the feed water pH is between 6-10,ID the RO system has the216389 potential to incur hardness scaling. Adding acid number:

to the feed water controls the deposition of scale, but this converts carbonates to CO2 that will pass through both the RO and distillation final treatment processes. On the other hand, the addition of base converts the bicarbonate to carbonate, and carbon dioxide (CO2) to bicarbonate. These ions will be removed by an RO unit, but also will cause scaling. Most pharmaceutical companies incorporate the use of ion exchange softening in order to prevent scaling from occurring in the RO membrane.


174


APPENDIX Chloramine in the feed water can result in ammonia or ammonium. The pH as well as temperature affects the equilibrium between ammonia and ammonium. Acidic conditions are required to maintain the ionic species for removal in an RO unit. In final treatment ammonia will pass through an RO unit. In distillation, the higher temperatures shift the equilibrium from, ammonium towards ammonia. Ammonia will affect conductivity and pH, making it difficult to meet the USP conductivity requirements. Based on these situations, some water systems will include the capability to add either acid or a base to the water in order to optimize the performance of the system. The most common acid used for pH adjustment is sulfuric acid because it is readily available and less corrosive than hydrochloric acid. The most common base used for pH adjustment is sodium hydroxide (caustic soda) because it is readily available, and the final treatment process will remove sodium ions.

11.5

FINAL TREATMENT FOR NON-COMPENDIAL AND COMPENDIAL PURIFIED WATER SYSTEMS

11.5.1

Ion Exchange for Purified Water Applications

11.5.1.1

Ion Exchange Use in USP Systems

The primary purpose of ion exchange equipment in USP high purity water systems is to satisfy the ionic quality portion of the specification. Ion exchange systems can effectively reduce organics in many applications with proper ion exchange resin selection and maintenance. Ion exchange systems may not meet USP TOC requirements without additional membrane processes in certain applications where high feed water TOC levels exist. For most water supplies, both two-bed and mixed-bed units in series can be utilized to meet the USP water specifications. Ion exchange systems require pretreatment to remove undissolved solids from the water stream and to avoid resin fouling or degradation. Although dechlorination also is recommended to avoid resin degradation by oxidation, the low levels of residual chlorine commonly found in potable water supplies, in worst cases, demonstrate only long-term effects on most ion exchange resins. Typical pretreatment for an ion exchange system includes a filter and/or carbon filter for removal of undissolved solids and chlorine.

11.5.1.2

Functionality

With the exception of one-time use (virgin) resins (which are not regenerated), cation and anion exchange resins are regenerated with acid and caustic solutions, respectively. As water passes through the ion exchange bed, the exchange of ions in the water stream for the hydrogen and hydroxide ions held by the resin occurs readily and is driven by concentration gradient. Similarly, the regeneration process is driven by excess chemical.


Cation Exchange: Cation exchange is the exchange of cations (Ca, Mg, Na, etc.) in water for hydrogen ion (H+). Hydrogen cycle operation of cation exchangers is the term used when regeneration is accomplished with dilute acid (generally sulfuric (H2SO4) or hydrochloric (HCl). All salts are converted to corresponding acids following the cation exchange process.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Anion Exchange: Anion Exchange is the exchange of anions (SO , HCO , Cl , etc.) in water for hydroxide ions (OH ). This exchange following cation exchange completely demineralizes water when carried to compleID number: 216389 4

=

3

-

-

tion. The anion exchange resin is typically regenerated with sodium hydroxide (NaOH).


Ion exchange resins are available in “strongly” and “weakly” ionized versions. Strongly ionized resins have a greater affinity for all ionized constituents in water and are capable of removing even weakly ionized constituents such as acetates and silica with practical exchange capacities of 18 and 14 kgs as CaCO3 per ft3 of resin (0.5 and 0.4 kgs/m3) for cation and anion resins respectively. Weakly ionized resins are ineffective at remov-


175

APPENDIX ing weakly ionized constituents; however, their exchange capacities are two to three times that of strongly ionized resins and can be regenerated more efficiently. Ion exchange resins have a higher affinity for polyvalent ions. A result, common divalent ions such as calcium, magnesium, sulfate, etc., are removed first as water passes through the resin bed. Monovalent ions such as sodium, potassium, and chloride can be displaced by divalent ions in the exhaustion cycle and will leak into the product stream first. RO product streams are generally comprised of monovalent ions and present a more difficult challenge to ion exchange units than a typical raw water. Mixed bed ion exchange units were developed to provide superior removal of monovalent ions. Two bed (also called separate bed) deionizers use two separate columns for the cation and anion resin. Regeneration of a two-bed unit is relatively simple since chemicals are easily introduced and rinsed. No resin separation or mixing is required as with the alternative mixed bed deionizer. Mixed bed (also called mono-bed) deionizers utilize one column with both cation and anion resins intimately mixed for the service mode. Regeneration is more complex than two-bed regeneration as resin separation and mixing steps are required. Mixed bed ion exchangers function as an infinite series of two-bed ion exchangers since the resin bed is comprised of both cation and anion resins thoroughly mixed. Therefore, residual ions that may leak through a two-bed exchange system are eventually removed by the mixed bed exchanger to achieve optimum ionic purity. Among two bed systems, there are two types: co-current and counter-current regeneration units. In cocurrent regeneration systems, the regeneration fluid flows in the same direction of the process water stream. In a counter-current system, these fluids flow in opposite directions. The practical results of counter-current regeneration are higher quality product water and approximately 50% reduction in chemical usage.

11.5.1.3

Operating Parameters

From a process standpoint, ion exchange systems require consideration of three basic parameters: flow rate, ionic loading, and product water quality. There are many parameters to consider on a practical level including cost of operation, capital cost, space requirements, chemical handling issues, etc. However, for the purpose of sizing equipment and defining the basic needs of an ion exchange system, these parameters are most important. Deionizer Type

Two Bed

Two Bed

Mixed-Bed

Co-Current Regeneration

Counter Current Regeneration

2.0-10.0

0.2-2.0

0.055-1.0

4

6-8

0.067

0.1-0.133

5-15

5-25

This Document is licensed to Product Water Quality (µS/cm)

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 6-8 Herzlia, Kgs of Acid/Caustic per liter resin (100% Basis) 0.1-0.133 ID number: 216389

Lbs of Acid/Caustic per ft3 resin (100% Basis)

Process Flow Rate (gpm/ft2 of bed area)

5-10

Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM 12.21-24.42 12.21-36.63

Process Flow Rate (m3/hr/m2) of bed area)

Typical Operating Temperature Range in °F (°C)

176

40-140 (4-60)

40-140 (4-60)


12.21-61.05 40-140 (4-60)

APPENDIX The table above lists basic operation information for ion exchange systems. Process flows should be maintained within these ranges to avoid problems such as channeling and high pressure drops. Process flow rates that are too low may result in channeling through the ion exchange bed. Channeling is typically recognized by significantly shorter run times between regeneration. Excessive flow rates can significantly increase system pressure loss and potentially affect product water quality.

11.5.1.4

Component Description

An ion exchange system is comprised of a tank(s), ion exchange resin, a piping and valve system, water/ chemical distributors internal to the tank(s), a regeneration system, and a conductivity or resistivity meter and cell. Typically, other instrumentation may include a flow meter and pressure gauges. Ion exchange systems are available in both on-site regenerable and off-site regenerable (rechargeable) versions. In both versions, tanks may be constructed from fiberglass, stainless steel or carbon steel with an inert interior lining such as vulcanized rubber or PVC. Off-site regenerated or rechargeable systems are typically transported off site to a facility that is equipped to either regenerate or replace the resin. For this reason, these units are typically supplied with fiberglass or light gauge stainless steel tanks in sizes ranging from less than 1 ft3 (0.03 m3)-50 ft3 (1.4 m3) per tank. Larger, off-site regenerated systems are recharged with new resins on-site, and the exhausted resin is returned to an off-site regeneration facility. On-site regenerated units are designed with a much more complicated valve and piping system to accommodate on-site chemical regeneration and rinsing. These systems are selected when larger volumes of water are required on a continuous basis, thus justifying the higher capital investment.

11.5.1.5

Tanks

For pharmaceutical applications, given the typical quantity of water utilized, ion exchange tanks rarely need to be more than 3-4 feet (.91 m-1.22 m) in diameter. Typically, tank straight shells are 6-8 feet (1.82 m-2.44 m). Steel tanks are welded and typically manufactured and designed in accordance with the ASME Code for operating pressures between 100 and 150 psig (7 and 10.5 kgs/cm2 gauge). ASME Code stamping is not necessarily required for this type of equipment; however, local regulations and end user safety concerns should govern this decision.

11.5.1.6

Distributors

Each ion exchange tank includes distributors at all pipe to tank interfaces. Distributors are required to ensure that resin does not escape from the tank while water is flowing through the system and to provide adequate distribution of flow through the vessel. Distributors are typically supplied in stainless steel, PVC, CPVC, polypropylene or PVDF. Structural integrity of a distributor system is a key element in any design since a ruptured distributor can cause a significant loss of resin and may require significant time for repair.

11.5.1.7


Piping and Valves

The selection of a piping and valve system depends upon several factors including budget, product water quality (in terms of chemical analysis), and preferred methods of sterilization. Most ion exchange systems are provided with schedule 80 PVC or CPVC piping and valves. The advantages of these materials include low cost, ease of assembly, and high corrosion resistance. Specialty plastics such as polypropylene and PVDF also have been utilized in DI systems to a great extent. These materials are more expensive than either PVC or CPVC; however, these materials are superior in terms of the lower level of organic leachables into the process water. Furthermore, these materials are available in a piping design that more closely resembles the orbital welding in sanitary stainless piping systems.



Stainless steel piping systems offer greater structural integrity than plastic piping systems and the ability to sanitize using hot water or steam. On the other hand, stainless steel is much more vulnerable to corrosion and more expensive than PVC and CPVC.


177

APPENDIX 11.5.1.8

Regeneration System

On-site regenerated ion exchange systems require a regeneration system that includes chemical pumps and/or eductors, chemical tanks, piping and valves, and related instrumentation. The cost critical component in any regeneration system is the chemical pump. Pumps better suited for this application require inert materials of construction and the capability to closely meter or regulate the chemical dosage. Positive displacement pumps driven by either electric motors or compressed air are ideally suited for this application. Chemical eductors offer another option to deliver chemicals to an ion exchange system; however, chemical dosing may be inconsistent based on variable dilution water pressure and flow.

11.5.1.9

Microbiological Concerns, Cleaning, and Sanitization

Although ion exchange resins beds, due to the hydrogen ion and hydroxide ion exchange sites, have pH values at the extreme ends of the range, microbiological activity remains a concern. The regeneration of both the cation and anion exchange resin beds effectively sanitizes the system; however, as the system processes water, the resin becomes exhausted and the pH approaches neutral. Organic matter, which may be deposited on or absorbed by the resins, particularly the anion resin, and the laminar flow of water through the bed foster bacteria growth in ion exchange beds. For this reason, regeneration frequency is more important to ion exchange systems that are not designed with auxiliary microbiological control components such as UV lights. Polishing ion exchange systems are typically positioned in a system with bacterial control elements such as sub-micron filters and ultraviolet sterilizers, and may operate for several weeks without requiring regeneration.

11.5.1.10


Ion exchange based WFI and purified water systems have an extensive installed based and lengthy history. Major advantages are the considerable flexibility in flow rate of ion exchange systems, lack of sophisticated maintenance requirements, consistent production of Stage 1 conductivity, and the ability to use the chemical regeneration of ion exchange resins as a means of microbial control. The major disadvantages include the necessity to store and handle acid and caustic, the requirements to neutralize waste chemicals (for on-site regenerated systems only), and the reduced ability of ion exchange resins to reduce dissolved organics relative to membrane based systems. 11.5.2

Reverse Osmosis (RO) for High Purity Water Applications

11.5.2.1

Description

RO is a pressure driven process utilizing a semi-permeable membrane capable of removing dissolved organic and inorganic contaminants from water. A semi-permeable membrane is permeable to some substances such as water, while being impermeable to other substances such as many salts, acids, bases, colloids, bacteria, and endotoxin.


RO membranes are produced commercially for water purification in spiral wound and hollow fiber configurations. Spiral wound elements are much more forgiving in pretreatment protection against fouling. Membranes are available in two basic materials: cellulose acetate and thin film composite (polyamide). All of the membrane types have advantages and disadvantages. Cellulose acetate membranes are the oldest commercially. Cellulose acetate has the advantages of being the lowest initial cost membrane and is chlorine tolerant. The primary disadvantages of cellulose acetate membranes are: the fastest loss of rejection among membrane types; the necessity to operate in a pH range of 5 to 6 to minimize hydrolysis; and the necessity to keep free chlorine in the feed stream to control bacterial consumption of the base membrane material. Cellulose acetate membranes also are more resistant to some types of fouling than alternative membranes. Cellulose acetate membranes are relatively intensive in energy considerations since the membranes normally operate at a high pressure (300-500 psig or 21-35 kgs/cm2 gauge) and commonly operate at elevated feed water temperatures (60-80°F) (15-27°C).



178


APPENDIX Thin film composite RO membranes offer the highest rejection of contaminants of all membrane types in current production. Thin film composite membranes operate effectively at low water temperatures (40°F (4°C) and higher) and low pressure (150 psig (10.5 kgs/cm2 gauge) and higher). The initial capital cost of thin film composite membranes may be higher than the capital cost of cellulose acetate membranes, but offer the higher rejection and expected longer life. The primary negative aspect of thin film composite membranes is the intolerance for chlorine in the feed water. Thin film composite membranes are degraded rapidly in the presence of chlorine at municipal drinking water levels. The dechlorination of the feed water does allow the opportunity for some bacterial growth to occur and more sanitization efforts are required with thin film composite membranes than with chlorine tolerant types. Both thin film composite and cellulose membrane can be appropriate for use in pharmaceutical water systems. The optimum membrane selection is based upon an analysis of capital cost, operating cost, membrane life, rejection, and bacterial control. The majority of pharmaceutical systems utilize thin film composite membranes. Most spiral wound RO membranes incorporate a brine seal at the leading end of the RO element. This seal is designed to expand between the membrane and the pressure vessel that contains the RO membrane. The purpose of the seal is to prevent passage of water between the membrane and the pressure vessel and to divert the flow of water across the RO membrane surface. The brine seal can cause bacterial problems since a stagnant water condition is inherently created by the presence of the seal. Some membranes are produced today without a brine seal on the leading end. These membranes are commonly referred to as loose wrap or full fit and are configured in several different ways with the same goal of allowing modest controlled flow between the RO membrane and the pressure vessel. This type of membrane is superior for use in pharmaceutical RO units as bacterial contamination is minimized. RO membranes can vary in configuration. They are designed in arrays such that turbulence is reasonably maintained to minimize scale precipitation and fouling. Greater turbulence also decreases the boundary layer and reduces the salt level at the membrane surface improving permeate quality. As permeate (product) is formed, the feed water stream concentrates in contaminants. Typical arrays frequently reduce the number of membrane pressure vessels in parallel as the feed water flow is reduced. Recycle of the reject concentrate is sometimes employed to maintain the higher turbulence without using more feed water. This must be designed such that the resultant concentrated feed stream does not precipitate downstream.

11.5.2.2

Application

RO can be successfully implemented in pharmaceutical systems several ways. RO units can be utilized upstream of deionizers to reduce regenerant acid and caustic consumption or to minimize resin costs. Product staged RO units (two sets of RO membranes in series) are generally capable of producing water that meets the requirements of the USP for TOC and conductivity. Some installations produce water that meets the Stage 1 conductivity level allowing on-line measurement while others produce water that passes Stage 2 or 3 levels requiring laboratory testing. Each installation must be carefully analyzed to assess the probable product water quality relative to consistent conductivity levels.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Even small changes in feed pH can have a very dramatic effect on final system conductivity and this parameter should be monitored and controlled pH control is a216389 part of the system) utilizing a very accurate pH ID (ifnumber: 11.5.2.3

Instrumentation and Control

meter with a feedback loop for any chemical feed pump. Using a simple on/off signal for chemical feed pump control is not recommended.


The product quality from the RO system is directly related to the feed quality. As a result, monitoring the feed quality can provide a method for notifying an operator of an impending issue before the product quality from the RO system degrades. The feed and permeate conductivity can be directly compared to provide on-line


179

APPENDIX monitoring of RO ionic rejection. Permeate flow, waste flow, and feed temperature are typically monitored as well as pressure for feed, concentrate, and permeate. These parameters should be measured using calibrated, NIST traceable instruments. Some RO units also monitor additional parameters such as membrane inter-stage pressure and conductivity. Scale will tend to form on downstream membranes and pressure drop can be an indicator. Chlorine or Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) monitoring is sometimes utilized to protect chlorine intolerant membranes against oxidation. Most RO units incorporate some level of automation. Protective devices are typically included to protect: pumps against low suction pressure and membranes against high pressure and high temperature. Most valves on RO units are manually adjusted. Automatic valves are utilized in many units to accomplish product side flushing and system sanitization. Membrane cleaning is performed manually in most systems, but can be automated.

11.5.2.4

Limitations

RO cannot remove 100% of contaminants from water and has very low to no removal capability for some extremely low molecular weight dissolved organics. RO also quantitatively reduces bacteria, endotoxin, colloids, and other macro molecules from water. RO cannot purify 100% of a feed water system. A concentrate flow is always necessary to remove the contaminants that are rejected by the membrane. Recovery is defined as the percentage of feed water that becomes purified product water. Most RO units operate in the range of 75% recovery. Some small units operate at lower recoveries, while large systems may have recoveries as high as 85% if water consumption is critical. Many users of RO utilize the waste stream from the RO unit for cooling tower make-up water, compressor cooling water, etc. The determination of recovery must be a balance of life cycle costs, water, waste, and maintenance factors. A high recovery unit may have less waste to achieve the desired output rate, but it tends to have high maintenance costs due to effects of the concentrate. Carbon dioxide passes directly through the RO membrane and, for design purposes, the CO2 will be in the RO product stream at the same level that is present in the feed water stream. Excess carbon dioxide in the RO product stream may cause product water quality problems directly or may increase the load on the anion resin in deionizers which follow the RO unit to raise the RO permeate to a higher quality level. Water quality produced by an RO system is dependent upon a number of factors, including, but not limited to: membrane type, operating pressure, and feed water quality. Since RO membranes remove a percentage of the contaminants in the feed water, as the feed water quality degrades so will the product quality. As a result, it is conceivable that the feed water quality could change enough so that the product quality from the RO system may no longer meet USP quality. Present RO technology requires ambient RO operation with occasional chemical or hot water sanitization. Operating at ambient temperatures can result in the possibility of biological growth. The ability for RO systems to continuously operate at high temperature (80°C) should alleviate this; however, to date, this may be the most significant factor in why RO use in a WFI application is rather limited.


Since RO membranes remove a percentage of the constituents in the feed water as the feed water quality deteriorates or the membranes degrade, it may become more challenging for the RO system to meet USP WFI product quality. As a result, the RO-based USP WFI system may require more regularly scheduled monitoring than a distillation system. The performance of an RO system also is dependent upon potentially numerous “o” rings between the membrane elements and between the membrane elements and the membrane element housings. O-ring slippage may result in poor water quality. This would normally result in high conductivity (low resistivity), providing a means of monitoring for unacceptable water quality.


180


APPENDIX 11.5.2.5

Scaling

RO scale formation in waste streams is predicted by a calculation that utilizes the concentrate stream water levels of calcium, alkalinity, total dissolved solids, and temperature. The proper pH to operate a RO unit at (without the use of an antiscalant agent) is a minimum of 0.5 pH units below the pH calculated to produce scale. Scale control through acidification of feed stream to lower the pH is very effective. The principal negative aspect of this method of scale control is in the formation of free carbon dioxide from bicarbonate that is present in the feed water as the pH is lowered. Antiscalant chemicals also are available for injection into the RO feed water stream. The antiscalant agents are very effective in minimizing scale formation through a sequestering action that increases the time necessary for crystal formation of the precipitate. The various membrane types have different maximum operating temperatures. Many RO systems utilize feed water preheating to optimize the membrane area and to minimize the pumping energy required to operate the RO system. It is prudent to have high temperature protection for the membranes when utilizing feed water preheating.

11.5.2.6

Cleaning and Sanitization

Virtually all RO units need periodic cleaning. Acid based cleaners are used to remove accumulated metals and salts from the membranes. Alkaline detergent cleaners are used to remove silt and organic foulants from the membranes. Sequential acid and alkaline cleanings are frequently done to assure a thorough cleaning. Cleaning frequency should not be more than four times per year if the pretreatment system is designed and working properly. Cleaning need is based upon a loss of rejection, an increase in the feed to waste membrane pressure drop, or a loss of product flow. Chlorine tolerant membranes can be sanitized with chlorine solutions. Non-chlorine tolerant membranes can be effectively sanitized with a peracetic acid/hydrogen peroxide solution. Some membranes are sufficiently heat resistant to allow thermal sanitization at 80°C.

11.5.2.7

Purification Capability and Efficiency

A single stage of RO elements commonly reduces the level of raw water salts by 90 to 99%. Other raw water contaminants such as colloids, bacteria, and endotoxin also are reduced by 1-3 logs. Passage of water through a single pass of RO membrane may frequently not purify the water to a level that meets the current requirements for USP Purified Water.


Repurification of the water through a second set of RO membranes will raise the quality of water to levels that can exceed the requirements of USP Purified Water or Water For Injection in most applications. RO systems that utilize two sets of RO membranes in series are commonly called two-pass or product staged RO units. Product staged RO units can produce water from the municipal drinking water supplies to produce product water which will normally have a resistivity of 0.5 Mohm/cm or greater.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Almost all product staged RO units can produce product water that passes the USP tests for conductivity and TOC; however, product staged ROID product water may not necessarily pass the conductivity test in rare number: 216389 applications.

11.5.2.8


Performance

RO unit must incorporate sufficient membrane area for reliable operation. All membrane manufacturers offer recommendations for membrane area required as function of the feed water quality. One of the most impor-


181

APPENDIX tant factors for optimization of membrane area is the understanding of fouling and scaling potential. The Silt Density Index (SDI) reading offers an indication of the tendency of the feed water to foul membranes as a result of salt, colloids, or bio-burden. Most membrane manufacturers recommend an SDI reading of three or less with an upper limit for proper membrane operation. In general, the higher the membrane area for a fixed product water flow rate, the lower the rate of membrane fouling will be. This is not entirely true since the percent recovery may differ, and therefore might be a factor. A high recovery for the same flow and membrane area will tend to foul more. It is obvious that an increase in membrane area will cause an increase in the capital cost of the equipment due to the increased requirement for membranes and pressure vessels. An intelligent RO design will optimize the membrane area versus the maintenance and cleaning requirements of the RO system. Advantages:

RO is utilized to reduce or eliminate chemical handling. This can be a significant advantage for RO when compared with regenerable deionization systems. RO generally has better TOC reduction that ion exchange alone.

Disadvantages: Water consumption due to the relatively high waste flow if wastewater reuse is not employed. RO is utilized in many new purified water systems due to the low chemical handling requirement and the membrane barrier to bacteria, endotoxin, organics, and salts. Additionally, if the RO pretreatment is not designed to properly handle raw water change, RO maintenance can become expensive.

11.6

DISTILLATION FOR HIGH PURITY WATER SYSTEMS

11.6.1

Thermal Efficiency of Distillation Systems

Heat losses from a distillation system are due to: •

Radiation

•

Venting

•

Heat exiting with the blowdown and distillate streams which are at higher temperature than the feed

•

Heat exiting with cooling water

Because of these heat losses, it takes more than one pound of plant steam to produce one pound of WFI in a single effect distiller. For this reason, Multi-Effect distillers are used in order to improve the performance of the system.


The Performance Ratio (R) of a distiller is defined as the amount of distillate produced in relation to the amount of steam consumed, and is given by: R = Md/Ms, where R = Performance Ratio (dimensionless) Md = distillate produced (lbs) Ms = steam consumed (lbs)


Another way to measure the performance of a distiller is often stated in terms of Thermal Economy (E). This is defined as the amount of distillate produced in relation to the amount of energy input, and can be given by: E = Md/1000 BTU heat input.


182


APPENDIX A typical single effect distiller, without feedwater pre-heating, has an R of about 0.82 and an E of about 0.89. Pre-heating of the feedwater in the condenser raises the R to 0.93 and the E to 0.96 respectively. Feedwater pre-heaters are sometimes used to elevate the temperature of the feedwater prior to entering each effect in a ME system, and thereby reduce the steam requirements of the distiller. Typical performance values for a 600-gph VC and 5-effect ME are shown in the table below. VC

5 ME

Cold

Hot

Cold

Hot

Economy in lbs/1000 BTUs

19.52*

6.8

3.84

3.84

Performance Ratio (lbs of distillate/lb of steam

27.67

7.11

3.39

3.39

* Economy takes into consideration the electrical energy consumption for the VC.

11.6.2

Water Recovery

A portion of the feedwater is continuously discharged to waste in order to limit the total dissolved solids content of the feedwater within the evaporator. That portion of feedwater not evaporated is termed blowdown, and is discharged continuously to waste. The total quantity of feedwater (Mf) required is given by the sum of the distillate produced (Md) and the blowdown (Mb) discharged. The Recovery Ratio (Rc) of a distilling unit is determined by dividing the product rate (Md) by the feedwater rate (Mf). Hence the Equations: Mf = Md + Mb and Rc = Md/Mf. In order to minimize energy consumption and pre-treatment cost, it is desirable to have a high Rc. The Rc is limited by the scaling potential of the water. At low flow rates, it may be limited by practical considerations. The higher the Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) of the feed, the lower is the recovery. With deionized feedwater, the recovery is 90%-95%. With softened feed, the recovery is typically 80%-85%. 11.6.3

Number of Effects or Columns in an ME Design

Increasing the number of effects in an ME system does not result in increased output, but it reduces the amount of steam and cooling water required to produce the same amount of distillate, compared to a system with fewer effects.


In order to maintain a temperature difference for heat transfer between the vapor from one effect and the boiling liquid of the next effect, the pressure within each succeeding effect must be lower than its predecessor. The temperature and pressure are highest in the first effect, and are lowest in the condenser and the last effect, which are nearly at the same pressure and temperature.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, In order to minimize the heat rejection of the216389 condenser, it is desirable to operate the system IDrequirements number:

over the lowest temperature range possible. Additionally, a lower temperature operation reduces the potential for scaling and corrosion. If we call the temperature at which the first effect operates the top temperature and the temperature of the condenser downstream of the last effect the bottom temperature, that constitutes the temperature range for the multi-effect distiller. In a non-pharmaceutical application, the bottom temperature



183

APPENDIX can be below the boiling point at the prevailing atmosphere, i.e., operation is under vacuum. This is not an acceptable practice for the production of WFI quality water because of the potential for air leak into the system. In addition, a low temperature, below that considered sanitary, is unacceptable. The top temperature is dependent on the pressure of the heating steam, normally 100-125 psig, while the bottom temperature is dependent on the condenser pressure, which is normally 7-10 psig. The temperature range and equipment cost limit the number of effects that are justifiable. The fixed charges for additional effects ultimately dissipate the savings in energy. It is important to note that there is a certain amount of variety in the designs of multiple effect distillers, and that although their geometry may differ, they are thermodynamically all the same. The larger the output of the system and the higher the cost of steam, the more economically justifiable it is to increase the number of effects. Typical ME systems have 3-5 effects, and some have as many as 8 effects. 11.6.4

Non-Condensable, Venting, and Deaeration

Non-condensable gases such as carbon dioxide and oxygen are dissolved within the feedwater and become liberated as the temperature of the water increases. These gases, if they are not removed, have two detrimental effects on distillation units. Since the gases are non-condensable, they can blanket the heat transfer surface and inhibit heat transfer in the condenser and evaporator. This translates into reduced output. In addition, these gases are corrosive and will contribute to the pitting, embrittlement, and cracking of stainless steel. For these reasons, it is imperative for designers and operators to ensure proper and adequate venting of the distilling unit. The steam carries non-condensables that are liberated from the raw water during evaporation. The gases do not travel alone and will not be vented without the associated steam. There are two characteristics of non-condensable liberated by ordinary waters which allow designers to locate and vent these gases from an evaporator or condenser. Oxygen and carbon dioxide are significantly heavier than the associated steam, and therefore collect mostly at the bottom. Additionally, non-condensable gases tend to migrate to the coldest surface they can find. Considering the points above, the gases liberated in each effect are processed through the bottom of each effect with the distillate and make their way to the final condenser which is vented along its length. Operators should ensure that a steady stream of steam is exiting the distiller vent at all times. Improper venting and/or a malfunctioning distillate level control can result in CO2 being pulled into the distillate pump suction and processed across the conductivity cell, resulting in high conductivity reading.

11.6.4.1

Deaerator (also called Decarbonator)


All feed waters have dissolved gasses the amount of which depends on water temperature, composition, and pH. The latter is dependent on the type of pretreatment used. Other gasses occur due to the breakdown of some of the constituents during heating, as is the case of alkalinity.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein It is very desirable, whenever practical, to remove the gasses from the feed waters prior to entry into the Herzlia, evaporator in order to minimize corrosion and to improve heat transfer. This is often done in VC distillers, where a deaerator is installed between feed heater and 216389 the evaporator. Because of the configuration and IDthenumber: relatively high operating pressure of the ME, it is difficult to incorporate a deaerator within the system. A stand-alone deaerator will be costly, and therefore is not included.


A typical VC deaerator consists of a cylindrical tower in which stripping steam and feedwater flow counter current to one another. Prior to entering the deaerator, the feedwater has been pre-heated in the blowdown cooler, distillate cooler, and feedwater pre-heater. As the temperature of the feedwater increases, the non-

184


APPENDIX condensable contained within the feed have a greater tendency to become liberated. Entering the deaerator at a temperature greater than 93°C, the feedwater is sprayed through a nozzle, which disperses the water in the shape of a cone to maximize the contact area with the counter current stripping steam. The majority of gases within the feedwater are liberated at this point, and are vented to atmosphere. The evaporator vent is the source of the stripping steam which provides additional heating to the feedwater, prior to entering the evaporator. Deaerators are usually constructed of stainless steel. 11.6.5

Typical Water Analysis

The table below provides typical water analysis of a feed source for a high-purity water distillation system, and is used to compare pretreatment and operating cost for a 5-effect ME with a VC. Feedwater Analysis City of Ocala, FL. Plant Effluent Constituent

mg/l

Constituent

mg/l

Constituent

mg/l

Constituent

mg/l

Calcium

38

Fluoride

0.7

Nitrate

1.1

Zinc

0.026

Chlorine

13

Iron

0.026

Sodium

8.1

Carbon Dioxide

0.2

Magnesium

14.0

Sulfate

111

pH

8.2

Bicarbonate, HCO3 1.2 TDS

157

High Purity Water Production Costs 600 GPH of high purity water at 82°C

Consumables

600 GPH of high purity water at 30°C

5MEF

VC

5MEF

VC

Steam in lbs/hr

1,471

700

1,471

180

Electricity (kw)

1.5

26.5

1.5

26.5

--

17,520

--

17,520

32,143

--

32,143

--

Regenerant in lb/yr Acid in lb/yr


Caustic in lb/yr

Cooling Water in gpm

30,917

--

30,917

--

18

--

32

--




185

APPENDIX

Associated Costs Steam ($/year) Electricity ($/year)

5MEF

VC

5MEF

VC

$79,802

$37,975

$79,802

$9,765

$736

$13,000

$736

$13,000

Regenerant ($/year)

$876

$876

Acid ($/year)

$1,928

$1,928

Caustic ($/year)

$4,019

$4,019

Cooling Water ($/year)

$1,513

$2,688

Running Cost ($/year)

$87,998

$51,851

$89,173

$23,641

Running Costs in US$/1000 gallons

$20.95

$12.34

$21.23

$5.63

The above figures are based on 7000 hour per year operation and the following utility and consumables’ costs in US dollars: Steam

$7.75 per 1000 lbs

Electricity

$0.07 per kWh

Sodium Hydroxide

$0.13 per lb

Renerant-brine

$0.05 per lb

Hydrochloric Acid

$0.06 per lb

Cooling water

$0.20 per 1000 gal

For costs of consumables, which are different from those used above, calculations can be made by substituting other values.

11.6.5.1

Comparisons

ME can be used as a standby clean steam generator; VC cannot be used because of the lower steam pressure. Pretreatment: VC does not require as much pretreatment as ME. See Baseline pretreatment in the main chapter.


Size Selection: The cost of the VC does not scale down as well as the ME. VC is not offered in less than 100 gph, and equipment cost is most competitive with ME in the 300 gph and above.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein For a hot (80°C) system, an 8-effect ME willHerzlia, approximately match the thermal economy of a VC. For an ambient system, it takes 24 effects to match the economy of VC. Obviously, such number of effects is not practical. ID number: 216389 Chlorine Attack: Although the VC still is much more forgiving because it operates at lower temperature, it also is subject to stress corrosion cracking caused by the chlorine. However, at very low chlorine levels, the problems may not appear until after years of operation.


At the relatively high temperature of the ME, the attack is very rapid, and failure may occur in weeks or months.

186


APPENDIX 11.7

CLEAN STEAM - CLEAN STEAM GENERATORS

Pharmaceutical steam systems including the generator are relatively simple in design, construction, and operation. Yet, many users can benefit from a better knowledge of factors which contribute to an optimum baseline system. 11.7.1

System Selection and Design Considerations

11.7.1.1

Sizing the System

A generator designed to deliver the maximum output at a relatively high clean steam pressure will deliver significantly more steam at the lowest pressure and vise versa. This appears to be an advantage and often is; however, there can be problems if the performance is not well understood and is taken into consideration at the design stage and later during operation. The following example best illustrates the performance of the generator and the advantages and disadvantages. Example A generator is sized to deliver 2000 lbs/hr (909 kgs/hr) clean steam at 60 psig (4.2 kgs/cm2 gauge), utilizing plant steam at 120 psig (8.43 kgs/cm2 gauge). Operating at a reduced level of 30 psig (2.1 kgs/cm2 gauge) clean steam pressure and assuming 5 psi (0.35 kgs/cm2) pressure drop across the steam control valve. Net steam pressure to evaporator =120 - 5 =115 psig (8.08 kgs/cm2), (347.3°F (175.17°C) saturated temperature) CS temperature @ 60 psig = 307.63°F (153.13°C)

CS temperature @ 30 psig = 274.46°F (134.7°C)

Temperature difference available for clean steam generation, ∆ T @ 60 psig = 347.3 - 307.63 = 39.67°F (22°C)

∆ T@ 30 psig = 347.3 - 274.6 = 72.7°F (40.5°C)

The amount of steam produced, lbs/hr, W = U x A x ∆ T Where: U = heat transfer coefficient in Btu/hr/ft2/°F and A = CS evaporator surface area in ft2 Since the heat transfer surface is fixed, and the change in the heat transfer coefficient is negligible, the amount of clean steam produced is directly proportional to the temperature difference. The amount of clean steam produced @ 30 psig compared to that produced at 60 psig at the same plant steam pressure is: lb/hr of CS @30 psig = (72.7/ 39.67) x 2000 = 3,665 lbs/hr (1666 kgs/hr), or 183% of that at 60 psig (4.2 kgs/cm).


Specific volume of steam @ 60 psig = 5.818 ft3/ lbs.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Total volume of 60 psig steam = 5.818 x 2000Herzlia, =1,636 ft /hr and specific volume @ 30 psig = 9.403 ft /lbs. Total volume of steam @ 30 psig = 9.403 * 3665 = 34,462 lbs/hr, or 296% of that @ 60 psig. ID number: 216389 3

3

Since the steam passage areas including the separator have not changed, the velocity of steam increases approximately 300%.


If this increase is not anticipated and planned for at the design stage, there can be a potential for carryover of contaminants through the separator due to the higher steam velocity.


187

APPENDIX See the following table to determine the output change at different plant and CS steam pressures. To use the table follow the above example. •

Find the temperature difference for the current and desired operating pressures.

•

Calculate ratio of New/Current and multiply the current output by the ratio. If the current output is not known, use 100% to obtain the percentage change.

In addition to the high velocity and carryover considerations, operating at a temperature difference above 70°F (21°C) is not recommended without consulting the CS manufacturer. At high temperature difference, a heat transfer phenomenon called “dry wall condition” can occur. Simply put, the steam, in this case, is that much hotter than the water on the other side of the heat transfer surface, that the surface cannot be maintained wet. It is not unlike throwing drops of salty water on a very hot stove. The water evaporates instantly leaving behind a residue (scale). The problem is more of a concern when the CS feed water has relatively high TDS, such as with softened water. The example above with 72.7°F (22.6°C) temperature difference would not be recommended. The opposite of operating with high pressure/temperature differential is operating with very low differential. For a CS generator producing 2000 lbs/hr (908 kgs/hr) @ 30 psig (2.1 kgs/cm2 gauge) clean steam and 120 psig (8.4 kgs/cm2 gauge). Plant steam, the output drops to 54.6%, or 1091 lbs/hr (495.3 kgs/hr). Temperature and Pressure Difference between Plant Steam and CS Steam Clean Steam

PLANT STEAM PRESSURES AND TEMPERATURES

P

Temp.

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

105

110

115

Psig

°F.

298

125

130

25

267.3

30.74 35.70 40.37 44.81 49.03 53.05 56.90 60.60 64.15 67.56 70.86

NR

NR

NR

NR

NR

30

274.5

23.54 28.50 33.17 37.61 41.83 45.85 49.70 53.40 56.95 60.36 63.66 66.84 69.93

NR

NR

NR

NR

35

281.0

16.97 21.93 26.60 31.04 35.26 39.28 43.13 46.83 50.38 53.79 57.09 60.27 63.36 66.34 69.24

NR

NR

40

287.1

10.90 15.86 20.53 24.97 29.19 33.21 37.06 40.76 44.31 47.72 51.02 54.20 57.29 60.27 63.17 65.98 68.72

45

292.7

05.27 10.23 14.90 19.34 23.56 27.58 31.43 35.13 38.68 42.09 45.39 48.57 51.66 54.64 57.54 60.35 63.09

50

298.0

04.96 09.63 14.07 18.29 22.31 26.16 29.86 33.41 36.82 40.12 43.30 46.39 49.37 52.27 55.08 57.82

55

303.0

60

307.6

65

312.1

70

316.3

75

320.3

80

324.2

303 307.6 312.1 316.3 320.3 324.2 327.9 331.4 334.8 338.1 341.3 344.4 347.4 350.3 353.1 355.8

04.67

NR

9.11 13.33 17.35 21.20 24.90 28.45 31.86 35.16 38.34 41.43 44.41 47.31 50.12 52.86

This Document is licensed to 4.44

8.66 12.68 16.53 20.23 23.78 27.19 30.49 33.67 36.76 39.74 42.64 45.45 48.19

4.22

8.24 12.09 15.79 19.34 22.75 26.05 29.23 32.32 35.30 38.20 41.01 43.75

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389 4.02

7.87 11.57 15.12 18.53 21.83 25.01 28.10 31.08 33.98 36.79 39.53

3.85

7.55 11.10 14.51 17.81 20.99 24.08 27.06 29.96 32.77 35.51

NOTE: Plant Steam Pressure Is Downstream of Steam Control Valve.


188

120


APPENDIX 11.7.1.2

Feed Water Pressure and Pump

The feed pressure is typically 8-10 psi (0.5-0.7 kgs/cm2) above the clean steam pressure, which is typically 30-60 psig (2.1-4.2 kgs/cm2 gauge, a feed pressure range of approximately 40-70 psig (2.8-4.9 kgs/cm2 gauge). Most CS generators have outputs of less than 4,000 lbs/hr (1,816 kgs/hr). Many have outputs of less than 1,000 lbs/hr (450 kgs/hr). That is a feed rate of slightly more than 2 gpm (7.5 l/min). The sanitary centrifugal feed pumps favored by the pharmaceutical industry will be operating near shutoff head at flow rates of less than 10 gpm (38 l/min), particularly with very small generators. Installing pump circulation loops complicates piping, and under certain scenarios may call for installing a heat exchanger to address temperature buildup. This adds undue complexity. Consider the possibility of feeding the generator from an existing source with sufficient pressure. The dedicated pump, even at very low flow rate, is most likely the next best option.

11.7.1.3

Feed Water Contact Surfaces

It is common that users specify mechanical and electropolish and sanitary clamp connections for piping, heat exchangers, and vessels in contact with the feed water although such features are not necessary for achieving the desired clean steam quality. Often, the reason given for such requirements is attributed to having the feed to the CS piped from the WFI or USP Purified Water loop. Such practices rule out the use of the less costly Simple CS Generator which otherwise may be acceptable. Consider the economics of the proposed feed source at the selection stage. If WFI or USP Purified is the most logical source, consider the possibility of using an atmospheric break or sanitary backflow preventers so that the CS does not become an extension of the source loop. 11.7.2

Utilities

Plant Steam Flow Rate, lbs/hr: Make provisions for 110-120% of the maximum expected clean steam production. Generators with feed heaters and low TDS feed water will use closer to the 110% rate, and those without feed heaters and with high TDS (high blowdown rate) will use closer to the 120% rate. Plant Steam Pressure should be nominally 50-60 psig (3.5-4.2 kgs/cm2 gauge) above the clean steam pressure. See (1) above. Feed Water Rate: With very low TDS, DI, or equal water, the typical feed rate is 105%-110% of the CS production rate depending on the size of the generator.


With higher TDS feed water, the blowdown rate is increased to lower the concentration of salts. The feed varies and often is 115%-120% of CS rate. Electric Power: Other than controls, the only power requirement is for the feed/booster pump when used. Since almost all CS generators require relatively small flow rates, the power requirement is mainly dependent on the boost pressure. Motors will vary from 2-5 horsepower. (1.5-3.75 kW).

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Instrument Air: 80-100 psig (5.6-7.0 kgs/cm gauge) instrument air is required for systems with air operated ID number: 216389 2

controls.



189

APPENDIX 11.7.3

Periodic Cleaning and Derouging

It is common for CS generators and other stainless steel equipment used in high purity steam and water applications, to develop rouge or scale. Some of the cleaning chemicals can be very harsh and may etch the stainless surface. The extra cost on electropolishing becomes wasted after one harsh cleaning. When contracting an outside service to perform the cleaning and any subsequent passivation, ensure chemicals used do not cause etching. It is common to avoid passivation with nitric acid if the surface is electropolished, using citric acid and ammonium citrate. 11.7.4 Conductivity Monitoring The conductivity of the CS condensate sample on a system with relatively high feed conductivity is an indication of carryover through the separator. Therefore, it serves as a good on-line warning that pyrogens may be present. When the CS generator is operating on high purity DI feed water, the monitoring of CS sample conductivity or resistivity is meaningless; especially if the conductivity is lower than the limits set in the USP. In order to verify that the separator system works as intended, it would have to be challenged. Sodium sulfite or other non-chloride-based salt can be injected in the feed to determine the corresponding product conductivity. Recommended salt concentration in the feed is 150-200 mg/l. Based on approximately 10% blowdown, the concentration inside the CS will be 1,500-2,000 mg/l. The test is recommended after fieldwork or cleaning which may involve the disturbance of the separator system.

11.8

MICROBIAL CONTROL BASICS, TESTING, AND STERILIZATION SANITIZATION EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND INSTALLATION ISSUES

11.8.1

Bacteria in Pharmaceutical Water Systems

11.8.1.1

Background

Various types of bacteria can be found in the feedwater to purified water systems. Among the ways that these bacteria can be classified is Gram positive or Gram negative, which is based on their retention of a dye after a staining and washing procedure. The results of the Gram test are dependent on cell wall structure, and therefore indicative of many other characteristics. Most aquatic bacteria are Gram negative, and bacteria commonly found in purified water systems are generally Gram negative because Gram positives cannot thrive on extremely low nutrient levels. Gram negative bacteria are more heat sensitive than Gram positives, and cannot proliferate at temperatures above 60°C. However, the possibility of Gram positive organisms in the system cannot be completely ruled out, and the sanitization and testing procedures should take this into account.


Bacteria generally range from approximately 0.5 µm to 5 µm. The rod-shaped Pseudomonas diminuta, which is used for challenging sterilizing filters, has a minimum dimension of approximately 0.3 µm.


When Gram negative organisms are killed they release endotoxins; lipopolysaccharide molecules which cause a fever when injected into the bloodstream. Because they cause fever, these substances are termed “pyrogens,” meaning generating heat. These substances also have been linked to much more serious reactions when introduced into the blood stream, including lethal septic ‘shock’. They are a major concern in products intended for injection and may be a concern in other non-oral dosage forms such as transdermals.


Bacteria have a tendency to attach to surfaces and form biofilms. Biofilms form an external polysaccharide layer. This external film protects the bacteria from antimicrobial agents and makes them much more resistant to sanitization procedures. In addition, disinfection of the biofilm does not necessarily remove it from the

190


APPENDIX surfaces. Since the dead biofilm provides nutrients and attachment points for new biofilm, its removal must be considered when developing a sanitization strategy. Biofilms are difficult to detect since water samples are used to measure free floating (planktonic) bacteria, and these bacterial counts do not directly correlate to biofilm concentration. Prevention or removal of biofilms can be affected by the various continuous and periodic microbial control methods described in this chapter; however, once a biofilm has developed, the severity and frequency of the microbial control techniques may need to be significantly increased.

11.8.1.2

Microbial Levels in USP Purified Water and Non-Compendial Water

Most techniques for measuring microbial populations in a water sample require a time delay of two to three days, and they do not yield an exact value. For this reason, the USP monograph for purified water does not contain a microbial limit. Instead, alert and action level guidelines must be established by the end user. The USP informational chapter discusses the need to match the microbial quality of the purified water to the end use. An action level of 100 CFU/ml is suggested in the USP, and the FDA Guide to Inspection of High Purity Water Systems states that any action level over 100 CFU/ml is unacceptable. Since actual microbial counts are dependent on the method and technique of counting, the specifications for alert and action levels should be based on an understanding of the method, including time, temperature, and media. What may be more important than the total count is a continuous monitoring program that indicates trends before they become a problem. It also is important to identify the specific contaminants in addition to the total count. The water system should not add objectionable organisms to the final drug product. Objectionable organisms are defined in the FDA Inspection Guide as “any organisms that can cause infections when the drug product is used as directed, or any organisms capable of growth in the drug product.” Alert levels are set according to a statistical review of data to reveal those results that are above the normal operating range of the system, and are generally used to initiate an investigation with the objective of detecting and resolving problems before the action limit is reached. It should be noted that action levels are not pass/fail tests. These are levels which indicate that a problem exists and the problem must be investigated and an appropriate corrective action taken.

11.8.1.3

Microbial Limits in WFI

According to the USP, Water For Injection is “intended for use in the preparation of parenteral solutions.” The monograph makes no specific reference to a bacterial limit. WFI is generally expected to be free of microorganisms. Since some microbial contamination may be encountered during sampling, an action limit of 10 CFU/100 ml is commonly specified. The presence of any amount of bacteria in a WFI system is cause for concern and should be investigated. The bacterial requirement which is explicitly stated on the monograph is for bacterial endotoxin. The USP endotoxin limit for WFI is 0.25 EU per ml.


Even bacteria which are destroyed quickly within the storage and distribution system will release endotoxin. Therefore, it is imperative that the treatment system removes bacteria before they get to the distribution system, rather than relying on protection measures within the distribution system (such as heat) to remove bacteria.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Although bacterial contamination in a WFI system will lead to the proliferation of endotoxin, it may be possible to pass an endotoxin limit, but not ID a bacterial limit so both216389 tests should be performed. An endotoxin level number: cannot be directly correlated to a bacteria count.


11.8.2 Testing and Documentation

Microbial control in high purity water systems relies heavily upon the use of instruments that directly monitor the control parameters (e.g., temperature indicators, ozone monitors, UV intensity meters). However, microbiological monitoring is necessary to assure that the intended water quality is met at the system use points.


191

APPENDIX Microbiological monitoring is performed by removing a sample of the water at designated sample ports in the system and performing a heterotrophic plate count. For systems in which endotoxin must be controlled (i.e., WFI), a Limulus Amebocyte Lysate (LAL) test also is performed. The heterotrophic plate count requires laboratory manipulation (e.g., filtration/ plating), incubation, and reading, which require several days before results are available. Identification of bacteria found will take considerably longer. Therefore, a documentation system needs to be in place so that a correlation can be made between results and the system operating information at the time of sampling (such as the sanitization logs, flush logs, data from system operation records, the identification of the sampling technician, etc.)

11.8.2.1

General Testing Considerations

An initial, more intensive sampling program will be undertaken as part of the validation effort, and is discussed in Chapter 10 and in the Commissioning and Qualification Guide. This section focuses on ongoing microbial sampling and monitoring after the system has been placed in production. All use points in the distribution loop should be represented in a monitoring regimen. Testing of the water being supplied to the loop, prior to dilution in the distribution tank, provides important information on the efficacy of the purification system. For WFI or other water with endotoxin limitations, LAL testing is typically performed concurrently with the heterotrophic plate count. The water system is typically tested daily with individual sample ports being rotated through to include each point over a specified period. The specified period between samples for any given use point must be based on historical data. Sampling each point every week has generally been found acceptable by the FDA. With smaller systems, this may result in only one sample from the system on any day. Although it would be more costly, sampling multiple points each day can provide useful information about the system. For example, if one sample is found to be unacceptable, and there were no other samples taken on that day, it is difficult to know if the problem is from the use point, or throughout the system. However, if many samples were taken and only one use point had a problem, the quality of water from the remaining use points can be defended. The sampling performed should simulate the production use of that water. For example, water used through a hose should be sampled through the same hose. The flush performed prior to sampling (if any) should reflect the flush used prior to production use. Procedures for sampling and testing must adhere to aseptic technique to ensure that contamination is not introduced. The quantity of water used for analysis is a minimum of 1 ml for purified and non-compendial, and 100 ml for WFI, according to the USP. Larger quantities such as 100 ml for purified and 250 ml for WFI are recommended.

11.8.2.2

Testing Documentation

Sampling procedures should be delineated in an approved protocol (SOP). Testing methods also should be specified in an approved SOP. This would include the equipment and materials to be used, the procedures, growth promotion testing of the media, and negative controls. Procedures for performing the heterotrophic plate count are delineated in the latest edition of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. Note that organisms in pharmaceutical water will have adapted to a low nutrient environment, and a standard growth media may shock the organisms and result in erroneously low counts. Therefore, a low nutrient media may be more appropriate for the testing. All testing should follow a validated procedure. All methods, compendial or otherwise, should be shown to be effective on the particular system being tested.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, For new or modified systems, sampling testing should be completed as part of a Performance QualificaIDandnumber: 216389

tion (PQ). The PQ should provide an overview of the system or the modifications and delineate the monitoring program (the sample ports, frequency of testing, type of testing performed, relevant SOPs, etc.). When completed, the PQ should include testing results, investigations of Out Of Specification (OOS) results, special study results (such as a sanitization frequency study), a section for any deviations, and a summary report. The sampling regimen should include samples taken immediately prior to sanitization in order to exhibit worst case conditions.


192


APPENDIX Following qualification, testing must be performed routinely in order to ensure that microbiological control is maintained. The documentation system must provide ready access to test results.

11.8.2.3

Analysis of Results

The primary purpose of reviewing test results is to reveal OOS findings to ensure product is not jeopardized and so that correction can be made. The identification of the organisms found is an important part of the investigation since this will provide strong evidence of the source of contamination. For example, Staphylococcus is typical of sample handling problems; Bacillus is typical of environmental contamination of the sample port, and Gram negative rods are typical of water borne contamination. Follow-up sampling performed in reaction to the OOS result would be included in the investigation. 11.8.3

Sterilization/Sanitization Designs

Various designs may be incorporated to facilitate heat sanitization of process water distribution systems. In this section, two designs for sanitization are considered: •

Hot Pharmaceutical Water (80°C) System

•

Ambient Pharmaceutical Water System

a) See Section 11.4.4.4 on Pretreatment Processes - Control of Microbiological Growth earlier in this chapter. The boundaries for this design will be defined for each of the two designs set forth. The systems described are based on designs that have been found acceptable in a number of installations. It is recognized that a wide variety of system designs may meet the same objectives and also prove acceptable from a regulatory and operations standpoint. 11.8.4

Hot System Distribution Loop

In this system, the boundaries begin with the storage vessel and include pumps, distribution piping (all drops) and the return loop that terminates at the storage vessel. The storage vessel should be a fully jacketed vessel with the capability of heating and cooling. Heating of the storage vessel is usually achieved with steam. Cooling, when required, is achieved with chilled or cooling tower water. It has been found that a hot distillation system has a tendency to build heat when the effluent from the still is discharging into the tank. The effluent may be as high as 96°C. If the water is too hot, the distribution pump may cavitate or boiling will occur in the pump. In addition, the system may be more susceptible to “Rouge” when water is kept at temperatures exceeding 87°C.


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, When the system is down for maintenance or repairs or modification, ID number: 216389 it will be necessary to sanitize the A hot system is generally considered to be self sanitizing as long as the temperature of the circulating water is maintained between 75°C and 85°C.

system to bring down the microbiological load and to reduce the pyrogen burden.


The method used with hot systems is to flush the system, all sampling points, and all points of use with hot (80°C) water. The quality of the flush water must be at least as good as the water to be used in the system. Flushing with two to three volumes of the water in the distribution system should achieve sanitization. If sanitization is not achieved, then flushing must be continued and the source of the contaminant removed.


193

APPENDIX The heating medium may be hot liquid or steam. It should be designed to heat the ambient process water from 15 to 80°C within a specified period (generally two to four hours). If the heating and cooling heat exchangers are not directly installed in the return loop, process water should pass through when not in use for heating, eliminating the possibility of a dead leg. Most systems can be fully sanitized with 80°C circulating process water within two to three hours once 80°C process water temperature is achieved. As a safety note, all exposed piping and storage tank surfaces should be insulated to prevent accidental burning of personnel in the heat sanitization cycle. In addition, the points of use must be monitored during the entire sanitization cycle. 11.8.5

Cold System

The boundaries are the same as a hot system. A by-pass line may be provided to recirculate process water through the pretreatment train to avoid stagnant flow conditions. Sanitization of a cold system may be accomplished using hot water using two stainless steel double tube sheet heat exchangers, one for cooling and one for heating. The heat exchanger used for cooling is typically installed after the distribution pump(s). The heat exchanger used for heat sanitization is usually installed on the return loop just prior to the return to the storage tank. One heat exchanger to heat and cool the process water is a viable alternative, but should be designed for the more extreme temperature range. The heat exchanger for cooling may be cooled with cooling tower water, chilled, or domestic cold water. The cool down cycle should be designed to cool 80°C process water to approximately 15°C over a specified period (based on the operational needs). The initial cooling should be very gradual to prevent thermal shock. 11.8.6

Ozone System

Ozone (O3) is a naturally occurring triatomic form of oxygen. O3 is unstable at atmospheric temperatures and pressures, and decomposes readily into molecular oxygen (O2). There are no objectionable by-products or residues when water is disinfected with ozone. The presence of oxidizable substances will generate trace carbon dioxide and in the absence of oxidizable substances, only oxygen will be formed.


Very low concentrations of ozone of the order of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/l have been shown to control microbiological growth to below 1 CFU/100ml. Due to the limited half life, ozone must be produced on-site where it is required.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 11.8.6.1 Materials of Construction Herzlia, Few organic materials are unaffected contact. Gaskets, piping, vessels, filters, and ion exchange IDby ozone number: 216389 resins may be subject to attack, and therefore all materials that come in contact should be specifically selected.


PVC will be attacked by ozone, but PVDF and PTFE are not so vulnerable. Stainless steels that may be pitted by Chlorine resist ozone. Thus, ozone will not damage stainless steel stills and will be removed in the distillation process.

194


APPENDIX 11.8.6.2

Comparisons with Chlorine

Chlorine is relatively stable in water and is not described by any half-life characteristic. Ozone has a relatively short half-life depending on temperature and pH. At neutral pH and 20°C, this can be two hours in high purity water. Multiple feed points can reinforce the concentration of ozone in a very large distribution system. Removal of chlorine and many of its bi-products are comparatively difficult to remove. Absorption by activated carbon or reaction with bisulfite are the common methods used, each having its own specific problems. Chlorine may convert many organic substances into derivatives that have been identified with carcinogenicity. Ozone reverts to oxygen and/or carbon dioxide. Chlorine requires diffusion through the cell walls of the organism in order to degrade enzymes. Tests indicate that chlorine required more than 400 hours at a concentration of 0.1 mg/l to destroy 99% of 60,000 CFU of E. Coli. Ozone, when added to water using an efficient mixer, kills bacteria in seconds. At an equivalent CFU level to the chlorine test, ozone will destroy more than 99% in less than one minute.

11.8.6.3

Ozone Generation

There are two commercial methods to manufacture ozone: corona discharge and electrolytic generation. The corona discharge method uses an air/oxygen feed. It produces acceptable quality ozone for pharmaceutical purposes if the feed stream to the generator is sufficient low in nitrogen and moisture to avoid production of harmful level of nitric acid. Excessive levels of nitric acid in the ozone effluent can drop the pH and conductivity of the water below acceptable levels and promote corrosion of stainless steel surfaces. Pharmaceutical design typically employs a dryer and a molecular sieve to reduce nitrogen and moisture from the instrument air. The other commercial method of ozone production is electrolytic generation. Low conductivity water is used as the feed stream to a catalytic generation cell. Electrolytic ozone generators can be operated directly immersed in a side stream of the water circulating system or can be used to produce a gas first and then be transferred to the water using a conventional contractor device. Electrolytic generators typically produce lower contamination levels than corona discharge units, but are generally more capital cost intensive. Both can be operated successfully when designed and maintained properly.


11.8.6.4

Ozone System Installation


The optimum location for ozone injection is in the loop return, just before it re-enters the storage tank. To ensure ozone does not contaminate the pharmaceutical product, it may be removed shortly before the first “point of use.” Ozone destruction can be accomplished by various technologies including: •

Catalytic

•

Thermal

•

UV



195

APPENDIX •

Chemical

•

Time (half life in solution is 20 to 100 min.)

UV will destroy ozone in solution and catalytic destruct units will destroy the “off gases.” Ozone monitoring is required as follows: •

in solution prior to the ozone destruction

•

following the ozone destruction

•

return line to the storage tank

•

return ozone levels from loop piping during sanitation sequences

•

ambient air surrounding the system

Standard germicidal UV units with a high UVC (UV within the wavelengths of 220 to 290 nm) output using low-pressure mercury lamps are ideal for reducing ozone in pure water. The combination of ozone and UV is claimed to produce an oxidizing process more powerful than ozone alone. 11.8.7

UV Light

See Section 11.4.4.4C on Pretreatment Processes - Control of Microbiological Growth - UV Light earlier in this chapter.

11.8.7.1

Ultraviolet Lights

Flowing water may be exposed, at a controlled rate, to ultraviolet light waves. With proper maintenance, UV systems are simple and reliable, generating a high reduction in bacteria (99% plus) when operating at 254 nm wavelengths. However, the feedwater to a UV needs to be free of suspended solids which can “shadow” bacteria, preventing adequate UV contact. Therefore, it is only effective if there is direct light contact with microbes. Two different types of mercury vapor arc tubes generate UV light: low pressure and medium pressure. The pressure designation refers to the amount of gas pressure inside the particular arc tube. Low pressure is near a vacuum and generates a narrow wavelength band in the 254 nm range. Medium pressure arc tubes, near 1 atmosphere or slightly positive displacement, generate wavelengths ranging from 180 to 365 nm. The peak germicidal efficiency for UV light is between 254 and 265 nm.


11.8.7.2

Design and Installation of UV Lights


Water from a storage tank can be recirculated through UV light systems so that the entire system volume of the tank is treated. This results in multiple passes of the entire tank volume through the UV. This increases the overall cumulative dose and prevents reinfection in the storage tank. The minimum recycle rate to maintain disinfection is between 4-6 times per hour. When specifying or designing a UV unit, temperature conditions of the water must be taken into account. Conventional UV units have a maximum temperature limitation of 120°F (48.9°C) and require special cooling arrangements to withstand temperatures up to 150°F(65.6°C). Medium pressure units can withstand much higher temperatures up to 212°F (100°C) if necessary.


196


APPENDIX Pressure limitations also need to be recognized. Most UV units have a operating pressure limit of 100-120 psi. High pressures require special arrangements, such heavier flanges or an ASME code stamp. Most UV units are installed in a horizontal position to eliminate air pockets; however, consulting the manufacturer for their recommendations is appropriate. A log reduction target should be specified when purchasing a unit. All wetted parts should be similar to the storage and distribution system specifications. The use of UV units does not negate the need for periodic sanitization of the system. The specified dosage should be obtained even at the end of lamp life, as all UV lamps degrade and lose germicidal efficiency over time. The units should be sized so that a safety margin is built in so that even at the end of the lamp life (EOL), the minimum dose requirement is always exceeded.

11.8.7.3

UV Light Dosage and Sizing Requirements

Proper UV dosage measured in milli-watt seconds per square centimeter at the chamber wall determines the performance of a UV unit in storage and distribution systems. Each microorganism has been assigned a kill dose, known as D10 that produces a 1 log, or 90% kill rate. E. Coli, for example, has a D10 of 3 milli-watt seconds per square centimeter. This gives a 1 log reduction. To achieve a 3 log reduction, a dose of 6 milliwatt seconds is required. Most pharmaceutical water systems require at least a minimum of 30 milli-watt seconds per square centimeter dosage to maintain germicidal effectiveness. The following factors are involved in the selection of a UV unit to obtain satisfactory performance in storage and distribution systems: •

Flow-rate - The units must be sized to handle the maximum flow possible from the system.

•

Water quality is critical to the success of a UV unit’s performance. Whenever possible, a water sample should be obtained, and the water checked for UV transmission through a UV spectrophotometer. UV absorbing compounds such as iron, manganese, dissolved organics, turbidity, or suspended solids all affect germicidal efficiency. Although in the storage and distribution systems, only the dissolved organics should be seen.

•

Identification of microorganisms and concentrations also affect sizing. If there is a high concentration or multiple organisms, this could dictate a larger UV unit.

•

Temperature of the water also affects the choice of UV units. Low pressure units have specific temperature limitations, while medium pressure units do not. In very cold (5-10°C) or hot water systems (above 45°C) the arc tube efficiency is greatly reduced.

•

Whenever possible water in storage tanks or distribution loops should be recirculated through the UV unit. The ideal rate would be a minimum of four times per hour for the entire volume of the tank or the entire volume of the loop.


11.8.7.4

Characteristics


Conventional low-pressure units usually have multiple lamps in a chamber to achieve the proper amount of UV energy for germicidal energy. Medium pressure units usually employ a single lamp approach due to the much higher output of the individual lamp. Each lamp type has advantages depending upon the application. The lamps are enclosed within quartz sleeves which contact the water. All other wetted parts should be manufactured from an acceptable inert material, generally 316L SS. UV intensity and frequency should be monitored continuously and recorded.



197

APPENDIX 11.9

FABRICATION/PROCEDURES FOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

11.9.1

Introduction

Fabrication of the distribution system must be made with extreme care and precision to ensure a smooth internal finish that will not allow any crevices that will support or promote bacterial growth, metal corrosion, or particulate generation. The chapter provides an understanding of the requirements of fabrication, materials of construction, and specialized equipment required to fabricate a piping distribution system. Decisions concerning the material of construction, the orbital welding, the special handling, and the special environment required must be made and understood by the pharmaceutical manager responsible for the high purity water distribution piping fabrication and installation. Unlike the equipment selection, the piping fabrication will require selections of material with specific compositions, welding using inert gas envelopes, and a cleanroom environment. 11.9.2

Materials of Construction

Material selection should be consistent throughout the distribution, storage, and processing systems. The material should be rigid, capable of withstanding steam sterilizing temperatures (as required), cleaning solutions, passivation solutions (as required), and capable of maintaining a durable and corrosion resistant surface finish. The material in common use in pharmaceutical water systems is a stainless metal. Based on cost and ease of fabrication, this material is nickel chromium steel. Inert non-metallic materials also are available that can withstand steam sterilization (as required). These materials are used extensively in the electronics industry for ultra-pure water systems where they have proved themselves capable of containing and preserving the high level of purity used in the semi-conductor industry. 11.9.3

Types of Stainless Steel

Type 316L is the preferred steel for a high purity water generation and distribution system. The “L” designation indicates a low level of carbon compared to the non “L” grade. Alternates to 316L grades are 317L with its higher chromium and molybdenum contents and 304L with its higher chromium content but lower nickel and molybdenum levels.

11.9.3.1


Corrosive Resistance

Chromium content is the most important alloying element in stainless steel followed by nickel and molybdenum.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Steels with chromium in excess of 11.5% will form a protective film of chrome oxide on the metal surface. The presence of nickel in amounts moreID than 7% enhances the216389 corrosion resistance over the straight chromium number: grade and improves its ductility.


The performance of stainless steels is governed by the oxidizing characteristics of the environment, similarly to the oxidization of ordinary steels. Strong oxidizing conditions generate a superior protective coating for the stainless steel and a powdery rust on ordinary steels which eventually, if left unchecked, will consume all of the metal.

198


APPENDIX 11.9.4

Weldability and Polishability

Austenitic stainless steels such as AISI type 316L contain impurities in addition to the major elements described. These include: •

Sulfur (S)

•

Aluminum (Al)

•

Oxygen (O)

•

Silicon (Si)

•

Manganese (Mn)

•

Phosphorus (P)

•

Titanium (Ti)

•

Calcium (Ca)

The effects of some of these elements are cumulative inasmuch as the oxygen can offset some of the welding characteristics of low sulfur steels and the weld penetrations experienced with sulfur may be offset by high levels of aluminum. In addition, the ratio of the trace elements of aluminum to silicon has been shown to effect slag formation during welding which in turn produces inclusions. Manganese has been shown to combine with the sulfur and form manganese sulfide (MnS) inclusions on or in the surface of the metal. Even the major element chromium, may contribute toward oxide inclusions in the metal surface.

11.9.4.1

The Impact of Sulfur on Welding and Internal Finishing

Small amounts of sulfur improves machinability as well as weldability; however, with the advent of modern techniques in the steel refining process, the mills are able to produce steels at a cost with very specific chemical compositions. Low sulfur AISI 316L steels when based on the specification limit of 0.03% have some advantages to obtaining an unpitted polish, but other impurities such as manganese, silicon, oxygen, aluminum, calcium, titanium, and chromium can contribute to the oxide inclusions that we are trying to minimize by reducing sulfur content.


A mid-range sulfur content would be ideal for welding but any mismatch in the sulfur content of the mating parts will easily outweigh the advantages of low or lower sulfur levels.


An ideal compromise would be a level between 0.005% and 0.02% or a modified maximum limit of 0.02% since the lower limit will probably not be attained. However, if not all welded parts can be obtained at similar levels, the exercise produces very little overall advantage.

11.9.4.2

Heat Number and its Impact on Weldabilty


Weld parameters will remain consistent and orbital welding processors will reproduce similar welds if the material remains the same. Since the melting point of steel varies over a range depending upon the concentration of each element present in the steel, the amount of heat required to melt and thus attain the liquefaction of the steel will vary from concentration to concentration.


199

APPENDIX Each “melt” of steel is assigned a “Heat Number” to identify the mix or exact composition of the steel. 316L stainless steel has a wide tolerance of “active” elements such as chromium, molybdenum, nickel, and carbon which vary as much as 100% and as little as 12%. These variations will change the melting point and the electrical current input of the welding machine considerably. While the “Heat Number” can be specified for all tubing purchased for a specific distribution system, the heat number for connected fittings and valves are more difficult to control. Where possible, all fittings, valves, tubing, and weldable pieces of the same nominal size (diameter) should be purchased and manufactured from AISI 316L steel with the same Heat Number in order to standardize the weld quality for each tubing size. 11.9.5

Corrosion Hazards of Stainless Steels

While being protected by the chrome oxide film, which will guard against most corrosive attacks, there remains five corrosive hazards associated with the successful use of stainless steels. a) Intergranular Corrosion Austenitic 300 series stainless steels which do not contain any of the stabilizing elements, titanium, or columbium are susceptible to intergranular corrosion which can cause early failure or reduced life. b) Galvanic Corrosion Occurs when an assembly of dissimilar metals is immersed an any solution which acts as an electrolyte. Therefore, any transition of drain or condensate piping to a dissimilar metal should use a dielectric union to prevent electrolysis. It is recommended to maintain drains and condensate from pharmaceutical water and steam in stainless steel due to corrosivity of fluid. c) Contact Corrosion Occurs when small pieces of carbon steel, scale, copper or other foreign material is lodged on the surface of stainless steel. d) Pitting or Pinhole Corrosion Solutions containing chlorides may attack stainless steel in a pitting action. This is usually due to high concentrations of the chloride ion due to evaporation. e) Stress Corrosion Cracking


Chloride solutions are the worst offenders in promoting stress cracking. Cracking is most likely to occur in hot rather than cold solutions. High and low stresses in the same member produce a condition likely to result in stress corrosion if chlorides are present.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Corrective action is to keep the internal strain in stainless steels as low as possible by fully annealing or Herzlia, utilizing stress relieved versions of stainless steels at 1200°F. ID number: 216389

Select tubing with good concentricity and close wall thickness tolerance to avoid high and uneven stresses when tubes are rolled into tube bundle headers etc.


Avoid joining dissimilar metals and avoid cyclic bending.

200


APPENDIX 11.9.6

Corrosion Protection of Stainless Steel

Surface protection of chromium nickel stainless steel is inherent when chromium levels are in excess of 11.5%. A passive or inert surface is established naturally with these steels due to exposure to air, aerated water, and other oxidizing atmospheres. Airborne impurities, heating, and other direct contact materials can damage this protective film causing the metal to be compromised in its ability to ward off the corrosive process.

11.9.6.1

Passivation of Stainless Steels to Restore Protective Film

Passivation is the process that establishes a surface or film on nickel-chrome steels and maximizes the corrosion resistance. The passivation process cleans the exposed surfaces of the contaminates, soils, and surface impurities that cause film damage. The process forms a new strong protective film in areas that have become “active” or sensitized due to welding.

11.9.6.2

Rouging or Ferric Oxide Discoloration of SS Systems

Rouging is seen in many water systems, but is more prominent in hot, distilled, and clean steam systems. Rouge can be in the form of dust or a light film that can be wiped off. Rouge also can be in the form of a bonded multi-layer that requires scraping with a sharp tool to remove. Rouge is found in many forms: •

Orange - found in high purity/high temperature systems

•

Light Red - found in high purity/high temperature systems

•

Red - found in high purity/high temperature systems

•

Reddish Brown - found in high purity/high temperature systems

•

Purple - found in clean steam and high temperature water systems

•

Blue - found in clean steam systems

•

Gray - found in clean steam systems

•

Black - found in clean steam systems


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Castings and Forgings for Vessel Components ID number: 216389

See appendix section on passivation for more details. 11.9.7

Most castings and forgings are used for components attached to vessels, such as agitator impeller hubs and instrument housings. Castings typically contain higher levels of ferrite that can cause potential problems with components in contact with high purity water (rouging). In addition, castings are usually more porous or grainier, and will not typically take a polish higher than a 4 at best. Forgings are less susceptible to rouging and can be polished up to a 8 mirror finish.



201

APPENDIX 11.9.7.1

General: Sanitary Tubing and Piping

•

The piping or tubing and valve ends to be joined by welding must be within the set tolerances as far as inside diameter and out of roundness is concerned.

•

All the welds should be done with automatic welding machines (orbital welding) with insert gas (Ar) blanket where possible.

•

If unavoidable, the last weld of an assembly may be done manually by a qualified, certified welder.

•

All welds should be documented and inspected.

•

If orbital welding is done, a video tape (borescope) can be prepared for random welds; however, this is optional. Also, an isometric or piping drawing should be marked identifying each weld by a unique number, date, and welder ID number.

•

The piping (tubing) installation should be done according to approved piping drawings (orthographic and/ or isometrics).

•

The piping support method and the support spacing should be in accordance with the piping specification and applicable drawings. It is very important that the installing contractor follows the design documents and does not use shortcuts as the piping support spacing is based on calculations to assure the permitted deflection (sagging) of the pipe between the adjacent supports.

•

As the piping system larger sections are installed, the piping installation contractor shall make up the latest issue of the piping drawings verifying that the system is installed in accordance with the applicable drawings, ensuring all valves, fittings, etc., are installed. If there are deviations from the drawing, the drawing shall be marked up for the preparation of an “as-built” final revision. The “as-built” revision of the drawing should be approved by the user. The user should have access to the “as-built” drawings. The qualification protocol completion report should make reference to the “as-built” drawings.

•

The installed piping system should be pressure tested according to the requirements of the piping fabrication specification. During the performance of the pressure test, the pipe slope should be checked and documented. During the pressure testing, the piping is not insulated, but is full with water - a condition closest to the operating condition. If there are deviations from the required slopes due to faulty installation due to a larger than specified pipe support span, the installation needs to be corrected. The main purpose of the pipe slope is the assurance of self drainage. The results of the pressure test and slope measurements should be documented.

After the piping (tubing) system installation, pressure testing, and pipe slope parameters are satisfied and accepted, the system is ready for passivation.


11.9.8

Surface Finish of Stainless Steels

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, 300 series stainless steel “sheet” may be produced with a very fine grain, slightly milky appearance through to a bright highly reflective finish produced on mirror polished rolls. ID number: 216389 11.9.8.1

Cold Rolled Stainless Steel Finishes

These terms are used by the steel mills without a good method of quantifying the surface quality, roughness, and texture.


Mills also relate to the ASTM or AIAI finishes which range from 1 to 8, where 8 is a “mirror finish.” This method also is subjective and relates to the method used to obtain the finish.

202


APPENDIX 11.9.8.2

Stainless Steel Polishes and Improved Finishes

A third identification method commonly used to define surface finishes is the “Grit Finish” which is the number of scratch lines per inch of surface produced by an abrasive wheel or belt. While this system qualifies the finish and allows acceptance based on measurable criteria, the criteria is not a true measure of the surface quality as it does not define the depth of the “scratch lines.” Grit finishes come in grades related to the standard abrasive tools or surfaces: 20 grit = 100+ RMS and 90+ RA 180 - same as a 2B finish - = 80 RMS and 70 RA approximately 240 - between a 2B and a 3A finish - = 15 to 63 RMS and 14 to 57 RA 320 - same as an 8 finish - is 10 to 32 RMS and 9 to 29 RA 500 - same as a 9 finish - is 4 to 16 RMS and 4 to 14 RA

11.9.8.3

Electro-Polishing of Stainless Steel

Mechanical finishing has certain inherent deficiencies, one of which is the tendency to enlarge the exposed surface area. Electro-polishing is able to improve the mechanical finish by rounding off the sharp peaks of the “scratch lines.” The advantages of electro-polishing are: •

reduces the surface areas

•

provides a sanitary acceptable surface finish

•

cleans the surface

•

passivates the surface of stainless steel with a chromium layer

•

removes impurities trapped below folded layers of mechanically formed ridges

•

reveals defects that have been hidden by mechanical polishing through smearing effect


Electro-polishing requires a mechanical polish preparation developed with a uniform progressive grit polishing application.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein 11.9.9 Stainless Steel Distribution Piping Herzlia, Stainless steel pipe is available in heavy gage “schedule” piping, thin wall solid drawn tubing, and thin wall ID number: 216389 seamed tubing.

11.9.9.1


Solid Drawn Thin Wall Tubing

The selected materials are available in solid drawn tube suitable for the type of service expected from a high purity water distribution system.


203

APPENDIX This is an acceptable material for a high purity water loop and should conform to ASTM A632. Tubing should be 16 gauge (.065 in./0.165 cm) for tubing diameters of between 1 and 3 inches (2.54 and 7.62 cm) inclusive and 14 gauge for 4 in. (10.16 cm) diameter.

11.9.9.2

Welded Seam Thin Wall Tubing

Acceptable thin wall tubing is available at a reduced cost with a welded seam produced in an oxygen free environment. (TIG) The tubing is available with a uniform smooth surface in accordance with ASTM A269 and may be polished mechanically and electrically to a suitable surface finish. 0.065 in. (0.165 cm) thick sheet metal is used for the manufacture of seamed tubing between 2 and 3 inches (5.08 and 7.62 cm) diameter with .083 in. thick for 4 in. (10.16 cm) diameter and progressively larger for 5 in. (12.7 cm) and above to suit the application and location. The metal is cut and cold rolled to form a round tube. The tube is clamped so that the two edges make contact. The inside and outside of the tube is blanketed with Argon gas to expel all oxygen and the seam is welded without filler, producing a consistent smooth and oxidation free surface inside and out.

11.9.9.3

Material and Installation Certifications

•

mill test certificate of piping/tubing material

•

weld test, spot x-ray of carbon steel piping welds, borescope of stainless steel piping/tubing welds

•

pressure test, slope measurement certificate

•

weld identification on piping drawings

11.9.10

Elbows/Bends In Tubing

While butt joints can be accomplished leaving a smooth surface free of pits, crevices and oxidation, welds are expensive and should be minimized. Current practice is to use tight welded elbows for each directional change in the distribution piping. Considering the extent of high purity water distribution piping involving points of use drops from 25 in a small system to more than 100 in a large one, the total number of elbows is considerable. These can range from 130 to 500 and from 60 to 1000 welds to install them.


The purchase of longer lengths than the standard 20 ft (6 m) lengths (say 40 ft (12 m) lengths) and the utilization of long sweeping bends, instead of the traditional tight welded elbows can reduce the total number of welds by up to 60% and the total pipe used by 10%.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Any reduction in these requirements due number: to frictional improvements of large sweeping bends compared to ID 216389

High purity water systems, in order to maintain flow at all times without stagnation, water must be pumped continuously with the associated energy requirements.

tight traditional bends are added to the advantages of the change from elbows to bends.


Sweeping bends may be accommodated in many areas and with careful design, the advantageous could be exploited. Large sweeping bends are preferred in order to reduce the potential of wrinkling and/or damage to the internal pipe finish.

204


APPENDIX 11.9.11

Types of Non-Metallic Materials

Few compatible non-metallic piping materials are available that will withstand the rigors of a pharmaceutical high purity water system, such as: •

80 to 90°C operation or periodic sanitization

•

121°C steam sterilizing temperatures

•

ozone and or chlorine contact

One such material that will support the above requirements and limit extractable to a minimum level compatible with stainless steel is polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF). This material is available in a compatible range of pipe diameters, surface finishes, and automated orbital welding capability.

11.9.11.1

Corrosive Resistance of PVDF

PVDF is inert and will not exhibit any surface corrosion when in contact with 90°C high purity water or commonly used oxidizers.

11.9.11.2

Weldability and Polishability of PVDF

The surface finish of PVDF is equivalent to electro-polished stainless steel and the fusion welding equipment and capabilities are similar to stainless steel orbital welders.

11.9.11.3

PVDF Distribution Piping and Fittings

Weldable fittings, elbows, tees, reducers, adapters, diaphragm valves, zero static valves, flow meters, regulators, etc. are available for PVDF pipe.

11.9.11.4

Pressure Rating of PVDF Piping Systems

Rated pressures for PVDF piping ranges from 230 psi at 68°C to 50 psi at 149°C. Due to softening at elevated temperatures, continuous support is recommended for systems that are operated at 65°C or above.

11.10


DESIGN OF A WFI/PURIFIED WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

The layout and general design of a high purity water system (WFI or purified water) should be consistent and follow good manufacturing guidelines in respect to installation, support, natural drainage, flow rates, dead or stagnation areas (dead legs), and minimization of areas that may promote micro-organism growth. 11.10.1

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Fittings and Equipment ID number: 216389

All equipment that, when installed, comes in direct contact with the high purity water should use a suitable stainless steel or non-metallic material for all contact areas, except for valve diaphragms and tri-clamp gaskets.


This includes all valves and monitoring sensors.


205

APPENDIX Valve design should be sanitary diaphragm type, installed at approximately 60°C to the vertical to optimize drainability. Hash marks or drain dots are provided on many designs to allow precise orientation of the valves in horizontal installations. PTFE Teflon faced diaphragms are preferred for hot water applications, covering a temperature range from 30 to 350°F (0 to 177°C). Connecting flanges for all valves and fittings should be tri-clamp design. 11.10.2

Natural Drainage

Well designed distribution loops should be installed overhead and point of use valves should be located at a convenient location within the process or user area, below the distribution loop. Slopes should be verified externally after hanging and before insulation is installed. Hangers should use steel clamps/fittings with Viton or similar inserts designed for use with the particular tubing, installed for SS at least on 10 ft (3 m) centers. Support for PVDF piping should be appropriate for the operating temperatures. Continuous support of plastic pipe should be considered using angle iron or equivalent to prevent slope changes due to expansion and contraction and point stresses from hangers. Piping distribution from an unavoidable low point in the system, such as the storage tank discharge elbow, should be designed with a clear low point and a sanitary drain valve installed with a maximum of 6 diameter dead leg (no less than 6 diameters from the centerline of the main line to the valve center line based on the main line diameter). Slope of distribution system process pipe or tubing should be a minimum of 1/16 in./ft (0.52 cm/m). Location of all drain valves should be totally and easily accessible.

11.11

FABRICATION OF A WFI/PURIFIED WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

High purity water distribution systems using the material and finishes specified above must be joined using acceptable welding or other sanitary techniques. 11.11.1

Assurance of Quality Distribution Piping

The distribution piping and storage systems should be installed in accordance with cGMPs and should be fabricated, manufactured, procured, and installed in strict accordance with explicit operating procedures. 11.11.2


Operating Procedures Should Include the Following:

Purchase of components for the distribution and storage system from a list of selected/preferred vendors. Procurement of specific components based on preferred part numbers, listed for each vendor where applicable. Procurement of other components, such as valves, pumps, filters, instruments, and tanks etc. using approved specifications.


Inspection of all components of the system on receipt for compliance and/or damage. Verification of the bill of lading using a detailed list of purchased parts.


The qualification of welding procedures in accordance with a detailed list of set-up parameters for:

206


APPENDIX a) Receiving, fabrication, cutting, end facing, and welding to be performed in a clean area devoid of any equipment previously used on “carbon” steels. b) Tubing specification, heat lot, diameter to be used for the specific application •

Check tubing for crushing and confirm the nominal diameter.

•

Examine interior and exterior of tubing for physical damage, scratches (interior) dirt or grease.

•

Clean tubing of grease and dirt using an approved cleaning solvent isopropyl alcohol (IPA) and lint free cloth. Repeat cleaning until lint free cloth is visually free of grease or dirt.

c) Length of tubing and facing specifications. Cut tubing to length and finish with a square deburred butt end or as recommended by the fusion welding equipment supplier.

11.11.2.1

Cleaning

•

Place a lint free cloth in tubing prior to facing and/or deburring.

•

Use only Isopropyl alcohol as a cleaner solvent for SS and other appropriate solvent for PVDF. Use sparingly and ensure that all traces have evaporated prior to bagging.

•

Use only lint free cloths such as “Texwipe.”

•

Clean both inside and outside of tube ends and do not touch the end area with bare hands or soiled material.

11.11.2.2

Protection

a) Bag the prepared tubing or the ends of the tubing with clear plastic bags and tape the bag to the tubing if the tubing is not to be welded within two hours or if the tube is to be welded outside the clean fabrication area. b) Weld fittings, elbows, tees, etc. should be examined similar to the tubing and cleaned of all dirt or grease prior to welding. All weld fittings should be received, sealed in a plastic or other lint free, non-metallic sealed bag. c) The fitting should remain in the bag until just prior to welding or for inspection following receipt.


Valves and instruments, etc. should be procured with tri-clamp or suitable sanitary type fittings and mating fittings should be welded onto the tubing in accordance with the system design. Receipt should be in a totally enclosed sealed lint free bag, similar to the weld fittings.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Welding of tubing, weld fittings, tri-clamp, or suitable sanitary type fittings should be performed inside the Herzlia, fabrication cleanroom, using TIG orbital welding for SS throughout and PVDF fusion machine for PVDF. ID number: 216389 Purging of each assembly with Argon Purge gas should be completed for all SS prior to welding. The gas should be 99.999% pure and contain less than 1ppm of moisture or 2ppm of oxygen.


The complete removal of all air should be accomplished prior to commencing welding.


207

APPENDIX Welder qualifications should be performed for all welders and re-qualification at the commencement of each work-day and/or the change to a different diameter. 11.11.3

Clean Preparation Area

A cleanroom/trailer should be used to ensure that welding, bending, and fabrication of high purity water piping are not contaminated with metal or non-metallic particulates. The area should be filtered to control particulates with limited controlled access. The following procedures should be followed: •

All cutting and welding equipment should be cleaned of any impurities or particulates.

•

The room should be maintained clean at all times and access should be across sticky floor mats.

•

All piping and fittings should be cleaned prior to and following welding.

•

Assemblies should be bagged following welding and the bags removed just prior to making field welds.

•

Welding and fitting technicians should use overshoes and cleanroom gloves. The gloves are worn to prevent finger print oils from getting onto the pipe.

The above procedures are currently typical for a high purity piping system for the semi-conductor industry and is considered advisable for pharmaceutical installations with similar requirements. Inspection of completed welds is sometimes not possible or practical. Remote borescope inspection is limiting and often not precise. Common practice and the practice recommended is to provide a validated process for all welds, a precise instrument to make the welds, an inert environment around the weld and a clean contact surface. These goals may not be accomplished if the environment for storage and the welding process is not controlled. Skin oils and metal particulates will contaminate the surfaces of the mating tubing. The mating surfaces must be cleaned and maintained clean through the welding process to ensure a contamination free weld and therefore a validated weld. The use of a clean area and clean area procedures will protect the welds and reduce the defect incidents associated with contaminates in the welding areas. (This approach has been shown to be cost effective by the cost sensitive semi-conductor industry.) Spot checks of the outside and inside surfaces on a percentage or time basis will provide assurance of the system efficiency. 11.11.4


Joints Using Fusion Butt Welding

Orbital welding is the recommended industry standard for high purity water systems in biotech, pharmaceutical and semi-conductor industries. This is due to the smooth inner weld bead that is characteristic of this joining process.

11.11.4.1

Orbital Welding


Orbital welding is a welding method used for joining stainless steel piping and tubing with electric arc in a welding machine not using any filler (welding rod) under inert atmosphere argon (Ar). Electric power characteristics are displayed on the control panel instruments and, if required, a printout of the welding parameters can be obtained.


208


APPENDIX 11.11.4.2

Borescoping

A borescope is a fiber optic instrument with a monitor (TV screen and optional video tape recorder) used for inspecting the weld inside the pipe or tubing. The fiber-glass cable is a maximum 20 ft. long with a light and lens at the end. Borescoping is done for verification of the weld quality. With the control of the welding process and the processing area, borescope inspection of the inside of the weld is only considered necessary as a means of control and is recommended as part of the qualifying process for the weld size and daily restart checks. (See details later in this Section.) Video recording each weld is considered un-necessary and difficult to justify. 11.11.5

High Tech. Orbital Tube and Pipe Welding for Stainless Steel

Semi-automatic, programmable, orbital, inert gas purged welding equipment for both tube and pipe is available from many manufacturers. The basic principals and techniques are the same for all commercial machines. The system is an automatic “Heliarc” or “TIG”(Tungsten Inert Gas) process where Inert Argon gas from a cryogenic or low temperature source is used to protect the molten steel from oxidation during the metal fusion. Liquid argon in Dewers is preferred due to its high purity at 99.999%. A gas purifier such as the Nanochem should be used during purging to bring the contaminants down to the ppb levels which is preferred. The above equipment will weld stainless steels, nickel based alloys, titanium, and aluminum.

11.11.5.1

Accessories

Welding accessories are available to assist in set-up, alignment of pipe butts, purging, fitting alignment, pretacking fixtures, and finishing of the pipe ends in preparation for welding. 11.11.6

Weld Criteria

•

Weld quality must meet the strictest standards.

•

All welds must be fully penetrated around the entire weld perimeter with no crevices or entrapment sites. These areas are particularly vulnerable to crevice corrosion.

•

All welds should be smooth, uniform, complete and flat, not concave, on the outside.

•

The weld should have a uniform and complete weld bead width on the inside with little or no convexity.

•

The inner weld bead should contain no concavity.

• •


Mr. Shlomo Sackstein There should be no visible signs of oxidation/discoloration Herzlia, of the inner weld. The joints should be square facing properly aligned. Tubing surfaces should not be offset in any ID and number: 216389 plane or direction by more than +/-0.003 in.

•


The weld width should be nominal 1/8 in. wide.


209

APPENDIX 11.11.6.1

Welder Qualification

There are many types of metals and even more methods of good joining of metal parts by welding. Each welder performing welding on certain metals must be qualified for this type of metal and welding. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and the American Welding Society (AWS) have welding procedures for welder qualifications. Each qualified welder should be formally qualified with a certificate qualifying him or her for a certain type of weld. As a general rule, welders and welding procedures are qualified to ASME B 31.3 (chemical plant and petroleum refinery piping), that incorporates ASME Section IX by reference.

11.11.6.2

Common Test Methods for Installed Piping

Test methods on installed piping are: pressure testing, Verification of slope and the last step of passivation requiring the testing of the final rinse water. 11.11.7

Weld Defects Examples

11.11.7.1

Joint Misalignment

Poor alignment of joint caused by equipment or procedure failure. Follow GMP welding procedures/use tube alignment gauge.

11.11.7.2

Lack of Penetration

Weld bead does not completely penetrate the ID of tube caused by poor setting of weld program parameters, material thickness and/or composition did not allow for complete penetration or improper welding amperage caused by power fluctuations. Develop proper welding parameters/adjust program to compensate for thickness or material/adjust for amperage fluctuation.

11.11.7.3

Excessive Penetration

Weld bead over penetrates causing excessive concavity or spikes caused by incorrect weld program (too hot), excessive welding amperage caused by power fluctuations or material thickness and/or composition which, caused excessive penetration.


Develop proper welding parameters/adjust program/use dedicated circuit.

11.11.7.4

Lack of I.D. Purge

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Sugaring of the weld bead caused by a lack of ID purge. 216389 ID number:

Discoloration/oxidization in the heat effected zone caused by a lack of ID purge or the use of an impure purge gas.

Monitor the purge-flow at the weld site and ensure the hose is not pinched.


11.11.7.5

Interrupted Purge

A short segment of discoloration/oxidation and excessive penetration caused by a momentary purge gas pressure drop commonly caused by a pinched gas line.

210


APPENDIX Monitor purge-flow and ensure the gas hose is not pinched.

11.11.7.6

Purge Gas Purity Problems

Coloration/oxidation along the weld area caused by impurities in the weld purge gas or in or on the metal surface. Eliminate purge and surface impurities and check for excessive concentrations of oxygen and moisture.

11.11.7.7

Heat Tint/Haze

Light coloration/haze along weld area caused by minor impurities in weld purge gas or metal surface. Eliminate impurities in weld zone.

11.11.7.8

Oxidation/Discoloration

Discoloration ranging from blue/brown haze to dark blue with black edges caused by oxygen contaminated purge gas, incomplete sealing, or insufficient pre-purge. Ensure the complete sealing of the purged line and monitor the purge flow and purity.

11.11.7.9

Insufficient Tie-In

Weld on OD is good, but the ID is incomplete and does not overlap weld start caused by incorrect speed or time in the weld program. (Uncalibrated weld head.) Use high quality welding equipment and check for appropriate procedures.

11.11.7.10 Electrical Current Fluctuations Significant narrowing of ID weld bead width and/or lack of penetration of tube ID in affected areas caused by electrical power fluctuations (not using a dedicated circuit). Ensure that a dedicated circuit is used.

11.11.7.11 Inclusions/Dross(non-metallic substance) Non-metallic formation on ID weld caused by tungsten inclusion.


Use high quality base material for welding rod.

11.11.7.12 Pinholing

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Ramp (feather) the welding amperage properly and provide post purge. ID number: 216389

Small holes in the weld bead caused by the weld puddle being cooled to rapidly.

11.11.7.13 Porosity


Metallic or non-metallic impurities trapped in the weld bead (tungsten or slag) caused by the introduction of impurities from outside or from the weld material. Eliminate impurities from outside or from the metal.


211

APPENDIX 11.11.7.14 Cracking Cracks in either the surface of the weld caused by brittle metal or use of a very hot weld program with rapid cooling. Use only good quality materials and acceptable welding programs. Do not quench or cool the weld. 11.11.8

High Tech. Orbital Tube and Pipe Welding for PVDF Piping

Semi automatic fusion welding machines are available for orbital welding of PVDF piping. An elastic pressure element backs up the inside of the fusion zone, totally avoiding an inner bead. A controlled pressure thermoplastic melt optimizes the homogeneous joint between the plastic parts, producing a consistent joint quality. 11.11.9

Remedial Action for Defective Welds - SS or PVDF Piping

Rewelding or weld repairs are not acceptable. Weld Replacements The following is a procedure for replacing defective welds: a) Cut out rejected weld using a band or cut-off saw. b) Where possible, retain section for further inspection. c) Prepare faces of tubing and check for signs of discoloration. d) Ensure that all traces of any heat effected areas are removed. e) Cut and shape pipe ends using proprietary facing equipment. f)

Debur and reweld.

g) Assign a “R” suffix to weld number. 11.11.10

Joints Using Sanitary Clamps


The sanitary clamp system of quick disconnect fittings are designed to provide a smooth non-contacting or non-corrosive environment. The sanitary joints may be cleaned in place, provide leak tight connections and may be adapted to other forms of piping.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, These joints should be used for all distribution pipe connections to valves, sensor housings, and fittings not adaptable to orbital fusion welding. ID number: 216389 Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM

212


APPENDIX 11.12

ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

11.12.1

Definitions

ABS - A plastic material used to make pipe; based on combinations of acrylonitrile, butadiene and styrene; ABS is a relative inert material and contributes little in the way of contamination to pharmaceutical water. Absorption - Assimilation of molecules or other substances into the physical structure of a liquid or solid without chemical reaction. Aerobic Bacteria - Bacteria capable of growing in the presence of oxygen. Anaerobic Bacteria - Bacteria capable of growing in the absence of oxygen. As-Built Drawings (Record Drawings) - Construction drawings and specifications that represent the physical condition of the plant or system at turnover from the designer or installer at satisfactory operation. These documents supplement and compliment the system manuals and protocols. Backwash - The process of flowing water in the opposite direction from normal service flow through a filter bed or ion exchange bed. The purpose of backwashing a sand filter is to clean it by washing away all the material it has collected during its service cycle. The purpose of backwashing a carbon filter is also to clean it, but primarily to eliminate flow channels that might have formed and to expose new absorption sites. Bacteria - Single-celled microorganisms measured in high purity water by several means: culturing, high power microscope, or Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM). The value is reported as Colony Forming Units (CFU), or colonies per milliliter or per liter. The bacteria in the water act as particle contamination on the surface of the product, or as a source of detrimental by-products. See Pyrogen. Blowdown - The withdrawal of water from an evaporating water system to maintain a solids balance within specified limits of concentration of those solids. BOD - Biological oxygen demand of water. This is the oxygen required by bacteria for oxidation of the soluble organic matter under controlled test conditions. Breakthrough - Passage of a substance through a bed, filter, or process designed to eliminate it. For ion exchange processes, the first signs are leakage of ions (in mixed beds, usually silica) and the resultant increase in conductivity. For organic removal beds, usually small, volatile compounds (THMs are common in activated carbon). Calibration - A comparison of a measurement standard or instrument of unknown accuracy to detect, correlate, report, or eliminate by adjustment of any variation in the accuracy of the unknown standard or instrument.


Cation Exchange Resin - An ion exchange resin which removes positively charged ions.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Certified Vendor Drawings - Drawings prepared by vendors for the fabrication of equipment, specialty Herzlia, components, and skid mounted systems. These are certified as fabricated by the vendor and become the official document for the equipment ID involved. number: 216389 Commissioning - A prescribed number of activities designed to take equipment and systems from a static, substantially complete state to an operable state.


Conductivity - A measure of flow of electrical current through water. This conductance is high with high Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) water and very low with ultrapure deionized water. Conductivity is the reciprocal of resistivity (C=1/R) and is measured in micromho/cm (µmho/cm) or microsiemens/cm (µS/cm).


213

APPENDIX Contaminant - Any foreign component present in another substance. For example, anything in water that is not H2O is a contaminant. Critical Instrument - These are the instruments used to measure critical parameters. Critical Parameter - These are the measured values that would determine process compliance and cause a system to revert to a fail-safe mode. Drinking Water - EPA primary drinking water or comparable regulations of the European Union or Japan. Endotoxins - Pyrogens from certain Gram negative bacteria. Generally highly toxic Lipopolysaccharideprotein complexes (fat, linked sugars, and protein) from cell walls. A marker for these bacteria with a reputation for persistent contamination because they tend to adhere to surfaces. See Pyrogen. Enhanced Documentation - Collection of Engineering, Quality Control and Regulatory Affairs documents which will be required for the operation, validation, maintenance, and regulatory compliance of a pharmaceutical plant. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency. Extractable - Trace material from piping and/or equipment which have been extracted by the processed fluid. FDA - US Food and Drug Administration. General Arrangement - A more specific version of a general layout which includes the system interface points, space requirements, ergonomics, construction issues, manufacturing flow of materials and operators, maintenance requirements, and future expansion or alterations. General Equipment Layout - A diagram that relates the unit operations of the system to one another. Its development should depend on production requirements, product matrix, and possibilities for future expansion. Good Engineering Practices (GEP) - Standards, specifications, codes, regulatory and industrial guidelines and accepted engineering and design methods to design, erect, operate, and maintain a pharmaceutical facilities taking into account not only regulatory compliance, but also safety, economics, environment protection, and operability. Standards and specifications are provided by recognized sources such as established engineering contractors and pharmaceutical companies. Codes are provided by local, state or federal jurisdictions, or insurance companies. Guidelines are issued by professional societies, industrial organizations, or regulatory agencies. Engineering design methods have been established in the engineering educational system.


Grains Per Gallon - A unit of concentration. 1 grain/gal = 17.1 mg/l.

Gram Negative Bacteria - A basic classification of bacterial type, along with “Gram positive.” These organisms resist straining by the Gram technique. Sometimes considered “bad” bacteria when discussing pollution or contamination; however, this is an artificial and quite broad classification.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Halogens - Atoms of the chlorine family also include216389 fluorine, bromine, and iodine. ID which number:

Hardness - The concentration of calcium and magnesium salts in water. Hardness is a term originally referring to the soap-consuming power of water; as such it is sometimes also taken to include iron and manganese. “Permanent hardness” is the excess of hardness over alkalinity. “Temporary hardness” is hardness equal to or less than the alkalinity. These also are referred to as “non-carbonated” or “carbonate” hardness, respectively.


214


APPENDIX High Purity Water - Water conforming to USP Monographs or equivalent. Heavy Metals - High molecular weight metal ions, such as lead. Known for their interference with many processes, and “poisoning” of catalysts, membranes, and resins. Humic Acid - The classical method for fractionating the humic colloids that disperse in the sodium hydroxide extract is to acidify the suspension with sulphuric or hydrochloric acid, which causes a part of the dispersed organic matter to precipitate. The part that stays in solution is known as fulvic acid, that which precipitates out as humic acid, and that part of the organic matter which does not disperse in the alkali but remains in the soil as humin. Hydrocarbons - Organic compounds containing only carbon and hydrogen. Sometimes broadened to include compounds or mixtures of compounds with small amounts of oxygen also. Hydrophilic - Having an affinity for water. Its opposite, non-water-wettable, is hydrophobic. Inorganics - Chemical compounds which are not organic in nature. Inorganics that are soluble in water generally split into negative and positive ions, allowing their removal by deionization. Instrument List - A list of instrumentation which includes the instrument tag number, instrument name, manufacturer name, model and serial number, P&ID reference, critical or non-critical, and local or panel mounted. Ion - An atom or radical in solution carrying an integral electric charge, either positive (cation) or negative (anion). Ion Exchange (IX) - One of the processes used to further reduce the concentration of ions in water supplies referred to as total dissolved solids removal. The process uses anion and cation exchange resin to chemically react with and remove the remaining ions or TDS in the water. This process results in water with virtually no TDS. Ion Exchange Regeneration - The process by which ion exchange resin that can no longer effectively remove ions from the water is recharged. This recharging or regeneration is performed by adding an excess of caustic (NaOH) to the anion resin and an excess of either hydrochloric acid (HCl) or sulfuric acid (H2SO4) to the anion resin. These regenerant solutions are allowed to flow through the resin beds at specific flow rates for specific periods of time depending on the type of resin, the ionic load, and the final purity desired. The regenerant solutions react with the ion exchange resin releasing the removed cations and anions which are then carried away to drain by the flow of the regenerant chemicals. The excess chemical is rinsed from the ion exchange resin with purified water when the bed is ready for another service cycle.


Ion Exchange Resin - A styrene-divinylbenzene or acrylic copolymer formed into small, spherical, and highly porous beads about the size of a pinhead. These inert beads are chemically treated so that they perform as if they were chemical compounds.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Membrane - A barrier, usually thin, that the passage216389 only of particles up to a certain size or of special IDpermits number:

Langelier Index - A means of expressing the degree of saturation of a water as related to calcium carbonate solubility.

nature.


Micron - The same as a micrometer or 1000th of a millimeter. The typical particle size of importance in deionized water is less than 0.2 µm.


215

APPENDIX Microorganism - Organisms (microbes) observable only through a microscope. Larger, visible types are called organisms. Milligrams Per Liter (mg/l) - A term used to report chemical analyses. Milligrams per liter refers to the milligrams of the compound or element present in 1 liter (1000 milliliters) of water. Another term often used is parts per million (ppm) which is the same for substances in water. 1 mg/l = 1000 ug/l = 1 ppm. Mixed Bed Ion Exchange - The use of both cation and anion exchange resin mixed together in one tank. MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) - Document produced by the manufacturer that contains the chemical and physical properties of a substance that are pertinent to safe handling and storage. NPDES Permit - The National Pollution Discharge Elimination System permit required by and issued by EPA. Organics - Short for organic chemicals; those compounds that contain carbon to hydrogen bonds and are not carbonate related. Orifice - An opening through which a fluid can pass; a restriction placed in a pipe to provide a means of measuring flow. Osmosis - The passage of water through a permeable membrane separating two solutions of different concentrations; the water passes into the more concentrated solution. Oxidizer - A chemical which readily oxidizes more reduced substances. Examples of strong oxidizers are ozone, hydrogen peroxide, chloride, persulfates, and oxygen itself. Ozone - Ozone is a very strong gaseous oxidizing agent. It is used in deionized water systems to kill bacteria and to reduce, by oxidation, the amount of TOC in the water. Ozone is O3 and due to reaction with other things rapidly becomes oxygen (O2). Therefore, it has a short but effective oxidizing potential. It can be destructive to ion exchange using membrane filters and other plastic materials in the system. Particles - A physically measurable contaminant in deionized water. Particles can be bacteria, colloidal material or any other insoluble material. Particle counts are reported as number of particles per liter of a particular size measured in micrometers (microns). Passivation - The means of obtaining the loss of chemical reactivity exhibited by certain metals under special environmental conditions. More specifically, the state in which a stainless steel exhibits a very low corrosion rate. Passivation generates an oxide film that covers and protects the surface of the metal. Pasteurization - A process for killing pathogenic organisms by heat applied for a critical period of time.


Pathogens - Disease-producing microbes.

Permeability - The ability of a body to pass a fluid under pressure.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Piping A cylindrical device used for the conveyance of fluid that is sized by nominal outer diameter dimenHerzlia, sion. ID number: 216389 pH - pH, the negative log of the hydrogen ion concentration, is a measure of the concentration of hydrogen ions (H+) in a water-based solution. The more hydrogen ions that are present, the lower the pH and the more acidic the solution.


Photo Oxidation - The mechanism by which ultraviolet light reduces Total Organic Carbon (TOC) to Carbon Dioxide. If halogenated organics are present, both CO2 and mineral acids can be formed.

216


APPENDIX Polypropylene (Polypro) - A plastic material used to make pipe; thermoplastic member of polyolefin family of plastics; lightest plastic known; polypro is a relatively inert material and contributes little in the way of contamination to pharmaceutical water. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) - A plastic material used to make pipe that is used extensively with water. Prone to produce extractables during start-up in high purity water. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) - A plastic material which is used to make pipe for the distribution of pharmaceutical waters. PVDF is a relatively inert material and contributes little in the way of contamination to pharmaceutical water. Precipitate - An insoluble reaction product; in an aqueous chemical reaction, usually a crystalline compound that grows in size to become settleable. P&ID (Process and Instrument Diagram) - This diagram illustrates schematically, the detailed piping, electrical, and control requirements of the system. Process Flow Diagram (PFD) - A schematic of the system which utilizes graphic symbols and text to illustrate the steps of an operation in proper sequence. A PFD should present a detailed, accurate, and ordered flow of raw material or ingredient through each manufacturing phase. Purified Water - USP Purified Water prepared from water complying with the quality attributes of “Drinking Water” with conductivity in accordance with stage 1, 2 and 3 tests and the following tables. Total Organic Carbon at 0.5 mg/l. Less than 100 CFU/ml (10,000 CFU/100 ml) for FDA microbiological acceptability. Pyrogen - Trace organics which are used as markers of bacterial growth or contamination. Produced by various bacteria and fungi. Critical pharmaceutical and biotechnological processes have restrictions on contamination by these substances, usually at levels near the limit of detection. Primarily polysaccharide (made of linked sugars) in nature. Fever producing substances when administered parenterally to man and certain animals. Resistivity - The measure of the resistance to the flow of electrical current through high purity water. This is measured in millions of ohms-cm or Megohm-cm (Mohm-cm). Resistivity is the reciprocal of Conductivity (R=1/C, 1 Mohm-cm = 1 µS/cm). This provides an easy means of continuously measuring the purity of very low TDS water or ionic concentration. Reverse Osmosis - A process that reverses (by the application of pressure) the flow of water in the natural process of osmosis so that it passes from the more concentrated to the more dilute solution. This is one of the processes used to reduce the ionic TDS, TOC, and suspended materials of feed water through a semipermeable membrane leaving dissolved and suspended materials behind. These are swept away in a waste stream to drain.


Rouge - Rouging is a form of surface corrosion that occurs in some stainless steel water systems.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, Salt - Neutral compound formed of two or more ions. The salt disassociates into cations and anions when dissolved in water. ID number: 216389 Salinity - The presence of soluble minerals in water.

Sanitary Design - A system of design that meets standard, specification, codes, regulatory and industrial guidelines, and acceptable engineering design methods to reach a degree of sanitation required by food, pharmaceutical, and cosmetics processing.


Saturation Index - The relating of calcium carbonate to the pH, alkalinity, and hardness of a water to determine its scale-forming tendency.


217

APPENDIX Scale - The precipitate that forms on surfaces in contact with water as the result of a physical of chemical change. Sedimentation - Gravitational settling of solid particles in a liquid system. Silica - Silicon dioxide (SiO2) and it hydrated forms, classed as reactive and non-reactive. Generally, reactive silica is removed by the anion exchange resin. Reactive silica is only slightly ionized and is held lightly by the anion resin. It is for this reason that silica is the first thing to break through when the resin nears exhaustion. Non-reactive silica is generally considered to be particulate (colloidal) in nature. Soda Ash - A common water-treatment chemical, sodium carbonate. Softening - The removal of hardness (calcium and magnesium) from water. This is a PRETREATMENT process which used cation exchange resin to remove the hardness elements from the water. The hardness elements are calcium and magnesium. The cation resin is regenerated with sodium chloride and during the exchange process, the calcium and magnesium are removed from the water and replaces with sodium ions (Na+). The resulting sodium salts are much more soluble than the salts of calcium and magnesium and do not precipitate which provides better feed water to the RO system. Soluble Silica - The silica present in the water that has actually dissolved in the water. Stability Index - An empirical modification of the saturation index used to predict scaling or corrosive tendencies in water systems. Stainless Steel - Steel to which a significant amount of chromium and nickel has been added to inhibit corrosion. Start-Up - The initial operation of equipment to prove that it is installed properly and operates as intended. Start-up is considered complete when the selected equipment will adequately process water as specified. Sterilization - Refers to the killing of microorganisms in the distribution system. This is normally done periodically by flushing a sterilizing solution, such as hydrogen peroxide or ozone, through the distribution piping system. In some systems, ozone is continuously injected at low levels for continuous sterilization. Surface Water - Surface water is any water where the sources is above ground. This can be rivers, lakes, or reservoirs. Surface waters are usually higher in suspended matter and organic material and lower in dissolved minerals than well water. Thermal Fusion - The joining of two materials (usually metal or plastic) by use of heat only, without any additional material. Usually done by the use of automatic TIG welding in alloy steel tubing welding or with specially designed melting equipment for plastics.


Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) - The term used to describe inorganic ions in the water. Usually measured by measuring the electrical conductance of the water corrected to 25°C.

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Total Organic Carbon (TOC) - Measure of organics in water by their Carbon content. This is one of the Herzlia, parameters used to determine the purity of Semiconductor Grade water. Feed water will have TOC measured in parts per million. UPW will have TOC in parts 216389 per billion (ppb). IDmeasured number: Trihalomethanes (THM) - Compounds present in the feed water that are formed by the reaction of chlorine and the organic material in the water. The most common THM found in water is chloroform which is quite difficult to remove. Activated carbon and degasification can serve to reduce THMs.


218


APPENDIX Tubing - A cylindrical device used for the conveyance of fluid that is sized by its inside diameter dimension. Turbidity - A suspension of fine particles that obscures light rays, but requires many days for sedimentation because of the small particle size. Ultrafiltration - Filter technology similar to reverse osmosis that is capable of filtering colloids and large molecular weight organics out of the water. The filter capability of ultrafiltration filters to 0.005 µm particle size. Ultrafiltration also will remove organic material down to about 1,000 - 10, 000 molecular weight. Ultraviolet Sterilizer (UV) - Ultraviolet lamps used to kill microorganisms in water. These can be placed anywhere in the water system. The wavelength used for control is 254 nanometers (nm). Ultraviolet TOC Reduction - A UV source which partially oxidized organic compounds to ionic species which can be removed. Relies on 185 nm radiation from “ozone producing” mercury lamps (along with 254 nm germicidal radiation). Generally has a longer contact time than for sterilization alone. USP Purified Water - See Purified Water. Vacuum Degasification - The process of removing dissolved and entrained gases from the reverse osmosis product water by creating a vacuum in a tower through which the RO product water flows. The degasifier may be located before the reverse osmosis system, but the majority of the time it will be located after. The most prevalent gas present is carbon dioxide which may be have been generated during pH adjustment of the reverse osmosis feed water. Carbon dioxide can be removed by the anion exchange resin, but that load can be reduced by using the vacuum degasifier. The other gas of concern is the water is oxygen which also is removed by a vacuum degasifier. WFI - USP Water for Injection. Prepared from water complying with the quality attributes of “Drinking Water.” Prepared using Distillation or Double pass reverse osmosis. Conductivity in accordance with Stage 1, 2, and 3 tests and conductivity tables. Total Organic Carbon at 0.5 mg/l. Less than 0.1 CFU/ml (10 CFU/100ml) for FDA acceptability. Less than 0.25 USP EU/ml. 11.11.2

Acronyms and Abbreviations

AC - Alternating Current ACS - American Chemical Society ANSI - American National Standards Institute API - Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient (also known as Bulk Pharmaceuticals)


ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Ar - Argon Herzlia, BOD - Biological Oxygen Demand ID number: 216389 BPC - Bulk Pharmaceutical Chemicals


Btu - British Thermal Units CDI - Electrodeionization Deionization (US Filter)


219

APPENDIX CFU - Colony Forming Units, i.e., viable bacteria cGMPs - Current Good Manufacturing Practices CIP - Clean-In-Place (system) CO2 - Carbon dioxide CS - Clean Steam DCS - Distributed Control System DNA - Deoxyribose Nucleic Acid DI - Deionized, Deionizing, Deionization EDR - Electrodialysis Reversal (Osmonics) EDI - Electrodeionization (Osmonics and Generic) EPA - Environmental Protection Agency EPDM - Ethylene Propylene Diemer EU/ml - Endotoxin Units per milliliter FDA - US Food and Drug Administration gpd - Gallons per day gph - Gallons per hour H+ - Hydrogen HCl - Hydrochloric acid H2CO3 - Carbonic acid H2O2 - Hydrogen Peroxide


H3O+ - Hydroxonium (Hydronium) Ion HCO3- - Bicarbonate Ion H2SO4 - Sulfuric acid KHz - Kilohertz kW - Kilowatt KWh - Kilowatt-hour

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, ID number: 216389 Downloaded on: 6/2/10 4:16 AM

l - Liter

220


APPENDIX l/min - Liters per minute LAL - Limulus Amebocyte Lysate lb - Pound LSI - Langelier Saturation Index (or Langelier Stability Index) LVPs - Large Volume Parenterals m - Meter m/sec (m/s) - Meters per second Mb - Megabyte or Distillate blowdown discharged Md - Mass of Distillate produced Ms - Mass of steam consumed MF - Microfiltration or Micro-filter Mf - Distillate feedwater required ME - Multi-effect (still) µ - Micro (one millionth) µm - Micrometer (micron) MF - Microfiltration mg/l - Milligrams per liter ml - Milliliter mm - Millimeter MM - Multimedia Filter


MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheet MTR - Mill Test Reports

Mr. Shlomo Sackstein Herzlia, NDR - Nondispersive Infrared Analysis ID number: 216389 NIST - National Institute of Standards & Technology

NF - National Formulary (or nanofiltration) nm - Nanometer


NTU - Nephelometric Turbidity Units


221

APPENDIX O3 - Ozone OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration p/ml - Particles per milliliter P&ID - Process and Instrument Diagram PFD - Process Flow Diagram PLC - Programmable Logic Controller PMA - Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association PP - Polypropylene ppb - Parts per billion ppm - Parts per million psig - Pounds per square inch gauge PTFE - Polytetrafluoroethylene PVDF - Polyvinylidene R - Performance ratio of a Distiller Rc - Recovery ration for a still RA - Average RMS of surface (Roughness Averager) RO - Reverse Osmosis rpm - Revolutions per minute SOP - Standard Operating Procedure SPC - Statistical Process Control


SS - Stainless Steel

SVP - Small Volume Parenterals TC - Total Carbon TDS - Total Dissolved Solids THM - Trihalomethanes



TOC - Total Organic Carbon

TOX - Total Organic Halogens

222


APPENDIX US EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency UF - Ultrafiltration or Ultra-filter µmho - Micromho µmho/cm - Micromho per centimeter µS - Microsiemens µS/cm - Microsiemens per centimeter USP - United States Pharmacopoeia UV - Ultraviolet Light VC - Vapor Compression (still) WFI - Water for Injection



223






ISPE Volume 04

Recommend Documents